DocuColor 3535
printer/copier
         user guide
©
    Copyright 2003 by Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial
law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs that are displayed on the screen
such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc.

Internet Explorer is a copyright protected program of Microsoft Corporation. Novell® and NetWare® are registered trademarks of Novell,
Inc. Netscape® is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. Adobe® and PostScript® are registered trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated. TIFF is a copyright of Adobe Systems Incorporated. AppleTalk, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. PCL® and HP-GL® are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation. WinZip® is a
registered trademark of Nico Mak Computing, Incorporated. ACITS LPR Printing for Windows 95 is a copyright of the University of Texas
at Austin.

Xerox®, The Document Company®, The stylized X, and all Xerox product names and product numbers mentioned in this publication are
trademarks of XEROX CORPORATION. Other company brands and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the
respective companies and are also acknowledged.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Table of Contents




                                               Table of Contents iii


                                               Safety Notices vii

                                               Electrical Safety vii
                                                  Disconnect Device viii
                                               Laser Safety viii
                                               Maintenance Safety ix
                                               Operational Safety ix
                                               Ozone Safety x

                                               Notices xi

                                               Radio Frequency Emissions xi
                                                    FCC xi
                                                    In Canada xi
                                               Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval xii
                                               Certifications in Europe xii
                                               It’s Illegal in the USA xiii
                                               It’s Illegal in Canada xv
                                               Environmental Notices for the USA xvi
                                               Environmental Notices for Canada xvi
                                               Product Recycling and Disposal xvii

                                               Conventions xviii

                                               Symbols xviii

                                               Copy 1–1

                                               Getting to Know Your Copier 1–1
                                                  Control Panel 1–4
                                                  Power Switch 1–8
                                                  Audio Tones 1–8
                                                  Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 1–8




X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 P r i n te r / C o pi e r iii                                   iii
TA B L E   OF   CONTENTS

                              Document Glass 1–8
                              Paper Trays 1–9
                              Output Trays 1–10
                              Power Saver Mode 1–11
                           Quick Start Guide to Copying 1–12
                              Making Copies Using the DADF 1–12
                              Making Copies from the Document Glass 1–13
                              Making Copies Using Features 1–14
                           Copier Features 1–18
                              Basic Copying Tab 1–18
                              Added Features Tab 1–31
                              Image Quality Tab 1–43
                              Output Format Tab 1–52
                              Scan Options Tab 1–66
                              Job Assembly Tab 1–76
                           Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 1–82
                              Component Names and Functions 1–82
                              Documents Not Recommended 1–84
                              Loading the Documents 1–84
                           Job Status 1–86
                              Checking Current Jobs 1–86
                              Changing the Print Priority 1–87
                              Checking Completed Jobs 1–88
                           Machine Status 1–89
                              Machine Information 1–91

                           Print 2–1

                           Overview 2–1

                           Scan 3–1

                           Overview 3–1
                           How to Scan 3–2
                           Creating Job Templates 3–4
                           Scanning Features 3–4
                              Basic Scanning Tab 3–4
                              Scan Options Tab 3–10
                              Image Quality / File Format Tab 3–21
                           How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 3–25
                           Scanning in Batches 3–25
                           Managing Scanned Documents 3–26
                           Configuring the Client for Scanning 3–26




iv                                               X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 Pr i n te r / C o pi e r
TA B L E   OF   CONTENTS

                                              Machine Administrator 4–1

                                              Overview 4–1
                                              System Settings 4–2
                                              Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 4–3
                                              Entering and Exiting the System Settings Mode 4–5
                                                 Entering the System Settings Mode 4–5
                                                 Exiting System Settings Mode 4–6
                                              Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 4–6
                                              Common Settings 4–7
                                                 Machine Clock/Timers 4–8
                                                 Audio Tone 4–10
                                                 Screen Defaults 4–12
                                                 Paper Tray Attributes 4–13
                                                 Printing Priority 4–20
                                                 Image Quality Adjustment 4–21
                                                 Other Machine Settings 4–26
                                              Copy Mode Settings 4–26
                                                 Basic Copying Presets 4–27
                                                 Copy Defaults 4–28
                                                 Copy Control 4–41
                                                 Original Size Defaults 4–42
                                                 Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–43
                                                 Custom Colors 4–44
                                              Network Settings 4–44
                                              Scan Mode Settings 4–46
                                                 Basic Scanning Presets 4–46
                                                 Scan Defaults 4–47
                                                 Scan Size Defaults 4–51
                                                 Output Size Defaults 4–52
                                                 Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–53
                                                 Other Scan Settings 4–54
                                              Auditron Administration 4–56
                                                 Create/Check Accounts 4–57
                                                 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4–58
                                                 Enabling Auditron Mode 4–59
                                                 System Administrator Data 4–60
                                                 Delete/Reset All Account Data 4–61

                                              Specifications 5–1

                                              Loading Paper 5–1
                                                 Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 5–2



X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 P r i n te r / C o pi e r                                                         v
TA B L E   OF   CONTENTS

                               Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3
                               Auto Tray Switching 5–3
                               Loading Stock 5–4
                           Machine Specifications 5–12
                               Speed by Media 5–12
                               Dimensions and Weight 5–13
                           Finisher (Optional Accessory) 5–14
                               Using the Finisher 5–14

                           Maintenance 6–1

                           Ordering Consumables 6–2
                           Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 6–3
                           Cleaning the ROS Window 6–4
                           Changing Toner Cartridges 6–7
                           Changing Staple Cartridges 6–10
                           Changing the Fuser 6–11
                           Changing the Waste Toner Container 6–14
                           Changing Drum Cartridges 6–16

                           Troubleshooting 7–1

                           Paper Jam Clearance 7–2
                               Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover 7–3
                               Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover 7–4
                               Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover 7–4
                               Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 7–5
                               Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) 7–5
                               Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit 7–6
                               Paper Jams in the Finisher 7–6
                           Document Jams 7–8
                               Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top) 7–8
                               Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass 7–9
                           Stapler Faults 7–10
                           Resolving Hardware Problems 7–11
                               Toner Cartridge 7–11
                           Resolving Programming Problems 7–12
                           Resolving Processor Problems 7–13
                           Resolving Output Problems using Basic Copying, Added Features,
                           and Image Quality Tabs 7–16
                           Calling for Service 7–20
                           Fault Codes 7–21




vi                                                X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 Pr i n te r / C o pi e r
Safety Notices




                                  The Xerox DocuColor 3535 and the recommended supplies have
                                  been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements.
                                  Attention to the following notes will ensure the continued safe
                                  operation of your printer/copier.


Electrical Safety

                                  •   Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment.
                                  •   Plug the power cord directly into a correctly grounded
                                      electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord. If you do not
                                      know whether or not an outlet is grounded, consult a qualified
                                      electrician.
                                  •   Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect this equipment to
                                      an electrical outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.

                                  WARNING: You may get a severe electrical shock if the
                                  outlet is not correctly grounded.
                                  •   Do not place the printer/copier where people may step on or
                                      trip on the power cord. Do not place objects on the power cord.
                                  •   Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks.
                                  •   Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. These openings are
                                      provided to prevent overheating of the machine.

                                  WARNING: Never push objects of any kind into slots or
                                  openings on this equipment. Making a contact with a voltage
                                  point or shorting out a part could result in fire or electrical
                                  shock.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
vii                                                                                                 vii
•   If any of the following conditions occur, immediately switch off
                                 the power to the machine and disconnect the power cord from
                                 the electrical outlet. Call an authorized Xerox service
                                 representative to correct the problem.
                                 –   The machine emits unusual noises or odors.
                                 –   The power cord is damaged or frayed.
                                 –   A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device
                                     has been tripped.
                                 –   Liquid is spilled into the press.
                                 –   The machine is exposed to water.
                                 –   Any part of the machine is damaged.


         Disconnect Device

                             The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment. It is
                             attached to the back of the machine as a plug-in device. To
                             remove all electrical power from the machine, disconnect the
                             power cable from the electrical outlet.


Laser Safety

                             Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those
                             specified in this documentation may result in a hazardous
                             exposure to laser radiation. This equipment complies with
                             international safety standards. With specific regard to laser safety,
                             the equipment complies with performance standards for laser
                             products set by government, national, and international agencies
                             as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light, as the
                             beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation
                             and maintenance.




v i ii                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Maintenance Safety

                                  •   Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not
                                      specifically described in the documentation that is supplied
                                      with your press.
                                  •   Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not
                                      approved may cause poor performance of the press, and
                                      could create a dangerous condition.
                                  •   Use the supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in
                                      this manual. Keep all of these materials out of the reach of
                                      children.
                                  •   Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with
                                      screws. There are no parts behind these covers that you can
                                      maintain or service.
                                  Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have
                                  been trained to do them by a Xerox representative, or unless a
                                  procedure is specifically described in one of the manuals included
                                  with your press.


Operational Safety

                                  Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to
                                  meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency
                                  examination, approval, and compliance with established
                                  environmental standards.
                                  Your attention to the following safety guidelines will help ensure
                                  the continued safe operation of your digital press:
                                  •   Use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your
                                      digital press. The use of unsuitable materials may result in
                                      poor performance of the machine and possibly a hazardous
                                      situation.
                                  •   Follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or
                                      supplied with the machine.
                                  •   Place the machine in a room that provides adequate space for
                                      ventilation and servicing.
                                  •   Place the machine on a level, solid surface (not on a thick pile
                                      carpet) that has adequate strength to support the weight of the
                                      machine.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                    ix
•   Do not attempt to move the machine. A leveling device that
                   was lowered when your machine was installed may damage
                   the carpet or floor.
               •   Do not set up the machine near a heat source.
               •   Do not set up the machine in direct sunlight.
               •   Do not set up the machine in line with the cold air flow from an
                   air conditioning system.
               •   Do not place containers of coffee or other liquid on the
                   machine.
               •   Do not block or cover the slots and openings on the machine.
                   Without adequate ventilation, the machine may overheat.
               •   Do not attempt to override any electrical or mechanical
                   interlock devices.


               WARNING: Be careful when working in areas identified with
               this warning symbol. These areas may be very hot and could
               cause personal injury.
               If you need any additional safety information concerning the
               machine or materials, contact your Xerox representative.


Ozone Safety

               This product produces ozone during normal operation. The ozone
               is heavier than air, and the quantity is dependent on print volume.
               Providing the correct environmental parameters, as specified in
               the Xerox installation procedures, ensures that concentration
               levels meet safe limits.
               If you need additional information about ozone, request the Xerox
               publication, OZONE, 600P83222, by calling 1-800-828-6571 in
               the USA. For a French language version, call 1-800-828-6571 in
               the USA, then press 2.




x                                               Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Notices




Radio Frequency Emissions


           FCC

                                  The following applies to the product when equipped with the
                                  Token Ring or Banyan Vines connectivity options:
                                  This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
                                  limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
                                  Federal Communications Commission Rules. These limits are
                                  designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
                                  interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
                                  environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
                                  radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
                                  accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
                                  interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment
                                  in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which
                                  case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her
                                  own expense.
                                  Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically
                                  approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the user’s authority
                                  to operate this equipment.
                                  Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain
                                  compliance with FCC regulations.


           In Canada

                                  This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio
                                  noise emissions from digital apparatus as defined in the Radio
                                  interference regulations of Industry Canada.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                    xi
Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval

                           The Xerox DocuColor 3535 is in compliance with various
                           governmental agencies and national safety regulations. All system
                           ports meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits for
                           connection to customer-owned devices and networks. Additions of
                           customer-owned or third-party accessories that are attached to
                           the press must meet or exceed the requirements previously listed.
                           All modules that require external connection must be installed per
                           the installation procedure.


Certifications in Europe

                           The CE marking that is applied to this product symbolizes Xerox
                           Europe’s Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable
                           Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
                           January 1, 1995: - Council Directive 73/23/EEC amended by
                           Council Directive 93/68/EEC, approximation of the laws of the
                           member states related to low voltage equipment.
                           January 1, 1996: - Council Directive 89/336/EEC, approximation
                           of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic
                           compatibility.
                           Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically
                           approved by Xerox Europe may void the user’s authority to
                           operate the equipment.
                           Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain
                           compliance with the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
                           This equipment is not primarily intended for use in a domestic
                           environment.
                           A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced
                           standards can be obtained from your Xerox Europe
                           representative.

                           WARNING: In order to allow this equipment to operate in
                           proximity to Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM)
                           equipment, the external radiation from ISM equipment may
                           have to be limited or special mitigation measures taken.



                           WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic
                           environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
                           which case the user may be required to take adequate
                           measures.




xii                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
It’s Illegal in the USA

                                  Congress, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the
                                  following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fine
                                  or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such
                                  reproductions.
                                  1. Obligations or Securities of the United States Government,
                                  such as:
                                      Certificates of Indebtedness     National Bank Currency
                                      Coupons from Bonds              Federal Reserve Bank Notes
                                      Silver Certificates             Gold Certificates
                                      United States Bonds             Treasury Notes
                                      Federal Reserve Notes           Fractional Notes
                                      Certificates of Deposit         Paper Money
                                      Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government,
                                      such as FHA, etc.
                                      Bonds. (U.S. Savings Bonds may be photographed only for
                                      publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale
                                      of such bonds.)
                                      Internal Revenue Stamps. (If it is necessary to reproduce a
                                      legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp,
                                      this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is
                                      performed for lawful purposes.)
                                      Postage Stamps, canceled or uncanceled. (For philatelic
                                      purposes, Postage Stamps may be photographed, provided
                                      the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75% or
                                      more than 150% of the linear dimensions of the original.)
                                      Postal Money Orders.
                                      Bills, Checks, or Drafts of money drawn by or upon authorized
                                      officers of the United States.
                                      Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever
                                      denomination, which have been or may be issued under any
                                      Act of Congress.
                                  2. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World
                                     Wars.
                                  3. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, Bank, or
                                     Corporation.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                xiii
4. Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright
         owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the
         “fair use” or library reproduction rights provisions of the
         copyright law. Further information of these provisions may be
         obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress,
         Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21.
      5. Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign
         Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.)
      6. Passports. (Foreign Passports may be photographed.)
      7. Immigration Papers.
      8. Draft Registration Cards.
      9. Selective Service Induction Papers that bear any of the
         following Registrant’s information:
          Earnings or Income               Dependency Status
          Court Record                    Previous military service
          Physical or mental condition
          Exception: U. S. Army and Navy discharge certificates may be
          photographed.
      10. Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by
          military personnel, or by members of the various Federal
          Departments, such as FBI, Treasury, etc. (unless photograph
          is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.)
          Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states:
          Automobile Licenses - Drivers’ Licenses - Automobile
          Certificates of Title.
      The above list is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its
      completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your attorney.




xiv                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
It’s Illegal in Canada

                                  Parliament, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the
                                  following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fines
                                  or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such
                                  copies.
                                  1. Current bank notes or current paper money.
                                  2. Obligations or securities of a government or bank.
                                  3. Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper.
                                  4. The public seal of Canada or of a province, or the seal of a
                                     public body or authority in Canada, or of a court of law.
                                  5. Proclamations, orders, regulations or appointments, or notices
                                     thereof (with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have
                                     been printed by the Queen’s Printer for Canada, or the
                                     equivalent printer for a province).
                                  6. Marks, brands, seals, wrappers or designs used by or on
                                     behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province, the
                                     government of a state other than Canada or a department,
                                     board, Commission or agency established by the Government
                                     of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other
                                     than Canada.
                                  7. Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of
                                     revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by
                                     the government of a state other than Canada.
                                  8. Documents, registers or records kept by public officials
                                     charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies
                                     thereof, where the reproduction falsely purports to be a
                                     certified copy thereof.
                                  9. Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind
                                     without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner.
                                  The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance,
                                  but it is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its
                                  completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your solicitor.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 xv
Environmental Notices for the USA

                       As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Xerox Corporation has
                       determined that this printer/copier model meets the ENERGY STAR
                       guidelines for energy efficiency.
                       ENERGY STAR is a registered United States trademark.
                       The ENERGY STAR Program is a team effort between the
                       Environment Protection Agency and the office equipment industry
                       to promote energy-efficient copiers, printers, fax, multifunction
                       machines, personal computers, and monitors. Reducing product
                       energy consumption helps combat smog, acid rain and long-term
                       changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result
                       from generating electricity.


Environmental Notices for Canada

                       Terra Choice Environmental Services, Inc. of Canada has verified
                       that this Xerox product conforms to all applicable Environmental
                       Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized impact to the
                       environment.

                       Environment Canada established the Environmental Choice
                       program in 1988 to help consumers identify environmentally
                       responsible products and services. Copier, printer, digital press,
                       and fax products must meet energy efficiency and emissions
                       criteria, and exhibit compatibility with recycled supplies. Currently,
                       Environmental Choice has more than 1600 approved products
                       and 140 licensees. Xerox has been a leader in offering EcoLogo
                       approved products. In 1996, Xerox became the first company
                       licensed to use the Environmental Choice EcoLogo for its copiers,
                       printers, and fax machines.




xvi                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Product Recycling and Disposal

                                  Xerox operates a worldwide equipment takeback and reuse/
                                  recycle program. Contact your Xerox sales representative (1-800-
                                  ASK-XEROX) to determine whether this Xerox product is part of
                                  the program. For more information about Xerox environmental
                                  programs, visit www.xerox.com/environment.html.
                                  If your product is not part of the Xerox program and you are
                                  managing its disposal, please note that the product may contain
                                  lead, mercury and other materials whose disposal may be
                                  regulated due to environmental considerations. For recycling and
                                  disposal information, contact your local authorities. In the United
                                  States, you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance
                                  web site at www.eiae.org.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               xvii
Conventions




               Standardized conventions have been used in this manual to assist
               you in visually locating and identifying information quickly.


Symbols

               CAUTION: This symbol alerts you to an action that may cause
               damage to hardware, software, or result in the loss of data.



               WARNING: Warnings alert you to an action that may cause
               bodily injury.



               The 1 2 3... symbol indicates the beginning of a task or work
               process you should use to complete a procedure and is followed
               by the first step of a numbered procedure, task, or work process.

           1
           2
           3
               NOTE: This calls your attention to information that is helpful, but
               not essential to complete a procedure or task.




x v i ii                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
1.     Copy




Getting to Know Your Copier

                                  Your new Xerox DocuColor 3535 works as a digital copier. This
                                  section will provide an introduction to your new product.
                                  For more information about copy features, refer to the section
                                  entitled Copier Features in this chapter.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/CopierXerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
                     Printer/Copier                                                                1–1
2        1
                                    3




       4

                                            6 5
       10
                                        7
       8
       9




                      11




            12
            13                               17



            14

            15




                 16




1– 2                  Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Number               Name                                        Function

  1          Duplex Automatic           Automatically feeds up to 50 documents. Also works as a
             Document Feeder            Document Glass cover when making copies from the document
             (DADF)                     glass.

  2          Original Input Area        Location where originals are fed onto platen glass for copying.

  3          Original Catch Tray        Original return area.
  4          Control Panel              Used to program the copier for individual jobs.

  5          Center Output Tray         Output delivered here face down.

  6          Power Switch               Powers machine On/Off.
  7          Front Door Panel           Access for consumables replacement.

  8          Trays 1 & 2                Adjustable paper trays: 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5
                                        through A3) holding up to 520 sheets based on paper weight.

  9          Trays 3 & 4 (Tandem Tray   High capacity paper trays holding a total of 2080 sheets of 8.5 x
             Module)                    11 in. (A4 and B5) based on paper weight.

  10         Tray 5 (Bypass)            For specialty papers which cannot be loaded in Trays 1 - 4.

  11         Casters                    Lockable casters for mobility and safety.

  12         Left Upper Cover           Push the release lever up to access the paper path.

  13         Duplex Cover               Open this cover to access paper path.

  14         Left Side Middle Cover     Access to paper path.

  15         Left Side Lower Cover      Access to paper path.

  16         Trays 3 & 4 (3-Tray        Paper trays holding 520 sheets each of 8.5 x 11 in. (A4 and B5)
             Module)                    based on paper weight.

  17         Finisher (Optional         Finisher (Optional Accessory) that accomodates up to 1000
             Accessory)                 sheets of output and offers stapling options.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                       1 –3
Control Panel



                                  Contrast Dial     Touch Screen        Numeric Keypad




                         The Control Panel is used to program individual jobs.
                         •   The Numeric Keypad is used to enter copy quantity or other
                             numeric information.
                         •   The Contrast Dial adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
                         •   The Touch Screen is where you make selections for the jobs
                             you are programming.




             Language    Use this feature to change the language on the Touch Screen. The
                         language set will remain until the machine is powered off/on.




               Access    Use this feature to change machine default settings, and to create
                         or modify user access numbers.




           Power Saver   Lights up green and is initiated automatically if the machine is left
                         idle for a specific amount of time. Press the Power Saver button
                         to bring the machine back to full power after the warm-up period.




1– 4                                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Interrupt     Stops the printer/copier during the current job. This allows
                                  another job to be run. There are two indications that the job has
                                  been interrupted:
                                  •   The printer/copier displays a message indicating that Job
                                      Interrupt has been selected, and it is ready to copy.
                                  •   The indicator light flashes to acknowledge that the Interrupt
                                      button has been selected. The light will continue to flash until
                                      the printer/copier has completed the activity in process. The
                                      light will remain constant to identify interrupt has occurred and
                                      a new job can be programmed.
                                  After Interrupted jobs are complete, press the Interrupt button
                                  again to return the machine to the first job.




                    Clear All     Returns the machine to the original Default State. When the Clear
                                  All button is selected in Interrupt mode, default settings are
                                  applied only to the interrupting job.




                         Stop     Pressing Stop will halt the copy job in process at the completion of
                                  the current activity. A message asking if you want to press Start
                                  to continue the job or Clear All to cancel the job is displayed on
                                  the Touch Screen.




                         Start    Initiates a job or continues the copying process.




                        Clear     Clears an incorrect numeric entry.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 1 –5
Job Memory     Indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory.




               Online   Indicator lights when data is being received from a client.




            Features    Allows you to alternate between scanning and copying feature
                        screens.




           Job Status   Allows you to check or cancel jobs currently executing, or to
                        check or print saved documents.




       Machine Status   Allows you to check the machine status, meters, the state of
                        consumables, and output reports.




1– 6                                                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Touch Screen


                                                                                     Unused
                                                              Tab                    Memory

                                      Message
                                      Area                                                   Quantity

                                      Selection
                                      Buttons




                                  Press the buttons and tabs displayed in the Touch Screen to
                                  select features or respond to on screen instructions. The selected
                                  buttons are highlighted to indicate activation. Buttons that do not
                                  have three-dimensional shadows are not active, and cannot be
                                  selected.
              Message Area        Messages such as machine status and operation instructions are
                                  displayed here
            Unused Memory         The amount of memory remaining to store a scanned original is
                                  displayed prior to output.
                    Quantity      The copy quantity is entered using the keypad, and appears in the
                                  upper right corner of the message area. Select between 1 - 999.
                          Tab     Feature Tabs displayed on the Touch Screen contain the
                                  programmable selections available for each feature.
          Selection Buttons       Allow for the selection of feature / functions required for the
                                  desired output. Buttons identified, as More… have additional
                                  features, which will be displayed when this button is selected.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 1 –7
Power Switch

                                The power switch is located on the right top corner of the machine.
                                Press the switch to the ( | ) position to turn the power on.
       Ground Fault Protector   Located at the rear of the machine where the power cord attaches.
                                The Ground Fault Protector removes all power from the machine if
                                a fault is detected in the power to the printer/copier. To reset the
                                GFI, press the switch in.


            Audio Tones

                                Tone volume may be adjusted or turned off in System Settings
                                mode. Three types of Audio Tones are available to assist the
                                operator in selecting features and functions.
                 Single Tone    Acknowledges when a feature is selected, or a job has been
                                completed.
                 Double Tone    Acknowledges an alert, such as a paper jam or consumable
                                replacement.
                  Triple Tone   Acknowledges an improper selection or an error in button
                                selection has occurred.


            Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

                                Automatically feeds up to 50 documents onto the glass for
                                copying. Documents must be placed face up into the Document
                                Handler.


            Document Glass

                                When using the Document Glass the original document must be
                                placed face down and in the upper left-hand corner of the
                                Document Glass.
                                NOTE: The DADF must be closed for the Auto Color option to
                                function




1– 8                                                             Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Paper Trays

                                  Trays 1,2,3 and 4 are located at the lower front of the printer/
                                  copier. Tray 5 (Bypass) is located on the left side of the printer/
                                  copier.
                                  There are two possible tray configurations on the DocuColor 3535.
                                  Option 1 is a 3-Tray module. Option 2 is a Tandem Tray module.

                          3-Tray Module

                   Trays 1 - 4    The 3-Tray Module consists of Trays 1 - 4. Trays 1 - 4 are all
                                  adjustable from 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5 through A3), and
                                  can each accommodate up to 520 sheets based on paper weight.

                          Tandem Tray Module

                                  The Tandem Tray Module consists of 4 paper trays.
                                  With the Tandem Tray Module:
               Trays 1 and 2      Adjustable from 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5 through A3), and
                                  can each accommodate up to 520 sheets based on paper weight.
               Trays 3 and 4      High capacity paper trays accommodating a total of 2080 sheets,
                                  (8.5x11 in., A4, and B5) based on paper weight.

                          All Tray Modules

                                  Trays 1 - 4 can feed Transparencies and paper weights 18 lb. to
                                  110 lb. (64 to 220 gsm). The machine automatically detects the
                                  size and orientation of loaded paper. The paper type must be set
                                  in System Setting mode.
                                  Trays 1 - 4 can accommodate approximately 300 striped
                                  transparencies and approximately 450 stripeless transparencies.
                                  Both striped and stripeless transparencies can be used, but
                                  stripeless transparencies are recommended. It is not
                                  recommended that you output more than 20 transparencies at a
                                  time. If your job is larger than 20 pages, use the Transparency
                                  Separators feature.
                                  NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher
                                  (optional accessory). Transparencies cannot be used for 2 Sided
                                  output.
                                  NOTE: When making copies you can select Transparencies from
                                  Tray 5 (Bypass). If you want to select Transparencies from Trays
                                  1-4, your System Administrator must change the Paper Type
                                  setting in System Settings mode. To select Transparencies for
                                  print jobs, you can select the correct paper type in the printer
                                  driver at the client.
                                  For more information on selecting paper type, refer to the Machine
                                  Administrator chapter.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 1 –9
Tray 5 (Bypass)

                          Feeds specialty papers, non-standard sizes, and 12x18 in., and
                          can accommodate up to 95 sheets based on paper weight.
                          Approximately 20 transparencies should be loaded in Tray 5
                          (Bypass) at a time.


         Output Trays

                          The Center Output Tray delivers output face down, and holds up
                          to 400 sheets. The Center Output Tray holds up to 200 sheets
                          when the Finisher (optional accessory) is installed.
                          The Finisher Tray (optional accessory) holds up to 1000 sheets,
                          and can staple dual and single staples.



                          NOTE: The DocuColor printer/copier should not be moved after it
                          has been installed. Moving may damage the equipment, carpet or
                          floor. If equipment must be moved, please contact your Xerox
                          representative for assistance.




1– 1 0                                                   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Power Saver Mode

                                  Power Saver Mode automatically cuts off the electricity to the
                                  machine if it is left unused for a certain duration. The Power Saver
                                  feature has two modes, a Low Power mode and Sleep mode. The
                                  machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has
                                  elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time.
                                  The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time
                                  elapses.
                                  •   Low Power mode
                                      In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is
                                      lowered to save power. The display goes out, and the Power
                                      Saver button on the control panel lights. To use the machine,
                                      press the Power Saver button. Power Saver goes out to
                                      indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled. The default
                                      is 15 minutes.
                                  •   Sleep mode
                                      In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low
                                      Power mode. The display goes out, and the Power Saver
                                      button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press
                                      the Power Saver button. Power Saver goes out to indicate that
                                      the Power Saver feature is canceled. The Sleep mode default
                                      is 45 minutes after Low Power mode is engaged.
                                  For more information on setting Power Saver mode timers, refer to
                                  the Machine Administrator chapter in this guide.

                          Exiting the Power Saver Mode

                                  The Power Saver mode can be exited in two ways:
                                  •   By pressing the Power Saver button
                                  •   By receiving a print job




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              1– 11
Quick Start Guide to Copying

                         This section will lead you quickly through a number of features
                         and steps used in making copies.
                         For more information about copy features, refer to the section
                         entitled Copier Features, in this chapter.


         Making Copies Using the DADF




                     1   Place original in the Original Input Area face up. A stack of up to
                         50 originals may be place in the tray.

                     2   Slide the documents forward until the green indicator lights,
                         indicating the document is inserted correctly.

                     3   Adjust the side guide to the size of the paper. The guide should
                         just touch the side of the document.

                     4   Press the Start button.

                     5   Remove the copies from the output tray. Remove the originals
                         from the Original Catch Tray of the DADF.




1– 1 2                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Making Copies from the Document Glass




                            1     Open the Document Cover.

                            2     Place the original face down on the Document Glass, aligning the
                                  left rear corner with the registration guide.

                            3     Close the cover before making a copy.

                            4     Press the Start button.

                            5     Remove the copies from the output tray. Remove the original
                                  document from the Document Glass.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 13
Making Copies Using Features

                          The feature tabs on the Touch Screen enable you to configure the
                          printer/copier to suit your copying needs.
                          The procedure below leads you quickly through a number of
                          features you may want to use in making copies. It assumes that
                          the feature tabs are in the default configuration.
                          For more information about copy features, refer to the section
                          entitled Copier Features, in this chapter.




                     1    Press Clear All to clear any previous programming
                          Use any of the following steps that apply to your job and desired
                          outcome.

                     2    Use the Numeric Keypad to enter the desired quantity. If you make
                          a mistake, press the Clear button on the numeric keypad to clear
                          an incorrect quantity

                     3    Select the option in Output Color if a setting other than the default,
                          Auto Color, is desired.
                          Perform one of the following:
                          •   Press the desired Output Color option on the Basic Copying
                              tab.
                          •   Press More… to see additional options
                          Press the desired option and press the Save button to return to
                          the Basic Copying screen.




1– 1 4                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
4     Select an option under 2 Sided if a setting other than the default, 1
                                  to 1 Sided, is desired.
                                  If another option is desired, perform one of the following:
                                  •   1 to 1 Sided for default one-sided copies.
                                  •   1 to 2 Sided for two-sided copies from one-sided input.
                                      •   Press Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output,
                                          as for books.
                                      •   Press Head to Toe for two-sided, head to toe output, as for
                                          calendars.
                                  •   2 to 2 Sided for two-sided copies from two-sided input.
                                      You must specify the original orientation and the copy
                                      orientation.
                                      •   Press Head to Head for two-sided head-to-head output,
                                          as for books.
                                      •   Press Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as
                                          for calendars.
                                  •   2 to 1 Sided for one-sided copies from two-sided originals.
                                      •   Press Head to Head if your original documents are two-
                                          sided, head-to-head.
                                      •   Press Head to Toe if your original documents are two-
                                          sided head-to-toe.
                                  Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
                                  Orientation for the loaded document(s). Press Save.

                            5     Select an option in Reduce/Enlarge if a setting other than the
                                  default, 100%, is desired.
                                  If another option is desired, perform one of the following:
                                  •   Press the desired Reduce/Enlarge option on the Basic
                                      Copying screen.
                                  •   Press More… to see additional options.
                                  Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to
                                  the Basic Copying screen.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                1 – 15
6   Select an option in Paper Supply if a tray other than the default,
             Auto Paper, is desired.
             If another option is desired, perform one of the following:
             •   Press the desired Paper Supply option on the Basic Copying
                 screen.
             •   Press More… to see additional options.
             Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to
             the Basic Copying screen.

         7   On the Added Features tab, select Output to program the desired
             copy output option.
             •   Press Collated for collated output. Collated will automatically
                 be selected when the DADF is used.
             •   Press Collated / Stapled to direct output to the Finisher
                 (optional Accessory). Press Finisher Tray to set the Output
                 Destination. Press Stapling on the Output screen to select
                 the Original Orientation and Staple Position on the output.
             Select the desired option and press the Save button to return to
             the Basic Copying screen.

         8   On the Image Quality tab, select Original Type to display the
             Original Type screen.
             •   Press an option for Original Type if a setting other than the
                 default is desired.
             Press the Save button to return to the Image Quality screen.




1– 1 6                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
9     If other features are desired, select the appropriate feature tab
                                  and feature button on the Touch Screen.

                          10      Perform one of the following:
                                  •   If you use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder, place the
                                      document face up into the Original Input Area. The Document
                                      Feeder Lamp lights when the document is in the correct
                                      position. Ensure that the paper guide is against the original
                                      document.
                                  •   Raise the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) and
                                      place the document face down on the Document Glass.
                                      •   Ensure that the document lies against the registration area
                                          at the left rear corner of the glass.
                                      •   Lower the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).

                          11      Press the Start button.

                          12      When copying is completed, perform the following:
                                  •   Remove the copies from the Center Output Tray or Finisher
                                      Tray on the right side of the printer/copier.
                                  •   Remove the original document(s) from the Document Glass or
                                      Original Catch Tray.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               1 – 17
Copier Features


         Basic Copying Tab




                             Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Basic
                             Copying tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                             pages.
            Output Color     Allows you to select the colors to be used for copying.
                 2 Sided     Allows you to select one or two-sided originals, with options for
                             one or two-sided output.
          Reduce/Enlarge     Allows you to select the size of the output image from automatic
                             reduction/enlargement, preset values, or variable independent
                             ratios for the image length and width.
            Paper Supply     Allows you to select the tray that contains the correct output paper
                             size and type.




1– 1 8                                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Output Color




                                  The Output Color feature allows you to select the desired output
                                  color.
                                  The following options are available:
                         Auto     The Auto Color option enables the copier to determine if the
                                  document is black and white or color. If the document is black and
                                  white, the Black option is selected automatically. If the document
                                  is colored, the Full Color option is selected.
                                  The DADF must be closed for the Auto Color option to function. In
                                  order for the scanner to accurately sense color on a document, the
                                  color area must be greater than 50 mm2 (approximately 2
                                  inches2). If the color area is less, select the Full Color option.
                                  Also some very dark colors may be sensed as black. In this case,
                                  select the Full Color option as well.
                                  NOTE: With Auto selected, the printer/copier runs at the speed for
                                  color copying, even if the originals are B/W.
                                  NOTE: The sensitivity of Auto for detecting color vs. B/W can be
                                  adjusted in System Settings mode under Output Color
                                  Recognition.
                   Full Color     Enables the copier to make copies using all four toner colors:
                                  Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black.
                        Black     The Black option should be selected when the desired output is a
                                  black and white copy. Black and white copies can be made from
                                  any original. With Black selected only Black toner is used.
                  Dual Color      The Dual Color option enables the copier to make copies in two
                                  preset colors. The color of colored areas and black areas of the
                                  document can be specified.
                Single Color      The color setting Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan can
                                  be selected.
                                  NOTE: Custom colors can be programmed in System Settings
                                  mode under Setting Custom Colors.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                1 – 19
You can select several Output Color options from the Basic
             Copying tab or select the More… button to get a complete set of
             options.




         1   On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Output Color to
             display the Output Color screen.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   Auto
             •   Full Color
             •   Black
             •   Dual Color
             •   Single Color

         3   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE: Dual Color cannot be used with Negative Image.
             NOTE: When Single Color or Dual Color is selected, Original Type
             cannot be selected.




1– 2 0                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
2 Sided




                                  Use the 2-Sided feature to select one or two-sided originals, with
                                  options for one or two-sided output.
                                  The following options are available:
                 1 to 1 Sided     Makes one-sided copies from one-sided input. This is the default
                                  setting.
                 1 to 2 Sided     Makes two-sided copies from one-sided input.
                 2 to 2 Sided     Makes two-sided copies from two-sided input.
                 2 to 1 Sided     Makes one-sided copies from two-sided input.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 21
You can select several 2 Sided options from the Basic Copying tab
             or use the Added Features tab.




         1   On the Basic Copying tab select More… under 2 Sided.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   1 to 1 Sided
             •   1 to 2 Sided
                 •   Select Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output,
                     as for books.
                 •   Select Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as
                     for calendars.




1– 2 2                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
•   2 to 2 Sided
                                      Select the option for your Originals
                                      •   Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-to-
                                          head.
                                      •   Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-to-toe.
                                      Select the option for your Copies
                                      •   Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for
                                          books.
                                      •   Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for
                                          calendars.




                                  •   2 to 1 Sided
                                      •   Select Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-
                                          to-head.
                                      •   Select Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-
                                          to-toe.




                            3     Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
                                  Orientation for the loaded document(s).

                            4     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:1 to 2 Sided or 2 to 2 Sided cannot be selected when using
                                  Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass), Repeat Image, Book
                                  Duplex, Transparency Separators, Poster, or Booklet Creation.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               1 – 23
Reduce/Enlarge




                    The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at
                    different magnifications. Copies may be reduced to 25% or
                    enlarged to 400%, in 1% increments.
                    The following options are available:
            100%    Copies are the same size as the original. This is the default
                    setting.
           Auto%    This option automatically reduces or enlarges the copy, based on
                    the size and orientation of the document and the paper supply
                    selected. This option is applied only to standard size documents.
                    The copy image will be reduced or enlarged in the same
                    proportions for X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions.
                    Auto Paper selection is not available when Auto% is selected.
         Presets%   There are 7 preset percentages to choose from. The selected
                    percentage displays in the value box on the Reduce/Enlarge
                    screen. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode.




1– 2 4                                               Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Variable%      Select the Variable% option to enter the desired percentage for
                                  Reduce/Enlarge. Use either the up and down arrows or the
                                  number buttons that display on the Touch Screen.
         Independent X-Y%         Select the Independent X-Y% option to copy the image at
                                  different, independent magnifications from 25% to 400% for the X
                                  and Y directions.
                                  For example, you can enlarge the image to 129% in the X
                                  direction and reduce it to 64% in the Y direction by using the
                                  Touch Screen arrows.
    Independent X-Y% Auto         The Auto option automatically calculates the reduction and
                                  enlargement based on the original document size and on the
                                  output paper size when using Independent X-Y%. The copy image
                                  will be reduced or enlarged in the different proportions for X and Y
                                  directions.



                                  You can select several Reduce/Enlarge options from the Basic
                                  Copying tab or select the More… button to get a complete set of
                                  options.

                                  Using Presets%




                            1     On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Reduce/Enlarge.

                            2     On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Presets% option.

                            3     Select 100%, Auto%, or the desired preset percentage.

                            4     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                1 – 25
Using Variable%




         1   Under Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying tab select More…

         2   On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Variable% option.




         3   Perform one of the following:
             •   Press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the
                 percentage value in increments of 1.
             •   Use the Numeric Keypad on the Touch Screen to enter a
                 specific percentage from 25 through 400. Press the Clear (C)
                 button to clear the value entered.

         4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 2 6                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Using Independent X-Y%




                            1     Under Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying tab select More…

                            2     On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Independent X-Y%
                                  option.




                            3     Perform one of the following:
                                  •   Press the up arrow to increase the percentage value for X,
                                      X&Y, or Y in increments of 1.
                                  •   Press the down arrow to decrease the percentage value for X,
                                      X&Y or Y in decrements of 1.
                                  •   Press Auto.

                            4     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 27
Paper Supply




              The Paper Supply option enables you to select output paper size
              and type.
              The Basic Copying tab displays the Auto Paper selection feature.
              This option enables the copier to automatically detect the original
              document size and select the same standard size paper from
              Trays 1, 2, 3, or 4.
              The Basic Copying tab also displays the contents of three other
              trays enabling you to specify your selection for output size. The
              Paper Supply More… button enables you to access the Paper
              Supply screen.
              The paper size displayed for Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 is set when you
              adjust the paper guides as part of the process of loading paper.
              The paper type for the trays can be set in System Settings mode.
              You may select both the paper size and paper type on the detail
              screen when loading paper into Tray 5 (Bypass).




          1   On the Basic Copying tab under Paper Supply, select one of the
              following:
              •   Select Auto to enable the copier to automatically select the
                  appropriate paper.
              •   Select More… to display the Paper Supply screen.

          2   If More... is selected, select the tray that displays the desired
              paper.

          3   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 2 8                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Programming Paper Supply for Tray 5 (Bypass)




                                  You must select the paper size and paper type when loading
                                  paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Auto Size Detect can be used with
                                  standard size paper.




                            1     On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Paper Supply.

                            2     Select Tray 5 (Bypass) to display the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen.

                            3     Perform one of the following to select Paper Size:
                                  •   Select Auto Size Detect.
                                  •   Select Standard Size.
                                      •   Select the paper size from the list. Use the up and down
                                          arrows to see more selections.
                                  •   Select Non-standard Size and enter in the X (width) and Y
                                      (length) dimensions by using the arrows.
                                      •   Press the left or right arrows to decrease or increase the X
                                          dimension (140-483mm or 5.5-19.0 inches).
                                      •   Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Y
                                          dimension (100-305mm or 3.9-12.0 inches).




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              1 – 29
4   Select the appropriate Paper Type using the up and down arrow
             buttons. You can select Plain, Bond, Recycled, Transparency, and
             Lightweight - Extra Heavyweight paper.

         5   Select Save to return to the Paper Supply screen.

         6   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE:Paper Tray 5 cannot be used with the following features:
             Auto Size Detect with 1 to 2-Sided and 2 to 2-Sided, Auto
             Reduction/Enlargement, Auto Center, Corner Shift, Negative
             Image, Mirror Image, Book Duplex, Booklet Creation, Multiple Up,
             Repeat Image, Bound Originals and Poster.




1– 3 0                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Added Features Tab




                                  Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Added
                                  Features tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                                  pages.
                      2 Sided     Allows you to select one or two-sided originals, with options for
                                  one or two-sided output.
                      Output      Enables you to select the desired output order and destination of
                                  the output.
                Margin Shift      Enables you to center a document image, shift the image to one
                                  edge or move the image to a specified edge of the output copy.
               Border Erase       Allows you to erase any undesired images around the border or
                                  center of a document.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              1 – 31
2 Sided




                        Use the 2 Sided feature to select one or two-sided originals, with
                        options for one or two-sided output.
                        The following options are available:
         1 to 1 Sided   Makes one-sided copies from one-sided input. This is the default
                        setting.
         1 to 2 Sided   Makes two-sided copies from one-sided input.
         2 to 2 Sided   Makes two-sided copies from two-sided input.
         2 to 1 Sided   Makes one-sided copies from two-sided input.




1– 3 2                                                  Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
You can select several 2 Sided options from the Basic Copying tab
                                  or the Added Features tab.




                            1     On the Added Features tab select 2 Sided.

                            2     Select the desired option:
                                  •   1 to 1 Sided
                                  •   1 to 2 Sided
                                      •   Select Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output,
                                          as for books.
                                      •   Select Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as
                                          for calendars.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            1 – 33
•   2 to 2 Sided
                 Select the option for your Originals
                 •   Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-to-
                     head.
                 •   Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-to-toe.
                 Select the option for your Copies
                 •   Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for
                     books.
                 •   Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for
                     calendars.




             •   2 to 1 Sided
                 •   Select Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-
                     to-head.
                 •   Select Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-
                     to-toe.




         3   Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
             Orientation for the loaded document(s).

         4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE:1 to 2-Sided or 2 to 2-Sided cannot be selected when using
             Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass), Repeat Image,
             Transparency Separators, Poster, or Booklet Creation.




1– 3 4                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Output




                                  The Output feature enables you to select the destination of the
                                  output and determine whether it will be collated or uncollated.
                                  The following options are available:
                         Auto     The copier automatically determines which output mode (collated
                                  or uncollated) for the job and delivers the copies to the output tray.
                     Collated     Collated sets are delivered to the output tray.
                  Uncollated      Uncollated sets are delivered to the output tray.
                                  Collated refers to copies that are delivered as sets. Each copy set
                                  is in the order in which the originals were place in the DADF. For
                                  example, if the originals are placed in the DADF in 1, 2, 3 order
                                  and you want to make 3 copies, the copy sets will output in 1, 2, 3
                                  order.
                                  Uncollated refers to copies that are delivered in the order in which
                                  they were copied. For example, if the originals are placed in the
                                  DADF in 1, 2, 3 order and you want to make 3 copies, the copy
                                  sets will output in 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3 order.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                1 – 35
1   On the Added Features tab select Output.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   Auto
             •   Collated
             •   Uncollated

         3   If you have a Finisher (optional accessory), select the desired
             Output Destination:
             •   Center Output Tray
             •   Finisher Tray

         4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 3 6                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Stapling

                                  This section describes the procedure for programming the Output
                                  feature to staple output. You must have a Finisher (optional
                                  accessory) to staple output.




                            1     On the Added Features tab select Output/Stapling.




                            2     Select Collated/Stapling.

                            3     Select Stapling. The Stapling screen is displayed.




                            4     Select the desired stapling position.
                                  The Finisher Tray is automatically selected as the Output
                                  Destination.

                            5     Select the desired Original Orientation:
                                  •   Head to Top
                                  •   Head to Left
                                  Select Save.

                            6     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 37
Margin Shift




                          The Margin Shift feature allows you to shift the position of the
                          image on the copy. The image can be centered on the copy or
                          moved to the top, bottom, left or right. When copying both sides,
                          different settings can be set for Side 1 and Side 2.
                          The following types of Margin Shift are available:
              No Shift    Copies are made without shifting the original. This is the default
                          setting.
          Auto Center     Select this to center an image on the copy when the original and
                          copy paper are a different size. It may also be used to center a
                          reduced or enlarged image on the output paper.
          Corner Shift    Select this to move your image to a specified corner.
         Variable Shift   Select this to move your image up, down, left or right by entering
                          in a value. The range is from 0 to 50mm (0.0-2.0 inches) in 1mm
                          (0.1 inch) increments.




1– 3 8                                                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Using the Auto Center Feature




                            1     On the Added Features tab select Margin Shift.

                            2     Select Auto Center.




                            3     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 39
Using the Margin Shift/Variable Shift Feature




         1   On the Added Features tab select Margin Shift.

         2   Select Margin Shift/Variable Shift.

         3   Select the desired option:




             •   Side 1
             •   Side 2

         4   Select the desired shift option:
             •   No Shift
             •   Auto Center
             •   Corner Shift
                 •   Press the arrow icon that illustrates the desired location of
                     the image on the output copy.
             •   Variable Shift
                 •   Press the left arrow to shift the image toward the left edge.
                     Press the right arrow to shift the image toward the right
                     edge.
                 •   Press the up arrow to shift the image toward the top edge.
                     Press the down arrow to shift the image toward the bottom
                     edge.

         5   Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
             Orientation for the original.

         6   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 4 0                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Border Erase




                                  The Border Erase feature enables you to eliminate unwanted
                                  marks near the edges of the original from the output copy. The
                                  range for Border Erase is 0 through 50mm (0.0 through 2.0
                                  inches) in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments.
                                  Border Erase options can be used individually or combined
                                  together:
               Top & Bottom       For Normal the default is 2mm (0.1 inch). For Variable Erase the
                                  default is 5mm (0.2 inch).
                 Left & Right     For Normal the default is 2mm (0.1 inch). For Variable Erase the
                                  default is 5mm (0.2 inch).
                       Center     The default is 0mm (0 inches).
                                  The selected settings are applied to both sides of 2-sided copies.
                                  When the image is reduced or enlarged, the selected percentage
                                  will be applied to the Border Erase.
                                  When making copies the copier adds a margin of 2mm (0.1 inch)
                                  to all sides. This cannot be eliminated.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 41
1   On the Added Features tab select Border Erase.

         2   Select Variable Erase.

         3   Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Border
             Erase amount(s) for Top & Bottom, Left & Right, and Center.

         4   Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
             Orientation for the loaded document(s).

         5   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 4 2                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Image Quality Tab




                                  Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Image
                                  Quality tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                                  pages.
               Original Type      Enables you to select the type of original document you wish to
                                  copy to ensure optimum copy quality.
             Auto Exposure        Prevents the background color of an original from appearing on
                                  the output copies.
    Lighter/Darker/Contrast       Allows you to adjust the lightness, darkness and contrast of the
                                  output copy.
           Sharpness/Color        Allows you to adjust the amount of edge definition and the overall
                Saturation        richness of the color of the output copy.
                  Color Shift     Allows you to shift all of the copy colors toward the adjacent hue.
              Color Balance       Enables you to set the balance of Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and
                                  Black by varying degrees of density for each color.
      Image Quality Presets       Automatically adjusts the image quality settings to produce output
                                  with various predetermined effects.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              1 – 43
Original Type




                                 The Original Type feature enables you to define the kind of original
                                 document you wish to copy. The copier automatically makes
                                 adjustments to optimize the copy based on the original type.
                                 The following types are available:
                 Text & Photo    Use for original documents that contain pictures and printed text,
                                 as you often see in magazines or professional journals.
                                 NOTE:This is the default setting. Originals do not have to contain
                                 photographs and text. Simply use this setting to apply the best
                                 sharpness and density levels automatically for optimum color
                                 quality on all your color copies.
                         Text    Use for text documents composed of fine line characters or other
                                 high contrast documents with bright, dense colors. Selecting this
                                 option suppresses background color.
                        Photo    Use for photographs or lithographs.
         Other Color Originals   Use for original documents containing colored background such
                                 as maps, originals marked by highlighter pens, and documents
                                 printed on inkjet printers.




1– 4 4                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
1     On the Image Quality tab select Original Type.

                            2     Select the type of Original:
                                  •   Text & Photo
                                      Select the Photo Type that best describes the photo in the
                                      original document
                                      •   Halftone: Use this option when copying from newspapers
                                          or magazines
                                      •   Photograph: Use this option when copying photos
                                      •   Color Copies: Use this option when copying Xerographic
                                          reproductions
                                  •   Text
                                  •   Photo
                                      Select the Photo Type that best describes the photo in the
                                      original document
                                      •   Halftone: Use this option when copying from newspapers
                                          or magazines
                                      •   Photograph: Use this option when copying photos
                                      •   Color Copies: Use this option when copying Xerographic
                                          reproductions
                                  •   Other Color Originals
                                      Select the option that best describes the original document
                                      •   Map: Use this option when copying from originals with
                                          colored backgrounds such as maps
                                      •   Highlighted Originals: Use this option when copying from
                                          originals marked with highlighter pen
                                      •   Inkjet Originals: Use this option when copying from
                                          originals made on Inkjet printers

                            3     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 45
Auto Exposure




              This feature prevents the background color of an original from
              appearing on the output copy. A newspaper or colored paper are
              examples of this type of original.




          1   On the Image Quality tab select Auto Exposure.

          2   Select On.

          3   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 4 6                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Lighter/Darker/Contrast




                                  The Lighter/Darker feature enables you to adjust the overall
                                  lightness or darkness of the output copy. Contrast allows you to
                                  adjust the clearness of the image. If you increase the Contrast,
                                  the copy appears sharp & vivid and is composed of mainly high
                                  and low density elements. If you decrease the Contrast, the copy
                                  is softer and renders more uniformly using mid-tones.
                                  There are seven levels of adjustment for Lighter/Darker and five
                                  levels of adjustment for Contrast.




                            1     On the Image Quality tab select Lighter/Darker/Contrast.

                            2     Press the up and down arrows to Lighten or Darken the original.

                            3     Press the up and down arrows to adjust the Contrast the original.

                            4     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 47
Sharpness/Saturation




              The Sharpness feature allows you to adjust the amount of edge
              definition on the copies. The Color Saturation feature allows you
              to adjust the overall richness of color on the copy. There are five
              levels of adjustment for each feature.




          1   On the Image Quality tab select Sharpness/Saturation.

          2   Press the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the
              Sharpness of the original.

          3   Press the up and down arrows to adjust the Color Saturation of
              the original.

          4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
              NOTE:Color Saturation cannot be adjusted when the Black is
              selected for Output Color.




1– 4 8                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Color Shift




                                  The Color Shift feature allows you to shift all of the copy colors
                                  toward the adjacent hue.
                                  If you select one of the Warm buttons, the red colors shift toward
                                  the yellow hue, the green colors shift toward the cyan hue, and the
                                  blue colors shift toward the magenta hue. All colors between these
                                  original colors also shift in the same direction.
                                  If you select one of the Cool buttons, the red colors shift toward
                                  the magenta hue, the blue colors shift toward the cyan hue, and
                                  the green colors shift toward the yellow hue. Again, all colors
                                  between these original colors also shift in the same direction.




                            1     On the Image Quality tab select Color Shift.

                            2     Press the button for the desired Color Shift ranging from Coolest
                                  to Warmest.

                            3     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:Color Shift cannot be adjusted when Black is selected for
                                  Output Color.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               1 – 49
Color Balance




              The Color Balance feature allows you to adjust the balance
              between colors and the overall amount of color on the output
              copies. You can adjust the levels of all four process colors
              (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black) for their low, medium and high
              density ranges.




          1   On the Image Quality tab select Color Balance.

          2   Select the button for the color you want to adjust.

          3   Select the desired density (Low, Medium, High) and perform one
              of the following:
              •   Press the up arrow to increase the amount of color to be
                  added.
              •   Press the down arrow to decrease the amount of color to be
                  added.

          4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 5 0                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Image Quality Presets




                                  The Image Quality Presets feature automatically changes Image
                                  Quality settings to produce various predetermined effects.
                                  The following options are available:
                      Normal      Makes no changes to the image quality and produces copies with
                                  the same quality and density of the original. This is the default
                                  setting.
                       Lively     Uses the highest color saturation to produce rich, vivid output
                                  colors.
                       Bright     Produces a sharp, clear image on the copy.
                       Warm       Produces a soft image on the copy by transforming low density
                                  colors into light and reddish colors. Use this setting to apply a light
                                  pink tone to skin colors and to give a soft tone to dark, warm
                                  colors.
                         Cool     Produces a strong, clear blue tone on the copy. This setting can
                                  be used to make the blue color of water stronger and to make
                                  dark, cold colors clearer.
  Background Suppression          Prevents undesired marks or images that are printed on the back
                                  of an original from appearing on the output copies.
              Auto Contrast       Adjusts brightness and saturation to produce clearer looking
                                  images.




                            1     On the Image Quality tab select Image Quality Presets.

                            2     Press the button for the desired option.

                            3     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 1 – 51
Output Format Tab




                                 Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Output
                                 Format tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                                 pages.
                   Multiple Up   Allows you to copy 2 or 4 images from multiple originals onto a
                                 single page.
   Transparency Separators       Allows you to insert blank paper separators between
                                 transparencies. Also copy sets can be made in conjunction with
                                 the transparencies.
                       Covers    Allows you to add covers to your copied sets using paper drawn
                                 from a different tray than your copies.
                 Repeat Image    Allows you to copy a single image multiple times onto one page.
                       Poster    Allows you to create a poster size reproduction of the original
                                 document by creating multiple images that can be trimmed and
                                 joined together after.
         Mirror Image/Negative   Enables you to create negative, mirror or negative mirror images
                        Image    on your output copy.




1– 5 2                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Multiple Up




                                  The Multiple Up feature enables you to copy 2 or 4 images from
                                  multiple originals onto a single page.
                                  NOTE:When using this feature place the originals in the DADF.
                                  NOTE:Depending on the size of the original, some image loss
                                  might occur along the edge of the image.
                                  The following options are available:
                         1 Up     Copies one image on each output copy.
                         2 Up     Copies two images on each output copy.
                         4 Up     Copies four images on each output copy.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                          1 – 53
1   On the Output Format tab select Multiple Up.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   1 Up
             •   2 Up
                 Select the desired Image Order:
                 •   Left to Right
                 •   Right to Left
                 •   Top to Bottom




1– 5 4                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
•   4 Up
                                      Select the desired Image Order:
                                      •   Horizontally from the upper left corner
                                      •   Horizontally from the upper right corner
                                      •   Vertically from the upper left corner
                                      •   Vertically from the upper right corner




                            3     Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
                                  Orientation for the loaded documents.

                            4     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:Multiple Up cannot be used with the following features:
                                  Auto Paper Tray Selection, Bound Originals, Book Duplex, Poster,
                                  Repeat Image, Booklet Creation, and Mixed Size Originals.
                                  NOTE:When Border Erase or Margin Shift is used with Multiple
                                  Up, the erase or shift amount is reflected on each original
                                  document.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 55
Transparency Separators




                               When the Transparency Separators feature is used, the copier
                               automatically inserts a blank sheet of paper between the
                               transparency copies. In addition to the transparency set, you may
                               also select copy sets.
                               The following options are available:
                         Off   Copies are made without transparency separators.
           Blank Separators    A blank sheet of paper is inserted between every transparency.
                               Only one set can be made.
         Separators + N Sets   A blank sheet of paper is inserted between every transparency. In
                               addition the quantity selected determines how many copy sets (N
                               sets) will also be made as part of the job.
     No Separators + N Sets    A transparency set is made without blank separators. In addition
                               the quantity selected determines how many copy sets (N sets) will
                               also be made as part of the job.
                               NOTE:When using this feature, load transparencies into a Paper
                               Tray. Make sure that there is paper of the same size and
                               orientation in another tray for the separators and/or copy sets.
                               NOTE:Separators are blank sheets of paper and are not added to
                               the Meter count.




1– 5 6                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Selecting Blank Separators




                            1     On the Output Format tab select Transparency Separators.

                            2     Select Blank Separators.




                            3     Select Paper Tray Settings.




                            4     Select the size/orientation of the transparencies loaded in the
                                  Paper Tray.

                            5     Select the paper tray to use for the Blank Separators.

                            6     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 1 – 57
Selecting Separators + N Sets




         1   On the Output Format tab select Transparency Separators.

         2   Select Separators + N Sets.




         3   Select Paper Tray Settings.




         4   Select the size/orientation of the transparencies loaded in the
             Paper Tray.

         5   Select the paper tray to use for the Separators and N sets.

         6   Select Save.

         7   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE:Transparency Separators cannot be used with the following
             features: Uncollated, Reduce/Enlarge, Covers, Booklet Creation,
             Book Duplex, and 2-Sided output.




1– 5 8                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Covers




                                  This feature allows you to add covers to your copied sets, using
                                  paper drawn from a different tray than your copies. You can have
                                  blank or printed covers.
                                  The following options are available:
                  No Covers       No Covers are added to the copy set. This is the default setting.
               Front Covers       A Front Cover is added to the copy set with or without an image.
       Front & Back Covers        A Front & Back Cover is added to the copy set with or without an
                                  image.
                                  To copy an image on only one side of the cover when making 2-
                                  Sided copies, insert a blank sheet in the original set of documents
                                  in the appropriate position before making copies.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 59
1   On the Output Format tab select Covers.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   No Covers
             •   Front Covers
             •   Front & Back Covers

         3   If you selected Front Covers or Front & Back Covers, select the
             desired Printed Covers option.

         4   Select Paper Tray Settings.




         5   Select the correct paper tray for the Body Pages and Covers.

         6   Select Save.

         7   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE:Covers cannot be used with the following features:
             Uncollated, Repeat Image, Poster, Transparency Separators,
             Booklet Creation, and Auto Paper selection.




1– 6 0                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Repeat Image




                                  The Repeat Image feature enables you to copy a single image
                                  multiple times onto one page.
                                  The following options are available:
                           Off    This is the default setting, which produces only one image per
                                  output page.
                Auto Repeat       This option enables the copier to automatically determine the
                                  number of output images that will fit on a single page.
             Variable Repeat      With this option you can specify the number of images that will
                                  print on a single sheet by selecting the number of rows and
                                  columns.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               1 – 61
1   On the Output Format tab select Repeat Image.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   Off
             •   Auto Repeat
             •   Variable Repeat




                 •     Press the up arrow to increase the number of images to
                       print in a column, or press the down arrow to decrease the
                       number. The range is from 1 through 33.
                 •     Press the up arrow to increase the number of images to
                       print in a row, or press the down arrow to decrease the
                       number. The range is from 1 through 23.

         3   For Auto Repeat and Variable Repeat select the Image Layout for
             the output copy.
             •   Even: Centers all the images on the output copy.
             •   Bias: Places the images one after the other on the output
                 copy.

         4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE:Repeat Image cannot be used with the following features:
             Auto Paper selection, Multiple Up, Bound Originals, Poster, Book
             Duplex, Covers, and Booklet Creation.




1– 6 2                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Poster




                                  This feature allows you to create a poster size reproduction of the
                                  original document by creating multiple images that can be trimmed
                                  and joined together after. There will be a 10mm image overlap on
                                  the copies to allow for the trimming and joining required to
                                  assemble the copies into a poster.
                                  When using this feature place the original on the Document Glass
                                  in the same orientation as the orientation of the paper loaded in
                                  the selected paper tray. The DADF cannot be used.
                                  The following options are available:
                         2x2      The document is copied and divided onto a total of four sheets,
                                  two in the X direction and two in the Y direction.
                         3x3      The document is copied and divided onto a total of nine sheets,
                                  three in the X direction and three in the Y direction.
                         4x4      The document is copied and divided onto a total of sixteen sheets,
                                  four in the X direction and four in the Y direction.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 63
1   On the Output Format tab select Poster.

         2   Select the desired option:
             •   2x2
             •   3x3
             •   4x4

         3   Select the desired Paper Tray.

         4   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
             NOTE:Poster cannot be used with the following features: Tray 5
             (Bypass), Auto Paper Tray selection, 1 to 2 Sided, 2 to 2 Sided,
             Multiple Up, Collated, Repeat Image, Bound Originals, Covers,
             Book Duplex, Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, and
             Build Job.




1– 6 4                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Mirror Image/ Negative Image




                                  When the Mirror Image feature is selected, the output copy
                                  appears as a mirror image reflection of the original document.
                                  The Negative Image feature reverses the colors of the whole
                                  document image.
                                  NOTE:Negative Image cannot be used with Dual Color.
                                  NOTE:When Negative Image is used with Border Erase, the
                                  Border Erase area becomes white.




                            1     On the Output Format tab select Mirror Image/ Negative Image.

                            2     Select the desired options:
                                  •   Select On or Off for Mirror Image.
                                  •   Select On or Off for Negative Image.

                            3     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 65
Scan Options Tab




                                Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Scan
                                Options tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                                pages.
                Original Size   Enables you to specify the size of the original document to be
                                copied.
         Mixed Size Originals   Allows you to place documents of mixed sizes into the DADF for
                                copying.
             Bound Originals    Automatically scans two adjoining pages of a bound document
                                and copies them onto two separate sheets of paper.
              Image Rotation    Automatically rotates the image to match the copy output paper
                                when the original orientation and the copy paper are different.
         Original Orientation   Allows you to indicate the top of the original so that your output will
                                be oriented as desired.
                Book Duplex     Allows you to make two-sided copies from a bound original.




1– 6 6                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Original Size




                                  Use the Original Size feature to specify the original document
                                  size.
                                  The following options are available:
                 Auto Detect      The copier automatically recognizes the size of standard
                                  documents in the DADF or on the Document Glass. This is the
                                  default setting.
             Standard Sizes       Select the document size from one of the 11 preset sizes. These
                                  presets can be changed in System Settings mode. You must
                                  place the original on the Document Glass.
        Non-standard Sizes        Allows you to manually enter the size of the document placed on
                                  the Document Glass.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            1 – 67
1   On the Scan Options tab select Original Size.

         2   Perform one of the following:
             •   Select Auto Size Detect to have the copier identify the size of
                 the original document.
             •   Select the appropriate size of the document from one of the
                 preset size buttons.
             •   Enter the width (X) and length (Y) dimensions of the original
                 document.
                 •   Press the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the X and
                     Y dimensions. X dimensions range from 15 to 432mm (0.6
                     to 17.0 inches) in 1 mm (0.1 inch) increments. Y
                     dimensions range from 15 to 297mm (0.6 to 11.7 inches) in
                     1 mm (0.1 inch) increments.

         3   Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




1– 6 8                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Mixed Size Originals




                                  This option allows you to place documents of standard mixed
                                  sizes into the DADF for copying. When the Mixed Size Originals
                                  feature and Auto Paper selection are selected, the copier
                                  automatically identifies each document size and selects the
                                  appropriate paper tray. You can also specify a paper tray so that
                                  all copies are made on the same size paper.




                            1     On the Scan Options tab select Mixed Size Originals.

                            2     Select the desired option:
                                  •   Off: when documents are all the same size.
                                  •   On: when documents are different sizes.

                            3     Load the mixed size originals with one edge of every sheet aligned
                                  evenly against the top left corner of the DADF to avoid misfeeds.

                            4     Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
                                  Orientation for the loaded documents.

                            5     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:Mixed Size Originals cannot be used with the following
                                  features: Covers, Transparency Separators, Multiple Up, Auto
                                  Repeat Image, and Booklet Creation.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 69
Bound Originals




                                 The Bound Originals feature enables you to copy a bound
                                 document such as books, magazines, notebooks, or stapled sets.
                                 When this feature is selected, each page is copied onto a
                                 separate sheet of paper.
                                 You must place your bound document face down in the upper left
                                 corner of the Document Glass. The DADF cannot be used.
                                 The following options are available:
                           Off   This is the default.
          Left Page then Right   Copies are made starting from the left page of a bound document.
          Right Page then Left   Copies are made starting from the right page of a bound
                                 document.
         Top Page then Bottom    Copies are made starting from the top page of a bound document.




                                 When using the Bound Originals feature, the Center Erase option
                                 is available. This option allows you to remove the shadow caused
                                 by the center binding of bound documents when they are copied.




1– 7 0                                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
1     On the Scan Options tab select Bound Originals.

                            2     Select the desired format:
                                  •   Left Page then Right
                                  •   Right Page then Left
                                  •   Top Page then Bottom

                            3     Select which pages are to be copied:




                                  •   Both Pages
                                  •   Left Page Only
                                  •   Right Page Only

                            4     Press the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the Center
                                  Erase amount from 0 to 50mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches).

                            5     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:Bound Originals cannot be used with the following
                                  features: Auto Size Detect for Tray 5, Multiple Up, Repeat Image,
                                  Book Duplex, and Poster.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 71
Image Rotation




                          This feature allows the machine to automatically rotate the image
                          so that the orientation of the document matches the output paper.
                          The following options are available:
                    Off   The copier will not rotate the image even if the orientation differs
                          from the output paper.
             Always On    The copier will automatically rotate the image if the orientation
                          differs from the output paper.
         On during Auto   The copier will automatically rotate the image if the orientation
                          differs from the output paper only when Auto Paper selection is
                          selected, or Auto % is selected in Reduce/Enlarge. If a specific
                          paper tray is selected without Auto %, image rotation will not
                          occur.




                     1    On the Scan Options tab select Image Rotation.

                     2    Select the desired option:
                          •   Off
                          •   Always On
                          •   On during Auto

                     3    If using Mixed Size Originals, select Rotation Direction. Select
                          the desired option:
                          •   Portrait Original - Left Edge
                          •   Portrait Original - Right Edge




1– 7 2                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
4     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:Image Rotation cannot be used with the following features:
                                  Auto Size Detect for Paper Tray 5, Repeat Image and Poster.
                                  NOTE:When Booklet Creation is selected, Image Rotation occurs
                                  automatically regardless of the Image Rotation setting.

                          Original Orientation




                                  The document orientation must be set to indicate the top of the
                                  original when using the following features: 2-Sided, Margin Shift,
                                  Border Erase, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Mixed Size Originals,
                                  and Independent X-Y%.
                                  Original Orientation is designed as follows:
                 Head to Top      Select this when placing the top of the document at the top of the
                                  DADF or Document Glass.
                Head to Left      Select this when placing the top of the document towards the left
                                  of the DADF or Document Glass.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 73
Book Duplex




                                 The Book Duplex feature enables you to make 2 Sided copies of a
                                 bound document such as books, magazines, notebooks, or
                                 stapled sets.
                                 You must place your bound document face down in the upper left
                                 corner of the Document Glass. The DADF cannot be used.
                                 The following options are available:
          Left Page then Right   Copies are made starting from the left page of a bound document.
          Right Page then Left   Copies are made starting from the right page of a bound
                                 document.
         Top Page then Bottom    Copies are made starting from the top page of a bound document.
                                 Along with the Book Duplex feature, Center Erase is offered. This
                                 option allows you to remove the shadow caused by the center
                                 binding of bound documents when they are copied.




1– 7 4                                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
1     On the Scan Options tab select Book Duplex.

                            2     Select the desired option:
                                  •   Left Page then Right
                                  •   Right Page then Left
                                  •   Top Page then Bottom

                            3     Select Start Page & End Page and select the desired options.
                                  Press Save to return to the Book Duplex screen.

                            4     Press the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the Center
                                  Erase amount from 0 to 50mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches).

                            5     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             1 – 75
Job Assembly Tab




                            Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Job
                            Assembly tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                            pages.
             Stored Jobs    Allows you to program various feature settings in the built-in
                            copier memory as a single job.
               Build Job    Allows you to build a job using different settings for each page or
                            segment of a job.
         Booklet Creation   Automatically copies your originals such that the output set can be
                            folded into a booklet.




1– 7 6                                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Stored Jobs




                                  The Stored Jobs feature allows you to program various feature
                                  settings in the built-in copier memory as a single job. Up to 8 jobs
                                  can be stored and up to 18 characters can be entered for each job
                                  name. This feature is especially helpful for complex jobs that you
                                  run frequently.
                                  You can retrieve stored jobs and apply their programming features
                                  to a new copy job. Deleting stored jobs frees that memory
                                  position for storing different jobs.

                                  Storing a Job




                            1     Program the features and options you want to save for future use.

                            2     On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs.

                            3     Select Store.

                            4     Select the desired icon to identify the job number.

                            5     Select Enter/Change Name to name the job.

                            6     Select the job number.

                            7     Enter a name up to 18 characters long for the stored job and
                                  select Save.

                            8     Select Close.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              1 – 77
Deleting a Job




         1   On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs.

         2   Select Delete.

         3   Select the job number you want to delete.

         4   Select the desired option:
             •   Yes: to confirm the deletion.
             •   No: to cancel the deletion.

         5   Select Close.
             You can now store a new job in place of the job you deleted.

             Retrieving a Job




         1   On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs.

         2   Select the job number you want to retrieve.

         3   Select Close.

         4   Select Start to make copies.




1– 7 8                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Build Job




                                  Build Job enables you to program, scan, and store individual job
                                  segments of a large or complex job, and then print all the
                                  segments as one complete job.




                            1     On the Job Assembly tab, select Build Job.

                            2     Select On.

                            3     To make a sample set of your originals, select On for Sample Set.
                                  Select Save.

                            4     Load your originals for the first segment of the job.

                            5     Set the desired features for the job and press Start.

                            6     Check that Next Original is selected while the document is being
                                  copied.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            1 – 79
7   Load the next segment of the job, and set the desired features.
             •   Chapter Division - If you select Chapter Division, the next
                 document will be copied onto Side 1, if 2 Sided is selected.
             •   Change Settings - Select Change Settings to change job
                 features for the next segment of the job. When you select
                 Change Settings, the Basic Copying screen is displayed.
                 Select the desired features.

         8   Select Start. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each job segment.

         9   Select Last Original after the last segment is scanned.
             •   Sample Set Off - If you selected Off for Sample Set, the entire
                 job will be output.
             •   Sample Set On - If you selected On for Sample Set, one copy
                 of the job will be output.
                 •   Check the sample set, and select whether or not to output
                     the remaining number of copies. Select Start.




1– 8 0                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Booklet Creation




                                  This feature copies your originals to make a booklet. The
                                  maximum number of originals that can be used is 100.
                                  If the number of originals is not a multiple of four, blank pages will
                                  be automatically added.
                                  The following options are available to indicate binding location:
        Left Bind / Top Bind      Use this for a booklet that will be bound in a left to right format or
                                  top to bottom format, such as a calendar.
                  Right Bind      Use this for output that will be bound in a right to left format.




                            1     On the Job Assembly tab select Booklet Creation.

                            2     Select the required binding location.
                                  •   Left Bind/Top Bind
                                  •   Right Bind

                            3     Select Gutter if you want to add space in the center of your output
                                  for a gutter ranging from 0 to 50mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches).

                            4     Select Covers if you want to add a cover to the job.

                            5     Select Originals to specify 1 or 2 Sided originals and their
                                  orientation.

                            6     Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features.
                                  NOTE:Booklet Creation cannot be used with Auto Paper
                                  selection, Mixed Size Originals, 2 Sided, Uncollated, Multiple Up,
                                  Repeat Image, Poster, Covers, and Transparency Separators.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                   1 – 81
Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

                                 This section describes the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder
                                 (DADF) for the DocuColor Series printer/copier.
                                 The DADF automatically feeds up to 50 sheets of the same size
                                 documents or mixed size documents, one at a time, onto the
                                 Document Glass, feeding the top sheet first. Documents are
                                 delivered to the Original Catch Tray after they have been copied.
                                 NOTE: If the DADF belt is dirty and the original is a thin or
                                 transparent document, background may appear on the output.
                                 This may also occur when copies are made using the Document
                                 Glass. Place a white sheet of paper of the same size on top of the
                                 document being copied to eliminate background until the belt is
                                 cleaned.


             Component Names and Functions

                                 The following items are the principal components of the Duplex
                                 Automatic Document Feeder.
         Document Feed Lamp      This lamp displays a green arrow when a document is inserted
                                 correctly into the feeder. This light can also indicate a document
                                 jam.
           Original Catch Tray   Documents are delivered to this tray.
           Original Input Area   Place documents here to start copying.




1– 8 2                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Document Specifications

                                  Always use the recommended types of input documents so that
                                  the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder operates within the
                                  design specifications. Documents jams may occur if non-standard
                                  documents are used, resulting in damaged documents.
                                  Standard DADF document specifications
                      Weight      The document should be 16 lb. to 32 lb. (64 to 128 gsm)
                         Size     North and South America:
                                  8.5x5.5 in., 8.5x11 in., 8.5x14 in., 11x17 in., A4
                                  European market:
                                  A5, A4, A3, 8.5x13 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x11 in., 11x17 in.
                                  If the DADF senses non-standard size documents in the feeder, a
                                  message is displayed and the printer/copier stops. Place such
                                  non-standard documents on the Document Glass, or enter the
                                  document size using the Original Size feature on the Scan Output
                                  tab.
                                  For more information about Original Size, refer to the section
                                  entitled Scan Output Tab in this chapter.
                                  If the input document is slightly smaller or larger than a standard
                                  size document, the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder may
                                  detect it as a standard size document. Dark areas or an image
                                  loss along the edges may occur. Enter the document size using
                                  the Original Size feature, or use the Border Erase feature on the
                                  Added Features tab.
                                  For more information about Border Erase, refer to the section
                                  entitled Added Features Tab, in this chapter.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                1 – 83
Documents Not Recommended

                         The following document types cause document jams or
                         malfunction of the printer/copier. Make copies of these documents
                         by placing them directly onto the Document Glass.
                         •   Book, pamphlet, and booklet documents
                         •   Broken, creased, or paste-up documents
                         •   Documents with clips and staples
                         •   Transparent documents (the document size cannot be
                             detected automatically, or the DADF belt is copied)
                         •   Coated paper or carbon-backed documents
                         •   Documents smaller than A5 size (8.5 x 5.5 inches)
                         •   Documents with glossy surfaces such as photographs


         Loading the Documents


                    Placing Documents on the Document Glass




                     1   Open the DADF.

                     2   Place the document face down, and align it against the inside left
                         cover of the Document Glass.

                     3   Close the DADF.




1– 8 4                                                   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Loading Documents in the DADF

                                  You can load up to 50 documents from 16 lb. to 32 lb. (64 to 128
                                  gsm) into the DADF.




                            1     Remove any paper clips or staples from the documents. Align the
                                  documents.

                            2     Place the documents face up in the Original Input Area of the
                                  DADF. Slide the documents to the left until the green Document
                                  Feed Lamp lights.
                                  If the lamp does not light, readjust the alignment and or the
                                  placement of the documents until the lamp lights.

                            3     Slide the document guide toward the stack of documents until the
                                  guide lightly touches the side edges of the documents. If the
                                  document guide is set too tight, the documents may not feed or
                                  may become damaged. If the guide is set too loose, the
                                  documents may skew as they feed, which could cause a
                                  document jam.

                            4     Extend the DADF Original Catch Tray to accommodate the size of
                                  the documents.

                            5     Press the Start button.
                                  The documents automatically feed one by one, onto the
                                  Document Glass. The feeding begins from the top of the stack of
                                  documents.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               1 – 85
Job Status

                          This section describes how to check currently copying, printing,
                          queued, or completed jobs. It also describes how to change print
                          schedules to cancel print jobs, or to change the print priority of
                          queued jobs.


         Checking Current Jobs

                          This section describes the procedure for checking currently
                          copying, printing or queued jobs.




                     1    Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job
                          Status screen is displayed.

                     2    Select Current and Pending Jobs. The Current and Pending
                          Jobs screen is displayed.
                          A job list is displayed if jobs are stored to memory. The list
                          displays currently printing or queued jobs and documents stored
                          to memory. It also displays the current status of each job.




                     3    Display the desired job using the up and down arrow buttons, and
                          select the desired item from the list. The screen for checking the
                          job status is displayed.




1– 8 6                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
4     Check the status of the selected job.
                                  •   To cancel a job select Stop. This cancels processing of the
                                      currently printing, copying, or queued job.
                                  •   You can change the print priority when there are two or more
                                      queued jobs. To change the print priority:
                                      •   Select Promote Job. The print order will be changed so
                                          that the job you instructed higher print priority to will be
                                          printed after the current job.
                                  NOTE: If you continue to change the print priority again after
                                  changing the print order in the print schedule, priority will be given
                                  to the job that you last instructed.


           Changing the Print Priority

                                  The print order of jobs queued for printing can be changed. If there
                                  are two or more queued jobs in the list, you can change the print
                                  order so that jobs are printed in the order that they were received.




                            1     Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job
                                  Status screen is displayed.

                            2     Select Print Waiting Jobs. Queued jobs in the list are printed
                                  according to the print priority. If there are no queued jobs in the
                                  list, Print Waiting Jobs cannot be selected.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                1 – 87
Checking Completed Jobs

                         This section describes how to check completed jobs. A list
                         displays whether jobs have been completed normally or not. This
                         list also allows you to check details of completed jobs in more
                         detail.




                     1   Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job
                         Status screen is displayed.

                     2   Select Completed Jobs. The Completed Jobs screen is
                         displayed. A job list is displayed if there are completed jobs.




                     3   Select the job you want to check using the up and down arrow
                         buttons. The screen for checking the job status is displayed.

                     4   Select Close. The screen returns to the Job Status screen.




1– 8 8                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Machine Status




                                  Machine status can be checked by selecting the Machine Status
                                  button on the Control Panel. The following items are on the
                                  Machine Status screen:
                                  •   Serial Number
                                  •   Machine Configuration
                                  •   Software Version
                                  •   Consumable Status
                                  •   Paper Tray Information
                                  •   Billing Meters
                                  •   Error Reports
                                  Machine information, Consumable status, Paper Tray information,
                                  Billing Meters, and Error Reports can be checked by selecting the
                                  appropriate tab on the Machine Status screen.
      Checking Paper Trays        To check the status of the Paper Trays, select the Paper Tray
                                  button on the Machine Status screen.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               1 – 89
Billing Meters and Printing    Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab to check the current meter
                    Reports     readings and to print reports.




    Checking Consumables        Select the Consumables tab to check the status of the machine
                                consumables.




         Error History Report   Select the Faults tab to print the Error History Report.




1– 9 0                                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Machine Information




                            1     Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed.

                            2     Select Machine Information. The Machine Information screen is
                                  displayed.




                            3     The Serial Number will be displayed.

                            4     Select Close to return to the Machine Status screen.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                        1 – 91
1– 9 2   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
2.     Print




Overview

                                  The DocuColor 3535 works with a Network Controller to process
                                  and output print jobs. Print jobs are submitted from the client
                                  workstation and processed (Raster Image Processed, or RIPped)
                                  through the machine’s Network Controller. Print jobs are then
                                  transferred to the DocuColor 3535 for printing.
                                  For more information on print functions and features, refer to the
                                  Network Controller user documentation.




1
Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               2–1
2– 2   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
3.     Scan




Overview

                                  Your printer/copier can also be used as a scanner. You can select
                                  a job template that you have created, or you can use one of the
                                  default job templates on the machine. The job template will
                                  determine the characteristics of your scanned job and its
                                  destination.
                                  For more information on scanning functions, refer to the Network
                                  Controller user documentation.
                                  NOTE: The Network Controller user documentation may refer to
                                  Job Templates as Mailboxes.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             3 –1
How to Scan

                  You can scan originals using one of the default job templates on
                  the machine, or you can use a job template that you have created.
                  For more information on creating job templates, refer to the
                  Network Controller user documentation.
                  NOTE: The Network Controller user documentation may refer to
                  Job Templates as Mailboxes.




              1   Place the document in the DADF or on the Document Glass.

              2   Select Scan from the Menu screen. The Job Template screen is
                  displayed.




              3   Select the desired template by selecting it on the screen, or enter
                  the Job Template number using the numeric keypad on the
                  Control Panel.
                  •   Select Refresh on the Job Template screen to refresh the list
                      of job templates.
                  •   Select Template Description on the Job Template screen to
                      view a description of the selected job template.




3– 2                                               Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
4     Press Close on the Job Template screen. The Basic Scanning
                                  Screen is displayed.




                            5     Select the desired scanning features on the feature tabs.

                            6     Press Start to begin scanning, or press Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.
                                  For more information on scanning features, refer to the Network
                                  Controller user documentation.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             3–3
Creating Job Templates

                           Job Templates can be created, edited, copied, and deleted at the
                           client using the software supplied with the Network Controller. You
                           can create these templates with different features and settings
                           that will be applied to specific scan jobs on the machine.
                           For more information on creating job templates, refer to the
                           Network Controller user documentation.
                           NOTE: The Network Controller user documentation may refer to
                           Job Templates as Mailboxes.


Scanning Features


       Basic Scanning Tab




                           Below is a brief explanation of each feature available on the Basic
                           Scanning tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                           pages.
          Job Template     Allows you to apply preexisting job templates to jobs on the
                           machine.
           Output Color    Allows you to select the output color for specific types of originals.
                           You can choose from Full Color, Grayscale, Black (Text & Photo),
                           Black (Text), or Black (Photo).
        Scan Resolution    Allows you to select the desired scan resolution. Select from 200
                           dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.
       2 Sided Originals   You can scan both sides of 2-sided originals automatically.




3– 4                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Job Template




                                  Scanned documents can be saved in JPEG or TIFF format. The
                                  Job Template must be configured before you can scan. Contact
                                  your Network or System Administrator to setup a personal job
                                  template.




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select Job Template on the Basic Scanning tab.




                            3     Select the desired Job Template.

                            4     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              3–5
Output Color




                    Output Color allows you to define the kind of original document
                    you wish to scan. The default is Auto.
                    The following options are available:
       Full Color   Best used when scanning color originals. The text in the
                    document will be clearer, and the color graduation will be
                    represented in greater detail.
       Grayscale    Select when scanning originals with different shades of black and
                    white. This option can be used for originals that cannot be
                    scanned in black and white only.
           Black    Select when the desired output is a black and white copy. Black
                    and white copies can be made from any original. With Black
                    selected only Black toner is used. Select Black (Text & Photo)
                    when you are scanning documents that contain both text and
                    photos. Select Black (Text) when you are scanning text
                    documents. Select Black (Photo) when you are scanning photos.




               1    Load your originals and select the desired job template.

               2    Select the desired Output Color on the Basic Scanning tab.

               3    Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                    scanning features.




3– 6                                                Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Scanning Resolution




                                  Scan Resolution allows you to select the desired scan resolution.
                                  Select from 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi.
                                  The higher the scanning resolution, the larger the image file
                                  created.




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select the desired Scan Resolution on the Basic Scanning tab.

                            3     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               3–7
2 Sided Originals




                          2 Sided Originals allows you to select 1 Sided or 2 Sided originals
                          and output. You can select 2-Sided options from the Basic
                          Scanning tab or select the More... button to get a complete set of
                          options.
                          The 2 Sided Originals feature can be set on the Basic Scanning
                          tab and the Scan Options tab.
       2 Sided (H to H)   Select 2 Sided Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-
                          to-head.
       2 Sided (H to T)   Select 2 Sided Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-
                          to-toe.
                More...   Select the More... button to get a complete set of options.




                     1    Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                     2    Select the desired 2 Sided option on the Basic Scanning tab.

                     3    Select the desired option:
                             •   1 Sided
                             •   2 Sided (Head to Head)
                             •   2 Sided (Head to Toe)
                             •   More...




3– 8                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
When More... is selected the 2 Sided Originals screen is
                                  displayed.




                            4     Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided.
                                      •   If 1 Sided has been selected, proceed to the next step.
                                      •   If 2 Sided has been selected, select Head to Head or
                                          Head to Toe for the Original.




                            5     In Original Orientation, select the icon that most closely resembles
                                  the orientation for the loaded document(s), Head to Top or Head
                                  to Left.

                            6     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 3–9
Scan Options Tab




                                Below is a brief explanation of each feature available on the Scan
                                Options tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following
                                pages.
            2 Sided Originals   Use this setting to specify the original orientation when using the
                                DADF for scanning.
                                When the DADF is used for scanning, the original orientation must
                                be set in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.
                   Scan Size    Allows you to scan the original for automatic size detection, or the
                                size may be input manually.
         Mixed Size Originals   Automatically determines the correct paper size, based on the
                                original size and the selected reduction/enlargement.
             Reduce/Enlarge     The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at
                                different magnifications.
             Bound Originals    Allows you to scan the original for automatic size detection, or the
                                size may be input manually.
                Border Erase    Allows you to erase unwanted edge markings from the original on
                                the scanned image.




3– 1 0                                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
2 Sided Originals




                                  When the DADF is used for scanning, the original orientation must
                                  be set in order to specify the “Head” position of the document.
                                  2 Sided Originals can be set on the Basic Scanning tab and the
                                  Scan Options tab.




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select 2 Sided Originals on the Scan Options tab. The 2 Sided
                                  Originals screen is displayed.

                            3     Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided on the 2 Sided Originals screen.

                            4     Based on how the originals are loaded, select either Head to Top
                                  or Head to Left from Original Orientation.

                            5     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              3–11
Scan Size




                              The Scan Size feature lets you to specify how the size of the
                              original document is determined.
           Auto Size Detect   The copier automatically recognizes the size of standard originals
                              in the DADF. This is the default setting.
             Standard Sizes   Select the document size from one of the 11 preset sizes. These
                              presets can be changed in System Settings mode. You must
                              place the original on the Document Glass.
         Non-standard Sizes   Allows you to manually enter the size of the document placed on
                              the Document Glass.




                         1    Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                         2    Select Scan Size on the Scan Options tab. The Scan Size Input
                              screen is displayed.

                         3    Select the desired option:
                                 •   Select Auto Size Detect to have the machine identify the
                                     size of the original document.
                                 •   Select the appropriate size from one of the preset buttons.
                                 •   Enter the width (x) and the length (y) dimensions of the
                                     original document.
                                     Press the arrows to decrease or increase the X and Y
                                     dimensions. X dimensions range from 15 to 432 mm (0.6
                                     to 17.0 inches). Y dimensions range from 15 to 297 mm
                                     (0.6 to 11.7 inches) in 1 mm (0.1 inch) increments.

                         4    Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                              scanning features.




3– 1 2                                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Mixed Size Originals




                                  This feature automatically determines the correct paper size when
                                  scanning different size documents. The correct paper size will be
                                  determined based on the original size and the selected reduction/
                                  enlargement.




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options tab. The Mixed
                                  Size Originals screen is displayed.

                            3     Select On.

                            4     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              3–13
Reduce/Enlarge

                      The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at
                      different magnifications.
                      The following options are available:
          Preset %    There are 7 preset percentages to choose from. The selected
                      percentage displays in the value box on the Reduce/Enlarge
                      screen. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode.
         Variable %   Select the Variable% option to enter the desired percentage for
                      Reduce/Enlarge. Use either the up and down arrows or the
                      number buttons that display on the Touch Screen.
            Auto %    This option automatically reduces or enlarges the copy, based on
                      the size and orientation of the document and the paper supply
                      selected. This option is applied only to standard size documents.

                      Using Presets




                 1    Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                 2    Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options tab. The Reduce/
                      Enlarge screen is displayed.




                 3    Select Preset %.

                 4    Select the desired percentage.

                 5    Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                      scanning features.




3– 1 4                                                 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Using Variable%




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options tab. The Reduce/
                                  Enlarge screen is displayed.




                            3     Select Variable%.

                            4     Perform one of the following:
                                      •   Press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the
                                          percentage value.
                                      •   Use the Numeric Keypad on the Control Panel to enter a
                                          specific percentage. Use C to clear the value entered.

                            5     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              3–15
Using Auto %




         1   Load your originals and select the desired job template.

         2   Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options tab. The Reduce/
             Enlarge screen is displayed.




         3   Select Auto %.

         4   Select the desired Output Size.

         5   Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
             scanning features.




3– 1 6                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Bound Originals




                                  The Bound Originals feature enables you to scan bound originals
                                  such as books, magazines or journals, notebooks, glued forms, or
                                  stapled sets.
                                  When this feature is selected, each page is scanned into a
                                  separate file.
                                  The pages of the book may be any size up to 8.5 x 11 inches (A4).
                                  The Center Erase option allows you to remove the shadow
                                  caused by the center binding of bound originals when they are
                                  scanned.
                                  CAUTION: Do not force the DADF down onto the book. Forcing
                                  the DADF down could damage it. Instead, leave the DADF open
                                  and apply a slight pressure with your hand to the book to keep it
                                  flat against the Document Glass.




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options tab. The Bound
                                  Originals screen is displayed.

                            3     Select the desired option:
                                  •   Left Page then Right
                                  •   Right Page then Left
                                  •   Top Page then Bottom




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            3–17
4   Select the pages that you want scanned:
             •   Both Pages
             •   Left Page only
             •   Right Page only

         5   Enter the value for the Center Erase, if necessary.
                 •   Center Erase is used to delete the center shadow from the
                     output. Use the arrows to adjust the amount of erase.
                     Center Erase values range from 0 to 50 mm (0.0 to 2.0
                     inches).

         6   Place the open document face down with the upper outside corner
             of the right page in the upper left corner of the document glass.

         7   Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
             scanning features.




3– 1 8                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Border Erase




                                  The Border Erase feature enables you to eliminate unwanted
                                  marks near the edges of the original from the output copy. The
                                  range for Border Erase is 0 through 50 mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches) in
                                  1mm (0.1 inch) increments.
                                  Border Erase offers the following options which can be used
                                  individually or combined together:
               Top & Bottom       The default is 5mm (0.1 inches).
                 Left & Right     The default is 5mm (0.1 inches).
              Center (Gutter)     The default is 5mm (0.0 inches).
                                  The selected settings are applied to both Side 1 and Side 2 of 2-
                                  sided copies.
                                  When the image is reduced or enlarged, the selected percentage
                                  will be applied to the border erase.
                                  When scanning, the machine adds a margin of 2mm (0.1 inches)
                                  to all sides. This cannot be eliminated.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             3–19
1   Load your originals and select the desired job template.

         2   Select Border Erase on the Scan Options tab. The Border Erase
             screen is displayed.

         3   Select Normal or Variable Erase.

         4   Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Border
             Erase amount for Top & Bottom, Left & Right, and Center.

         5   Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original
             Orientation.

         6   Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
             scanning features.




3– 2 0                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Image Quality / File Format Tab




    Lighter/Darker/Contrast       Allows you to adjust the lightness, darkness and contrast of the
                                  scanned original.
              Auto Exposure       Prevents undesired marks or images that are printed on the back
                                  of an original from appearing on the scanned images.
                  File Format     Allows you to select the desired file format and image
                                  compression of your scanned document.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            3–21
Lighter/Darker/Contrast




               Lighter/Darker enables you to adjust the overall lightness or
               darkness of the output image.
               NOTE: If Full Color or Grayscale is selected in Output Color, the
               contrast level can be set as well.
               Contrast allows you to adjust the clarity of the image. If you
               increase the Contrast, the copy appears sharp & vivid. If you
               decrease the Contrast, the copy is softer.




          1    Load your originals and select the desired job template.

          2    Select Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format
               tab. The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed.

          3    Press the up or down arrow to lighten or darken the original.

          4    Press the up and down arrow to adjust the Contrast of the original.
               NOTE: Contrast can only be set when Full Color or Grayscale is
               selected in Output Color.

          5    Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
               scanning features.




3– 2 2                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Auto Exposure

                                  .




                                  Auto Exposure automatically reduces or eliminates undesired
                                  marks or images that are printed on the back of an original from
                                  appearing on the scanned image.




                            1     Load your originals and select the desired job template.

                            2     Select Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File Format tab. The
                                  Auto Exposure screen is displayed.

                            3     Select On

                            4     Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                                  scanning features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              3–23
File Format




                  File Format allows you to select the format for your scanned
                  document. You can also select how to compress the files.
           High   Files will be saved at a high compression rate. The file size will be
                  small, but may impact image quality.
         Normal   Files will be saved at a standard compression rate. This is the
                  best balance between image quality and file size.
           Low    Files will be saved at a low compression rate. Image quality will
                  be optimum, but file size will be large.




             1    Load your originals and select the desired job template.

             2    Select File Format on the Image Quality/File Format tab. The File
                  Format screen is displayed.

             3    Select the desired format.

             4    Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional
                  scanning features.




3– 2 4                                             Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job

                                  You can cancel a scan job during the scanning process or delete
                                  scan jobs that are stored in the machine. In order to pause or
                                  cancel a scan job the procedure below:




                            1     Press Stop to pause scanning. The machine will stop.

                            2     Press Stop to end scanning, or press Start to resume scanning.



Scanning in Batches

                                  This section describes how to scan multiple originals as one scan
                                  job if you have more originals to be scanned than can fit into the
                                  DADF.




                            1     Begin scanning your first original, then select Next Original.
                                  NOTE: When using the DADF, wait until the machine has
                                  completed scanning the first batch of originals before loading the
                                  next batch.
                                  NOTE: If no action is carried out after the above screen has been
                                  displayed, the machine will assume that there are no more
                                  originals to be scanned and end the job.

                            2     Load the next original and then press Start.

                            3     Select Last Original after all originals have been scanned.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                3–25
Managing Scanned Documents

                        Scanned documents can be viewed, manipulated, printed, and
                        deleted on the client using the software provided with the Network
                        Controller.
                        For more information about managing scanned documents, refer
                        to the Network Controller user documentation.


Configuring the Client for Scanning

                        The client must be setup for scanning before scanned documents
                        can be viewed, managed, printed, or deleted. The software
                        provided with the Network Controller must be installed and
                        configured properly.
                        For more information about configuring the client for scanning,
                        refer to the Network Controller user documentation.




3– 2 6                                                  Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
4.     Machine Administrator




                                  This chapter describes the features found in the System Settings
                                  Mode.


Overview

                                  The System Settings Mode allows you to change the machine
                                  default settings, and the image quality settings.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            4 –1
System Settings

                             System Settings allows you to change the default of the following
                             features:
        Common Settings :    Change the default settings for:
                             •   Date/Timers
                             •   Audio Tones
                             •   Screen Defaults
                             •   Paper Trays
                             •   Printing Priority
                             •   Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjustment
                             •   Sleep Mode
       Copy Mode Settings:   Change the default settings for:
                             •   Copy Defaults
                             •   Control of Copy Operation
                             •   Original Size
                             •   Reduce/Enlarge
                             •   Custom Colors
         Network Settings:   Set the default settings for:
                             •   Protocol Settings
       Scan Mode Settings:   Change the default settings for:
                             •   Scanner Settings
                             •   Other Scan Settings




4– 2                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Setting and Changing the Administrator Password

                                  This section explains how to set and change the System Settings
                                  Mode password. The default password is set to "11111". You
                                  cannot enter System Settings Mode unless the password is
                                  entered. Setting a password also allows you to output total reports
                                  and a list of registered mailboxes.




                            1     Press the Access button. The Password Entry screen is
                                  displayed.




                            2     Enter the password using the numeric keypad on the Control
                                  Panel, and select Confirm. The System Administrator Menu
                                  screen is displayed.
                                  NOTE: Your password will be displayed by an asterisk (*). If you
                                  make a mistake, press Clear (C) and re-enter the password.

                            3     Select System Settings. The System Settings screen is
                                  displayed.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               4 –3
4   Select System Administrator Password. The System
            Administrator Password screen is displayed.




        5   Select Off to disable entering a password.

        6   Select On, and enter the new password using the numeric keypad
            on the Control Panel.

        7   Select Enter.

        8   Re-enter the password, exactly as you did in Step 6, and select
            Enter.
            NOTE: Enter the exact same number in Step 6 and Step 8. If you
            make a mistake, select Reset and return to Step 6.

        9   Select Close. You will be returned to the System Settings screen.

       10   Select Exit to exit the System Settings Mode.




4– 4                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Entering and Exiting the System Settings Mode

                                  This section explains how to enter and exit System Settings Mode.


           Entering the System Settings Mode

                                  This section explains how to enter the System Settings Mode.
                                  NOTE: The machine will not enter the System Settings Mode
                                  when an error message is displayed.




                            1     Press the Access button. The Enter Password screen is
                                  displayed. The default password is 11111.

                            2     Enter the password and select Confirm. The machine enters
                                  System Settings Mode, and the System Administrator Menu
                                  screen is displayed.




                                  NOTE: Your password will be displayed by an asterisk (*). If you
                                  make a mistake, press the Clear button and re-enter the
                                  password.
                                  If you want to cancel the operation, select Cancel.

                            3     Select either User Mode or System Settings.
                                  •   User Mode - make copies and scan documents in the System
                                      Settings Mode. If you select Machine Status or Job Status
                                      while in the System Settings Mode, printer and copier total
                                      reports can be printed.
                                  •   System Settings - you can change the settings of features.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                4 –5
Exiting System Settings Mode

                        This section outlines the procedure for exiting the System Settings
                        Mode.




                    1   When you finish performing the desired operations, select Close
                        until the System Settings screen is displayed.

                    2   Select Exit.



Changing Settings in System Settings Mode

                        This section provides an example of the basic procedures
                        required to change settings in System Settings Mode using the
                        System Clock Setting feature. Please follow these procedures for
                        all the features in System Settings Mode.




                    1   Press the Access button.

                    2   Enter the password, and select Confirm. The System
                        Administrator Menu screen is displayed.

                    3   Select System Settings. The System Settings screen is
                        displayed. Select System Settings.

                    4   Select Common Settings. The Common Settings screen is
                        displayed.
                        NOTE: If you are setting a feature in Copy Mode Settings,
                        Network Settings, Print Mode Settings, or Scan Mode Settings,
                        press the desired button.

                    5   Select Machine Clock / Timers. The Machine Clock / Timers
                        screen is displayed.




4– 6                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
6     Select Date, then select Change Settings. The Date screen is
                                  displayed.

                            7     Select the desired Date format.

                            8     Use the up and down arrow buttons to enter the year, month, and
                                  date.
                                  NOTE: If Cancel is selected, the machine will return to the
                                  previous screen without saving any changes.

                            9     Select Save. You are returned to the Machine Clock / Timers
                                  screen.

                          10      To make changes to other settings, repeat the procedure.

                          11      When you are finished making changes, select Close until the
                                  System Settings screen is displayed.

                          12      Select Exit. System Settings Mode closes.



Common Settings




                                  This section describes the Common Setting items, which relate to
                                  the main features on the machine.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 –7
Machine Clock/Timers

                          This setting allows you to set the time and date. You can also
                          determine the duration of time until the Power Saver Mode or
                          reset functions engage.
                          Machine Clock/Timers allows you to set the following items.
                  Date    Sets the Date (Month/Day/Year) of the machine's system clock to:
                          •   Date Format - Y/M/D, M/D/Y, or D/M/Y
                          •   Month - 1 to 12
                          •   Day - 1 to 31
                          •   Year - 2000 to 2099
                          The date set here is printed on lists and reports. The default is
                          2001, January 1.
                  Time    Sets the system clock time (H / M) by 12-hour clock display or 24-
                          hour clock display.
                          •   Hours - 0~23 (24-hour clock) OR 1~12 (12-hour clock)
                          •   Minutes - 0~59.
                          •   Set AM or PM if it is a 12-hour clock display.
                          The time set here will be printed on lists and reports. The default is
                          12-hour clock display, 0:00 AM.
             Time Zone    Sets the time zone that you are in. Use the up and down arrow
                          buttons to set the time difference from Greenich Mean Time.
       Daylight Savings   Sets whether or not to apply daylight savings to the system clock
                          time.
                          •   Adjust Off
                          •   Adjust On




4– 8                                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Auto Clear      Sets the time to wait before returning the Control Panel to the
                                  default screen. The amount of time until reset can be set to:
                                  •   0
                                      OR
                                  •   60 ~ 240 seconds, in 60-second increments.
                                  Enter the value using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel.
                                  The default is 60 seconds.
           Auto Job Release       Tells the machine to release the current job to enable the
                                  execution of the next job when a fault occurs during copying or
                                  scanning. The job can be executed only in parts of the machine
                                  that are functioning normally. Set the time to:
                                  •   0 - do not automatically release the job.
                                  •   240 ~ 5940 seconds (4 ~ 99 minutes) in 60-second
                                      increments.
                                  Enter the value using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel.
                                  The default is 600 seconds.
                   Auto Print     Allows the machine to automatically start print jobs when there
                                  has been no activity for a set amount of time. Set the time to:
                                  •   1 ~ 240 seconds in 1-second increments.
                                  Enter the value using the number keys on the Control Panel. The
                                  default setting is 10 seconds.
          Auto Power Saver        Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode are part of the energy-saving
                                  mode. As time lapses, the machine lowers power consumption:
                                  Last Operation -> Low Power Mode -> Sleep Mode.
                                  •   Set the time to Low Power Mode from 6 ~ 240 minutes and
                                  •   Set the time to Sleep Mode from 0 ~ 234 minutes
                                  Both are set in 1 minute increments.
                                  NOTE: Low Power Mode cannot be disabled. The total set time of
                                  both Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode must be between 15 - 240
                                  minutes.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 4 –9
Audio Tone

                              This determines the conditions under which Audio Tones are
                              used.
                              Audio Tone Settings allows you to set the following items.
  Control Panel Select Tone   Sets the tone when a button is selected on the display. It can be
                              set to:
                              •   Off
                              •   Soft
                              •   Normal
                              •   Loud
                              The default is Normal.
   Control Panel Alert Tone   Sets the tone when an incorrect button was selected, or an
                              operation was attempted during an error. It can be set to:
                              •   Off
                              •   Soft
                              •   Normal
                              •   Loud
                              The default is Normal.
         Machine Ready Tone   Sets the tone when the machine is ready for copying or printing. It
                              can be set to:
                              •   Off
                              •   Soft
                              •   Normal
                              •   Loud
                              The default is Normal.
  Copy Job Complete Tone      Sets the tone when copying has been completed successfully. It
                              can be set to:
                              •   Off
                              •   Soft
                              •   Normal
                              •   Loud
                              The default is Normal.




4– 1 0                                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Non-Copy Job Complete          Sets the tone when a job other than copying has been completed
                   Tone           successfully. It can be set to:
                                  •   Off
                                  •   Soft
                                  •   Normal
                                  •   Loud
                                  The default is Normal.
                   Fault Tone     Sets the tone when a fault occurs and the job is held in a faulted
                                  state. It can be set to:
                                  •   Off
                                  •   Soft
                                  •   Normal
                                  •   Loud
                                  The default is Normal.
                   Alert Tone     Sets the tone when a job finishes abnormally. It can be set to:
                                  •   Off
                                  •   Soft
                                  •   Normal
                                  •   Loud
                                  The default is Off.
       Low Toner Alert Tone       Sets the tone when the Drum Cartridge or Toner Cartridge has to
                                  be replaced. It can be set to:
                                  •   Off
                                  •   Soft
                                  •   Normal
                                  •   Loud
                                  The default is Normal.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4– 11
Screen Defaults

                              This allows you to chose the default screen that is displayed when
                              the machine is turned on.
                              Screen Defaults allows you to set the following items.
Screen Default at Power On    Select one of the following screens to display as the default
                              screen when the machine is turned on:
                              •   Features
                              •   Job Status
                              •   Machine Status
                              The default is the Features screen.
    Features Screen Default   Select one of the following screens to display as the default
                              screen when Features is selected:
                              •   Menu - gives you the option to select copy or scan.
                              •   Copy - displays the copy feature tabs.
                              •   Scan - displays the scan feature tabs.
                              The default is the Copy Screen.
          Default Language    Select the desired language to appear on the Touch Screen. The
                              selected language will be displayed until the machine is powered
                              off/on. It will then return to the language set by your System
                              Administrator.




4– 1 2                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Paper Tray Attributes

                                  This enables you to set the type and priority of paper loaded in
                                  trays, image quality processing settings by paper type, and other
                                  paper tray related settings.
                                  Paper Tray Attributes allows you to set the following items.
         Custom Paper Name        Allows you to set up to 4 custom paper types. The paper must be
                                  plain, bond, or recycled. Set a name up to 12 characters long for
                                  custom paper 1 to 4 using letters and symbols. Custom 5 has
                                  been set to Bond S as the default.
        Paper Type - Trays 1-4    Sets up the type of paper loaded in Trays 1-4. The Paper Type
                                  setting affects the image quality and speed of output from the
                                  specific tray.
                                  NOTE: It is very important that you set the correct paper type for
                                  the paper you are using. Setting the correct paper type will
                                  improve the image quality of your output, and will reduce the
                                  probability of paper jams and other machine problems.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. Refer to the table for specific information
                                  and recommendations for the type of paper you are using.
                                  The default is 14, or Bond Paper.
                                  For more information on recommended paper types, refer to the
                                  Recommended Materials List.
                                  NOTE: Coated papers are very susceptible to humidity. Multifeeds
                                  are much more likely with humidity greater than 40%.
                                  Environmental conditions may require that coated paper be fed
                                  one sheet at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass).



 Setting      Paper Type                                     Description

   14       Bond Paper       24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *

    0       Plain Paper      20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *

    3       Recycled Paper   20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *

   161      Custom Paper 1   24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *

   162      Custom Paper 2   24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *

   163      Custom Paper 3   24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *

   164      Custom Paper 4   24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
                             pages per minute. *




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                  4 – 13
Setting     Paper Type                                      Description

   165     Bond S (Custom   28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35
           5)               pages per minute. This setting has a higher speed output than Heavyweight
                            1B paper for use with lower area coverage originals. *

    5      Transparency     For use with transparencies. Transparencies can be fed from Trays 1 - 5, and
                            have an output speed of 8 pages per minute for color and 16 pages per
                            minute for black and white. For best results, do not send more than 20
                            transparencies at a time to the output tray.

   17      Labels           Label special application media can be fed from Trays 1 - 5. Output speed for
                            8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute.

    1      Heavyweight 1    28 lb., 32 lb., 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (99 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed
                            for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. *

   25      Heavyweight 1A   90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11
                            inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute.

   26      Heavyweight 1B   28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22
                            pages per minute. This setting has a slower output speed than Bond S thus
                            providing a higher gloss than Bond S.

   27      Heavyweight 1C   32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22
                            pages per minute.

   28      Heavyweight 1S   Special media (99 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper
                            is 22 pages per minute.

   19      Heavyweight F    28 lb., 32 lb. (99 - 128 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper
                            is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight paper
                            that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). *

   29      Heavyweight FA   127 - 128 gsm paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages
                            per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1A paper that is
                            delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory).

   30      Heavyweight FB   28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22
                            pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1B paper
                            that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory).

   31      Heavyweight FC   32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22
                            pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1C paper
                            that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory).

   32      Heavyweight FS   Special media (99 - 128 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper
                            is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1S
                            paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory).

    8      Heavyweight 2    65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) paper. Output speed
                            for 8.5x11 inch paper is 11 pages per minute. You are not able to Auto
                            Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. *

   33      Heavyweight 2A   65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) paper. Output speed
                            for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. You are not able to Auto
                            Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex.

   37      Heavyweight 2S   80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper
                            is 11 pages per minute. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type
                            setting. You may manually duplex.



4– 1 4                                                               Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Setting     Paper Type                                       Description

   21      Coated 1          80 lb. text, 100 lb. text (120 - 169 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for
                             8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute.

   20      Coated F          80 lb. text (120 - 128 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4)
                             paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Coated paper
                             that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory).

   23      Coated 2          80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch
                             (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute.

   36      Coated 1 Gloss    80 lb. silk text, 100 lb. text, 8 pt. (120 - 169 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed
                             for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. This setting has a slower
                             output speed than the Coated 1 setting thus providing a higher gloss than
                             Coated 1. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You
                             may manually duplex.

   34      Gloss 1C          32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11
                             pages per minute. This setting has a slower output speed than the
                             Heavyweight 1C setting thus providing a higher gloss than Heavyweight 1C.
                             You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may
                             manually duplex.

   35      Gloss 1A          90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11
                             inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. This setting has a slower output
                             speed than the Heavyweight 1A setting thus providing a higher gloss than
                             Heavyweight 1A. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type
                             setting. You may manually duplex.

                                  * There are Image Quality options available for these paper types.
                                  Refer to the Image Quality information for details on the different
                                  options available.
                                  NOTE: Any paper type designated with an “F” for the Finisher can
                                  also be delivered to the Center Output Tray.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                      4 – 15
Paper Type - Tray 5   Sets up the type of paper loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass). The Paper
                  (Bypass)     Type setting affects the image quality and speed of output from
                               Tray 5 (Bypass).
                               NOTE: It is very important that you set the correct paper type for
                               the paper you are using. Setting the correct paper type will
                               improve the image quality of your output, and will reduce the
                               probability of paper jams and other machine problems.
                               Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                               in the following table.
                               The default is 14, or Bond Paper.
                               For more information on recommended paper types, refer to the
                               Recommended Materials List.



                   Setting                  Paper Type             Media Weight

                     14            Bond Paper *               81-98 gsm
                      0            Plain Paper *              71-80 gsm

                      3            Recycled Paper *           71-80 gsm

                    161            Custom 1 *                 81-98 gsm

                    162            Custom 2 *                 81-98 gsm

                    163            Custom 3 *                 81-98 gsm

                    164            Custom 4 *                 81-98 gsm

                    165            Bond S (Custom 5) *        99-105 gsm

                     16            Lightweight                55-63 gsm

                      5            Transparency

                      1            Heavyweight 1 *            99-169 gsm

                      8            Heavyweight 2 *            170-220 gsm

                     12            Heavyweight 1 - Side 2 *   99-169 gsm
                     13            Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 *   170-220 gsm

                     21            Coated 1                   120-169 gsm

                     23            Coated 2                   170-220 gsm
                     22            Coated 1 - Side 2          120-169 gsm

                     24            Coated 2 - Side 2          170-220 gsm

                     11            Labels

                               * There are Image Quality options available for these paper types.
                               Refer to the Image Quality information for details on the different
                               options available.




4– 1 6                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Paper Tray Priority      Select the order that Trays 1 - 4 are selected for Auto Tray
                                  Switching. You can select the priority of each tray: First, Second,
                                  Third, and Fourth.
                                  The same tray cannot be selected twice. The default is Tray 1 ->
                                  Tray 2 -> Tray 3 -> Tray 4.
         Paper Type Priority      Set the priority of each of the paper types for Auto Tray Switching.
                                  Set the priority for:
                                  •   Bond Paper
                                  •   Plain Paper
                                  •   Recycled Paper
                                  •   Bond S (Custom 5)
                                  •   Custom Paper 1 - 4
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table.



                                                    Setting                Description

                                                     255             Auto Tray Switching Off
                                                      1              Highest priority
                                                      2              2nd priority
                                                      3              3rd priority
                                                      4              4th priority
                                                      5              5th priority
                                                      6              6th priority
                                                      7              7th priority
                                                      8              8th priority




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 – 17
Image Quality      Different image quality settings can be selected for Bond, Plain,
                                      Recycled, Custom 1 to 4, Bond S (Custom 5), Heavyweight 1,
                                      Heavyweight 2, Heavyweight 1-Side 2, and Heavyweight 2-Side 2
                                      Paper.
                                      NOTE: It is very important that you set the correct image quality
                                      setting for the paper type you are using. Setting the correct image
                                      quality setting will produce the best image quality of your output,
                                      and will reduce the probability of paper jams and other machine
                                      problems.
                                      The default settings are as follows:
                                      •   1 for Bond paper
                                      •   8 for Plain paper
                                      •   32 for Recycled paper
                                      •   128 for Bond S paper
                                      •   1 for Custom paper
                                      •   For Heavyweight 1 paper, the range of settings is 19 to 21.
                                          The default is 19 for Heavyweight 1 paper and 21 for
                                          Heavyweight F paper.
                                      •   For Heavyweight 1 - Side 2 paper, the range of settings is 23
                                          to 26. The default is 23 for Heavyweight 1 - Side 2 paper.
                                      •   For Heavyweight 2 paper, the range of settings is 27 to 31.
                                          The default is 27 for Heavyweight 2 paper.
                                      •   For Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 paper, the range of settings is 33
                                          to 36, and 200. The default is 200 for Heavyweight 2 - Side 2
                                          paper.
                                      •   For Heavyweight 2 and Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 paper, the
                                          settings include settings for Gloss 1C, Gloss 1A, and Coated 1
                                          Gloss. These are alternative gloss settings for Heavyweight
                                          1C, Heavyweight 1A, and Coated 1.
                                      Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                      in the following table.



         Setting                                          Description

           1          Best suited for color-exclusive Bond paper 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm).

           2          Best suited for lighter paper used in office environments 18 lb. (64 - 70 gsm).
           4          Best suited for lighter Recycled paper 18 lb. (64 - 70 gsm).

           8          Best suited for paper used in office environments 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm).

           16         Best suited for paper used in offices for photos 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm).
           32         Best suited for Recycled paper 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm).

           64         Best suited for Recycled paper for photos 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm).

          128         Best suited to color-exclusive Bond paper 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm).



4– 1 8                                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Setting                                          Description

         19        Best suited for Heavyweight 1A 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm).

         20        Best suited for Heavyweight 1B 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm).

         21        Best suited for Heavyweight 1C 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm).
         22        Best suited for Heavyweight 1S special media (99 - 169 gsm).

         23        Best suited for Heavyweight 1A - side 2 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm).

         24        Best suited for Heavyweight 1B - side 2 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm).
         25        Best suited for Heavyweight 1C - side 2 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm).

         26        Best suited for Heavyweight 1S - side 2 special media (99 - 169 gsm).

         27        Best suited for Heavyweight 2A 65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220
                   gsm).

         28        Best suited for Gloss 1C 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm).
         29        Best suited for Gloss 1A 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm).

         30        Best suited for Coated 1 Gloss 80 lb. silk text, 100 lb. text (120 - 169 gsm).

         31        Best suited for Heavyweight 2S 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm).

         200       Best suited for Heavyweight 2A - side 2 65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170
                   - 220 gsm).

         33        Best suited for Gloss 1C - side 2 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm).

         34        Best suited for Gloss 1A - side 2 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm).

         35        Best suited for Coated 1 Gloss - side 2 80 lb. silk text, 100 lb. text, 8 pt. (120 - 169
                   gsm).

         36        Best suited for Heavyweight 2S - side 2 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm).

 Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size         Paper sizes can be assigned to Tray 5 Standard Size buttons 1 to
                   Defaults         11. Eleven sizes can be assigned to this paper size list.
                                    •   A/B Series Size -A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6,
                                        B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6
                                    •   Inch Size - 12 x 18", 11 x 17", 11 x 15", 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5
                                        x 11" SEF, 8.5 x 11" LEF, 5.5 x 8.5" SEF, 5.5 x 8.5" LEF, SRA3,
                                        8 x 10” SEF, 8 x 10” LEF
                                    •   Others - 8K, 16K LEF, 16K SEF
                                    •   Variable - Set the X (horizontal) range between 140 and
                                        483mm (5.5 - 19.0 inches), and the Y (vertical) range between
                                        100 and 305mm (3.9 - 12.0 inches) in 1mm (0.1 inch)
                                        increments.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                           4 – 19
Printing Priority

                             Select which job will be prioritized when the machine receives a
                             copy job and printer job at the same time. If both are set at the
                             same priority, jobs are processed in the order they are received.
                             Depending on the condition of the machine, they may not be
                             processed according to this setting.
                Copy Job     Sets the priority that will be given to copy jobs.
                             Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                             in the following table. The default is 38, 3rd Priority.
                Print Job    Sets the priority that will be given to print jobs.
                             Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                             in the following table. The default is 48, No Priority.



                                               Setting                   Description

                                                 18               1st priority
                                                 28               2nd priority
                                                 38               3rd priority
                                                 48               No priority



            Promoted Job     Set whether or not to automatically overtake a job if there is
                             another job that can be started when something on the machine
                             prevents execution of a job.
                             Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                             in the following table. The default is 0, Promote Disabled.



                                               Setting                   Description

                                                  0               Disables promotion of
                                                                  jobs
                                                  1               Enables promotion of
                                                                  jobs




4– 2 0                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Image Quality Adjustment

                                  You can set the default for Image Quality/Automatic Gradation
                                  Adjustment.

                          Image Quality

                                  The following items can be set in Image Quality Setting.
  Photo & Text Recognition        The level at which the machine judges text or photos during
                                  document scanning can be changed when making copies by
                                  selecting Text&Photo on the Original Type screen.
                                  •   More Text - fine text can be easily identified as text.
                                  •   More Photo - halftone images, such as newspapers or
                                      circulars, can be easily identified as photos.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.



                                                   Setting                    Description

                                                      1               More Text
                                                      2               Text
                                                      3               Normal
                                                      4               Photo
                                                      5               More Photo




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 21
Output Color Recognition   The level at which the machine judges B/W and color during
                             document scanning can be changed when making copies by
                             selecting Auto under Output Color.
                             •   More B/W - a black & white original is easily identified.
                             •   More Color - a color original is easily identified.
                             Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                             in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.



                                              Setting                    Description

                                                 1               More B/W
                                                 2               B/W
                                                 3               Normal
                                                 4               Color
                                                 5               More Color

 Photo Reproduction Level    You can adjust the color reproduction of images judged by the
                             machine as photos when making copies by selecting Text&Photo
                             on the Original Type screen.
                             •   Heavy Text - the black areas of the image are intensified,
                                 creating a sharper looking copy.
                                 Select Heavy Text to emphasize black text in documents
                                 containing both text and photos.
                             •   Heavy Photo - the tones in photo areas in the images are
                                 reproduced smoother.
                             Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                             in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.



                                              Setting                    Description

                                                 1               Heavy Text
                                                 3               Normal
                                                 5               Heavy Photo




4– 2 2                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Photo Image Quality       You can adjust the image quality when printing photos.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 1, Sharper, clearer photos.



                                                   Setting                 Description

                                                      0              Normal

                                                      1              Sharper, clearer photos

          Color Copy - Auto       You can set how the machine detects the density of background
                  Exposure        color and processes to remove the background color.
                                  •   Speed Priority - part of the original will be scanned to
                                      determine the background color level.
                                  •   Image Quality Priority - the machine pre-scans the
                                      document, and samples the entire document to detect the
                                      background color level.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table.
 B/W Copy - Auto Exposure         Configure how background color is removed when making B/W
                                  copies.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table.



                                                   Setting                 Description

                                                      0              Speed Priority
                                                      1              Image Quality Priority

        Image Enhancement         Print data is smoothed to reproduce smoother images. This
                                  feature is enabled on print jobs only.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 1, Image Enhance On.



                                                   Setting                 Description

                                                      0              Image Enhance Off
                                                      1              Image Enhance On




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 – 23
Auto Gradation Adjustment

                                  Auto Gradation Adjustment is a color calibration for the copier and
                                  printer. An Auto Gradation Adjustment compensates for
                                  differences between the actual and the expected toner densities
                                  for each color. An Auto Gradation Adjustment should be
                                  performed whenever there is a noticeable change in the
                                  appearance (quality) of the output, particularly changes in color
                                  tones or densities. Performing an Auto Gradation Adjustment on a
                                  regular basis will help to maintain consistent color quality over
                                  time.
                                  NOTE: Since an Auto Gradation Adjustment can affect all jobs for
                                  all users, it is recommended that this procedure be performed only
                                  by the Machine Administrator.
               Copy Job - Text    Compensates tones when a text original is copied.
             Copy Job - Photo     Compensates tones when a photo original is copied.
                     Print Job    Compensates tones when printing with controller line screen.
         Network Controller - 1   Compensates tones when printing with Network Controller screen
                                  type 1.
         Network Controller - 2   Compensates tones when printing with Network Controller screen
                                  type 2.
                                  NOTE: Printing the chart for Auto Gradation does not increase the
                                  meter count.
                                  NOTE: When gradation adjustment is executed, the following
                                  changes will be made to default copy settings set in System
                                  Settings mode: Copy density = Normal or Auto, Color Shift =
                                  Normal, Saturation = Normal, Color Balance = 0, Sharpness = 0.
                                  NOTE: When Print or Network Controller gradation adjustment is
                                  executed, the printer’s output profiles for the available screen
                                  types are compensated.




4– 2 4                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
1     On the Image Quality Adjustment screen, select Auto Gradation
                                  Adjustment.

                            2     Load 8.5x11 inch or A4 paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Move the
                                  paper guide to gently touch the edge of the paper.

                            3     Select the desired gradation adjustment screen:
                                  •   Copy Job - Text
                                  •   Copy Job - Photo
                                  •   Print Job
                                  •   Network Controller - 1
                                  •   Network Controller - 2
                                  Press Start. The Adjustment Chart is output.

                            4     Place the Adjustment Chart face down on the Document Glass
                                  with both Magenta color patches against the left side of the glass.

                            5     Place 5 sheets of white paper on top of the Adjustment Chart and
                                  close the DADF. Select Start.

                            6     To continue Auto Gradation Adjustment with other screens, repeat
                                  steps 2 to 5. When you are finished, select Close until the System
                                  Settings screen is displayed.

                            7     Select Exit to exit the System Settings mode.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 25
Other Machine Settings

                               The following items can be set in Other Settings.
                Sleep Mode     This sets up whether to allow machine to switch to the Sleep
                               Mode.
                               When Sleep Mode is disabled, timers in Auto Power Saver on the
                               Machine Clock/Timers Settings screen cannot be set. The default
                               is Enabled.
                               NOTE: Low Power Mode cannot be disabled.
    Job Offset (Center Tray)   This sets up whether to offset jobs per set or per job when
                               outputting to the Center Tray.
  Job Offset (Finisher Tray)   This sets up whether to offset jobs per set or per job when
                               outputting to the Finisher Tray (optional).


Copy Mode Settings




                               This section describes how to change the default for different
                               copier settings.
                               For more information on copying features, refer to the Copy
                               chapter.




4– 2 6                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Basic Copying Presets

                                  You can increase efficiency for each copy job by setting frequently
                                  used trays and Reduce/Enlarge settings.
  Paper Supply - 2nd to 4th       You can select which Paper Trays to display on the Basic Copying
                   Buttons        screen. You can set Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (Bypass) to appear in 3 of
                                  the 5 buttons displayed under Paper Supply on the Basic Copying
                                  screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is Tray 1 for the 2nd button from
                                  the top, Tray 2 for the 3rd button from the top, Tray 3 for the 4th
                                  button from the top.



                                                     Setting                Description

                                                        1             Tray 1
                                                        2             Tray 2
                                                        3             Tray 3
                                                        4             Tray 4
                                                        5             Tray 5 (Bypass)

Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd to 4th       The 3rd and 4th buttons under Reduce/Enlarge can be changed
                   Buttons        on the Basic Copying screen. Select the ratio from the preset ratio
                                  buttons.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 64% for the 3rd button from
                                  the top, 129% for the 4th button from the top.



                                              Setting                       Description

                                                 1               Ratio set to R/E Preset 1
                                                 2               Ratio set to R/E Preset 2
                                                 3               Ratio set to R/E Preset 3
                                                 4               Ratio set to R/E Preset 4
                                                 5               Ratio set to R/E Preset 5
                                                 6               Ratio set to R/E Preset 6
                                                 7               Ratio set to R/E Preset 7




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               4 – 27
Copy Defaults

                           Set up the defaults for different copy features. The machine
                           returns to the defaults when the power is turned on, the machine
                           is returned from the Power Saver mode, the Auto Clear timer
                           times out, or the Clear All button is pressed.
                           The following items can be set in Copy Defaults.
            Output Color   Set the default for Output Color on the Basic Copying screen.
                           Select one of the following options:
                           •   No Default
                           •   Auto
                           •   Full Color
                           •   Black
                           •   Dual Color
                           •   Single Color
                           The default is Auto.
                           NOTE: If No Default is selected, an Output Color must be selected
                           for copy jobs, or the machine will not start copying.
                           NOTE: If Black is selected on the Basic Copying screen, the copy
                           output will have the same image quality as Halftone, selected in
                           Text&Photo.
                           NOTE: When Dual Colors or Single Color is selected on the Basic
                           Copying screen, the Original Type cannot be set.




4– 2 8                                                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Single Color      Set the default for Single Color on the Basic Copying screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 1, Red.
   Dual Color - Color Image       Sets the default for Color Image in Dual Color on the Basic
                                  Copying screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 1, Red.
    Dual Color - B/W Image        Set the default for a B/W Image in Dual Color on the Basic
                                  Copying screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Black.



                       Setting                           Description

                          0             Black (can be only be set when Dual Color is
                                        selected)
                          1             Red
                          2             Green
                          3             Blue
                          4             Yellow (Y)
                          5             Magenta (M)
                          6             Cyan (C)
                          7             Specified Color set to Custom Color 1
                          8             Specified Color set to Custom Color 2
                          9             Specified Color set to Custom Color 3
                         10             Specified Color set to Custom Color 4
                         11             Specified Color set to Custom Color 5
                         12             Specified Color set to Custom Color 6




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               4 – 29
Reduce/Enlarge   Sets the default for Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen.
                          Select one of nine buttons. Seven buttons are registered as preset
                          ratio buttons, 100%, and Auto %.
                          Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                          in the following table. The default is 0, 100%.



                                     Setting                       Description

                                        0              100%
                                        1              Ratio set to R/E Preset 1
                                        2              Ratio set to R/E Preset 2
                                        3              Ratio set to R/E Preset 3
                                        4              Ratio set to R/E Preset 4
                                        5              Ratio set to R/E Preset 5
                                        6              Ratio set to R/E Preset 6
                                        7              Ratio set to R/E Preset 7
                                        8              Auto%

                          NOTE: If the default for Paper Supply is set to Auto, Auto% cannot
                          be selected for Reduce/Enlarge.
           Paper Supply   This sets the default for Paper Supply on the Basic Copying
                          screen.
                          Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                          in the following table. The default is 0, Auto.
                          If the default for Reduce/Enlarge is set to Auto%, Auto cannot be
                          selected.



                                            Setting                Description

                                               0            Auto
                                               1            Tray 1
                                               2            Tray 2
                                               3            Tray 3
                                               4            Tray 4
                                               5            Tray 5 (Bypass)




4– 3 0                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
2 Sided     This sets up the default for 2 Sided on the Basic Copying and
                                  Added Features screens.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, 1 to 1.



                                                  Setting                  Description

                                                     0              1 to 1 Sided
                                                     1              1 to 2 Sided
                                                     2              2 to 1 Sided
                                                     3              2 to 2 Sided

                      Output      This sets up the default for Output on the Added Features screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Auto.



                                                  Setting                  Description

                                                     0              Auto
                                                     1              Collated
                                                     2              Uncollated

         Output Destination       This sets up the Output Tray for copy and print jobs.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Center Output Tray.



                                                  Setting                  Description

                                                     0              Center Output Tray

                                                     2              Finisher Tray

                                  NOTE: The Optional Finisher must be installed to use the Finisher
                                  Tray.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               4 – 31
Margin Shift - Side 1   This sets up the default for Side 1 in Margin Shift on the Added
                                 Features screen.
                                 Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                 in the following table. The default is 0, No Shift.



                                            Setting                       Description

                                               0              No Shift
                                               1              Auto Center
                                               2              Corner Shift (Top Right)
                                               3              Corner Shift (Bottom Right)
                                               4              Corner Shift (Top Left)
                                               5              Corner Shift (Bottom Left)
                                               6              Corner Shift (Top Center)
                                               7              Corner Shift (Bottom Center)
                                               8              Corner Shift (Left Center)
                                               9              Corner Shift (Right Center)




4– 3 2                                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Margin Shift - Side 2     This sets up the default for Side 2 in Margin Shift on the Added
                                  Features screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 10, Symmetrical with Side 1.



                                               Setting                       Description

                                                  0               No Shift
                                                  1               Auto Center
                                                  2               Corner Shift (Top Right)
                                                  3               Corner Shift (Bottom Right)
                                                  4               Corner Shift (Top Left)
                                                  5               Corner Shift (Bottom Left)
                                                  6               Corner Shift (Top Center)
                                                  7               Corner Shift (Bottom Center)
                                                  8               Corner Shift (Left Center)
                                                  9               Corner Shift (Right Center)
                                                  10              Symmetrical with Side 1

       Border Erase - Top &       This sets up the default for the top and bottom Border Erase.
                    Bottom        Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 5mm (0.1 inches).



                                                  Setting                    Description

                                                       0             None
                                                   1 ~ 50            Set the border erase
                                                                     amount in increments
                                                                     of 1mm
                                                   0 ~ 2.0           Set the border erase
                                                                     amount in increments
                                                                     of 0.1 inches




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               4 – 33
Border Erase - Left & Right   This sets up the default for the left and right Border Erase.
                              Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                              in the following table. The default is 5mm (0.1 inches).



                                               Setting                   Description

                                                  0               None
                                                1 ~ 50            Set the border erase
                                                                  amount in increments
                                                                  of 1mm
                                                0 ~ 2.0           Set the border erase
                                                                  amount in increments
                                                                  of 0.1 inches

              Center Erase    This sets up the default for Center Erase. It is distributed along the
                              center of the original image.
                              Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                              in the following table. The default is 0 mm (0 inches).



                                               Setting                   Description

                                                  0               None
                                                1 ~ 50            Set the center erase
                                                                  amount in increments
                                                                  of 1mm
                                                0 ~ 2.0           Set the center erase
                                                                  amount in increments
                                                                  of 0.1 inches




4– 3 4                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Original Type (Auto/Full        This sets up the default for Original Type on the Image Quality
                     Color)         screen, when Auto or Full Color is selected as the color mode on
                                    the Basic Copying screen.
                                    Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                    in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo (Halftone).
       Original Type (Black)        This sets up the default for Original Type on the Image Quality
                                    screen, when Black is selected as the Output Color on the Basic
                                    Copying screen.
                                    Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                    in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo (Halftone).



                             Setting                            Description

                                0                    Text
                                1                    Text & Photo (Halftone)
                                2                    Text & Photo (Photograph)
                                3                    Text & Photo (Color Copies)
                                4                    Photo (Halftone)
                                5                    Photo (Photograph)
                                6                    Photo (Color Copies)
                                7                    Color Originals (Map)
                                8                    Color Originals (Highlighted
                                                     Originals)
                                9                    Color Originals (Inkjet Originals)

                                    NOTE: When Dual Color or Single Color is selected as the Output
                                    Color on the Basic Copying screen, the Original Type setting is
                                    ignored.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 – 35
Auto Exposure    This sets up the default for Auto Exposure, when Text&Photo,
                          Text, or Color Originals is selected in Original Type on the Image
                          Quality screen.
                          Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                          in the following table. The default is 1, Auto Exposure On.



                                       Setting                     Description

                                          0              Auto Exposure Off
                                          1              Auto Exposure On

         Lighter/Darker   This sets up the default for Lighter/Darker in Light/Dark/Contrast
                          on the Image Quality screen.
                          Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                          in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.



                                           Setting                 Description

                                              0              Light (+3)
                                              1              Light (+2)
                                              2              Light (+1)
                                              3              Normal
                                              4              Darker (-1)
                                              5              Darker (-2)
                                              6              Darker (-3)




4– 3 6                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Contrast     This sets up the default for Contrast in Light/Dark/Contrast on the
                                  Image Quality screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.



                                                  Setting                     Description

                                                     0               Higher
                                                     1               High
                                                     2               Normal
                                                     3               Low
                                                     4               Lower

                  Sharpness       This sets up the default for Sharpness in Sharpness/Saturation on
                                  the Image Quality screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.



                                                  Setting                     Description

                                                     0               Sharper
                                                     1               Sharp
                                                     2               Normal
                                                     3               Soft
                                                     4               Softer




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 – 37
Color Saturation   This sets up the default for Color Saturation in Sharpness/
                            Saturation on the Image Quality screen.
                            Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                            in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.



                                            Setting                   Description

                                               0               Higher
                                               1               High
                                               2               Normal
                                               3               Low
                                               4               Lower

              Color Shift   This sets up the default for Color Shift on the Image Quality
                            screen.
                            Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                            in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.



                                            Setting                   Description

                                               0               Coolest
                                               1               Cool
                                               2               Normal
                                               3               Warm
                                               4               Warmest




4– 3 8                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Color Balance - Yellow,      This sets up the default for each density level, Low Density,
      Magenta, Cyan, Black        Medium Density, and High Density, for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and
                                  Black in Color Balance on the Image Quality screen.
                                  The defaults are all 0.
                                  NOTE: The values set here will also be applied to Black and
                                  Single Color modes.
        Original Orientation      This sets up the default for Original Orientation on the Scan
                                  Options screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Head to Top.



                                                   Setting                 Description

                                                      0              Head to Top
                                                      1              Head to Left

             Image Rotation       This sets up the default for Image Rotation on the Scan Options
                                  screen. On during Auto refers to Auto Paper selection for Paper
                                  supply or Auto % for Reduce/Enlarge.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 1, On during Auto.



                                                   Setting                 Description

                                                      0              Always On
                                                      1              On during Auto
                                                      2              Off




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               4 – 39
Rotation Direction    Set the default for Rotation Direction when Always On or On
                               during Auto is selected in Image Rotation on the Scan Options
                               screen.
                               Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                               in the following table. The default is 1, Portrait Original - Left Edge.



                     Setting                            Description

                        0               Auto (can be selected only when the
                                        machine is equipped with Finisher)
                        1               Portrait Original - Left Edge
                        2               Portrait Original - Right Edge

                               NOTE:When the machine is equipped with a Finisher, the default
                               will be 0, Auto.




4– 4 0                                                           Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Copy Control

                                  This is the setting for Copy Control.
                                  The following items can be set in Copy Control.
              Auto Paper Off      Set which tray will be selected when Auto % or Independent X-Y
                                  Auto is selected in Reduce/Enlarge when Auto is selected in
                                  Paper Supply, on the Basic Copying screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 1, Select Tray 1.



                                                    Setting               Description

                                                       1             Select Tray 1
                                                       2             Select Tray 2
                                                       3             Select Tray 3
                                                       4             Select Tray 4

    Memory Full Procedure         Set the processing method when the hard disk runs out of memory
                                  during a job.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Disable.



                                             Setting                      Description

                                                0              Disable (Discard stored
                                                               documents)
                                                1              Enables stored data

    Maximum Stored Pages          This determines the maximum number of stored pages when
                                  copying documents. It can be set from 1 to 999 pages.
                                  Enter the number of the pages using the numeric keypad on the
                                  Control Panel. The default is 999.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                           4 – 41
Original Size Defaults

                                 This sets up the original sizes that will be displayed when the
                                 Original Size is displayed from the Scan Options tab.
                                 An original size can be assigned to Original Size Buttons 1 ~ 11.
                                 Setting frequently used non-standard size in advance prevents
                                 you from having to input the size each time. When you set up non-
                                 standard sizes, the range for X direction is 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~
                                 17.0 inches) and for Y direction is 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7
                                 inches).
 Original Size Button 1 ~ 11     The sizes that can be selected for Original Size Buttons are as
                                 follows. Select a button and set the size.
                                 The defaults are as follows. The order is from Original Size Button
                                 1 (Left Upper): A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, B4, B5 SEF,
                                 B5 LEF, 11x17 in., 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF.



                  Setting                                Description

               A/B Series Size       A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, A6
                                     LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, B6 LEF
                  Inch Size          11x17 in., 11x15 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x11
                                     in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 5.5x8.5
                                     in. LEF
                   Others            5x7 in., 3.5x5 in., 8K, 16K SEF, 16K LEF
                  Variable           Setting ranges are: 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0
                                     inches) for X direction, 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7
                                     inches) for Y direction in increments of 1 mm (0.1
                                     inches)




4– 4 2                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Reduce/Enlarge Presets

                                  This sets up the magnifications that will be displayed in Preset%,
                                  in Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen. 18 different
                                  magnifications can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7.
             R/E Preset 1 ~ 7     Assign magnifications to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default for R/E Preset 1 is 25.0%.



                                                  Setting                   Description

                                          1                         25.0%
                                          2                         35.3%

                                          3                         50.0%

                                          4                         57.7%
                                          5                         61.2%

                                          6                         64.7%

                                          7                         70.7%
                                          8                         81.6%

                                          9                         86.6%

                                          10                        115.4%
                                          11                        122.5%

                                          12                        129.4%

                                          13                        141.1%
                                          14                        163.2%

                                          15                        173.2%

                                          16                        200.0%

                                          17                        282.8%
                                          18                        400.0%

                                          19                        78.5%

                                          20                        94.0%
                                          21                        154.5%




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 43
Custom Colors

                               This sets up the user registered colors used in Single Color and
                               Dual Colors on the Output Color screen.
         Custom Colors 1 ~ 6   Assign user registered colors, Yellow (0~100%), Magenta
                               (0~100%), Cyan (0~100%), to Custom Color Buttons 1 ~ 6. The
                               default is 0.
                               NOTE: Adjust the registered color so that the sum of Yellow,
                               Magenta and Cyan is 240% or less.


Network Settings




                               Network Settings consists of Protocol Setting, which determines
                               the necessary condition for the communication.
            Ethernet Setting   Sets the Ethernet Setting for the machine.
                               Select one of the following settings. The default is 0, Auto
                               (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).
                               •   Auto (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX)
                               •   100BaseTX
                               •   10BaseT
    TCP/IP - Get IP Address    Select the procedure for setting the IP address on the machine.
                               Select one of the following settings.
                               •   DHCP - The IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address
                                   are automatically extracted from the DHCP server.
                               •   BOOTP - The IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
                                   address are automatically extracted from the BOOTP server.
                               •   Manual - Enables you to manually enter the IP address,
                                   Subnet Mask, and Gateway address.
                               NOTE: The Subnet Mask and Gateway address cannot be
                               entered if the IP address is not set.




4– 4 4                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
TCP/IP - IP Address       Sets the IP address for the machine.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table.



                                                  Setting                   Description

                                          0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255   Set the IP address in
                                                                      increments of 1

      TCP/IP - Subnet Mask        Sets the Subnet Mask setting for the machine.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table.



                                                  Setting                   Description

                                          0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255   Set the Subnet Mask in
                                                                      increments of 1

 TCP/IP - Gateway Address         Sets the Gateway address for the machine.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table.



                                                  Setting                   Description

                                          0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255   Set the Gateway address
                                                                      in increments of 1

     TCP/IP - IP Address for      Sets the IP address for download for the machine.
                  Download        Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table



                                                  Setting                   Description

                                          0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255   Set the IP address in
                                                                      increments of 1




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 45
Scan Mode Settings




                               These settings are enabled for the scan features.
                               For more information on scanner features, refer to the Scan
                               chapter.


         Basic Scanning Presets

                               You can change the magnification percentages assigned to the
                               buttons displayed in R/E Presets on the Basic Scanning screen.
                               Setting frequently used scan ratios prevents you from having to
                               change the setting each time you scan.
                               The following items can be configured in R/E Presets.
  Reduce/Enlarge 2nd ~ 4th     Set the ratios displayed for the 2nd to 4th buttons from the top
                  Buttons      down, for each of the feature buttons. Select available ratios from
                               those currently assigned to R/E Preset buttons.
                               Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                               in the following table. The defaults are: 2 for the 2nd button from
                               the top, 4 for the 3rd button, and 7 for the 4th button.



                     Setting                           Description

                       1                Ratio set to R/E Preset 1
                       2                Ratio set to R/E Preset 2
                       3                Ratio set to R/E Preset 3
                       4                Ratio set to R/E Preset 4
                       5                Ratio set to R/E Preset 5
                       6                Ratio set to R/E Preset 6
                       7                Ratio set to R/E Preset 7

                               NOTE: This setting is not used when there is a DADF on the
                               machine.




4– 4 6                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Scan Defaults

                                  This sets the defaults for the scan features. The machine returns
                                  to the defaults set here when the power is turned on, the machine
                                  returns from the Power Saver mode, or the Clear All button is
                                  pressed. Setting frequently used features prevents you from
                                  having to change settings each time you scan. The following items
                                  can be configured in Scan Defaults.
                Output Color      Set the default for Output Color on the Basic Scanning screen.
                                  Select from Auto, Full Color, Grayscale, and Black. The default is
                                  Auto.
            Scan Resolution       Set the default for Scan Resolution on the Basic Scanning screen.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, 200 dpi.



                                                  Setting                 Description

                                                     0              200 dpi
                                                     1              300 dpi
                                                     2              400 dpi
                                                     3              600 dpi

       Mixed Size Originals       Set the default for Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options
                                  screen in Scan mode. Set whether or not to use the Mixed Size
                                  Originals feature when the DADF is used for scanning.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Off.



                                                  Setting                 Description

                                                     0              Off
                                                     1              On




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 47
Border Erase - Top &   Set the default for the top and bottom Border Erase amounts.
                      Bottom    Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                in the following table. The default is 2mm (0.1 inches).



                                              Setting                    Description

                                                 0              None
                                              1 ~ 50            Set top & bottom Border
                                                                Erase amount in increments
                                                                of 1mm
                                              0 ~ 2.0           Set top & bottom Border
                                                                Erase amount in increments
                                                                of 0.1 inches

Border Erase - Left & Right     Set the default for the left and right Border Erase amounts.
                                Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                in the following table. The default is 2mm (0.1 inches).



                                              Setting                    Description

                                                 0              None
                                               1 ~ 50           Set left & right Border
                                                                Erase amount in
                                                                increments of 1mm
                                               0 ~ 2.0          Set left & right Border
                                                                Erase amount in
                                                                increments of 0.1 inches

                Center Erase    Set the default for Center Erase. The Center Erase will be
                                distributed evenly along the center of the original image.
                                Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                in the following table. The default is 0 mm (0 inches).



                                              Setting                    Description

                                                 0              None
                                              1 ~ 50            Set Center Erase amount in
                                                                increments of 1mm
                                              0 ~ 2.0           Set Center Erase amount in
                                                                increments of 0.1 inches




4– 4 8                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Original Orientation      Set the orientation of the document when it is scanned.
                                  Determination of the top, bottom, left and right edges of the
                                  original changes according to this setting. If it is set to 0, Head to
                                  Top, the original image will always be saved rotated 90°.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, Head to Top.



                                                   Setting                   Description

                                                      0               Head to Top
                                                      1               Head to Left

              Lighter/Darker      Set the default for Lighter/Darker in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the
                                  Image Quality/File Format screen in Scan mode.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 3, Normal.



                                                   Setting                   Description

                                                      0               Light (+3)
                                                      1               Light (+2)
                                                      2               Light (+1)
                                                      3               Normal
                                                      4               Darker (-1)
                                                      5               Darker (-2)
                                                      6               Darker (-3)




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                4 – 49
Contrast   This sets up the default for Contrast in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on
                         the Image Quality/file format screen in Scan mode. Set the
                         contrast for the document to be scanned. The contrast setting is
                         enabled if Output Color is not set to Black.
                         Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                         in the following table. The default is 2, Normal.



                                         Setting                   Description

                                            0               Higher
                                            1               High
                                            2               Normal
                                            3               Low
                                            4               Lower

         Auto Exposure   Set the default for Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File
                         Format screen in Scan mode.
                         Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                         in the following table. The default is 0, Off.



                                         Setting                   Description

                                            0               Off
                                            1               On




4– 5 0                                                   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Scan Size Defaults

                                  Set the sizes displayed on the Scan Size screen under the Scan
                                  Options tab. Any scan size can be assigned to Scan Size buttons
                                  1 ~ 11, except for Auto Size Detect.
                                  Setting frequently used scan sizes will prevent you from having to
                                  enter scanning size each time you scan. When entering non-
                                  standard sizes, set the size between 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0
                                  inches) for the X direction, and 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7 inches)
                                  for Y direction, in increments of 1mm (0.1 inches).
            Scan Size 1 ~ 11      The following table shows the sizes that can be set to scan size
                                  defaults. Select a button, and choose a size.



                  Setting                                   Description

              A/B Series Size         A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, A6
                                      LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, B6 LEF
                 Inch Size            11x17 in., 11x15 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x11 in.
                                      SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 5.5x8.5 in. LEF
                  Others              5x7 in., 3.5x5 in., 8K, 16K SEF, 16K LEF
                  Variable            Setting ranges are: 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0 inches)
                                      for X direction, 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7 inches) for Y
                                      direction in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments

                                  The defaults are as follows. 5.5x8.5 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF,
                                  8.5x11 in. LEF, 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x14 in., 11x17 in., A4 LEF, A4
                                  SEF, A3, 3.5x5 in., 5x7 in.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 – 51
Output Size Defaults

                               Set the sizes displayed for Output Size when selecting Auto % in
                               Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen in Scan mode.
                               Any output size can be assigned to Output Size buttons 1 ~ 8.
                               Setting frequently used sizes prevents you from having to set
                               sizes each time you scan.
           Output Size 1~8     Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                               in the following table.



         Setting             Description             Setting                  Description

           4          A6 SEF                            9           5.5x8.5 SEF
           68         A6 LEF                            73          5.5x8.5 LEF

           7          B6 SEF                            20          8.5x11 in. SEF

           71         B6 LEF                            84          8.5x11 in. LEF
           10         A5 SEF                            28          8.5x13 in.

           74         A5 LEF                            29          8.5x14 in.

           13         B5 SEF                            33          11x15 in.
           77         B5 LEF                            34          11x17 in.

           21         A4 SEF                            31          8K

           85         A4 LEF                            52          16K SEF
           30         B4                               116          16K LEF

           35         A3                                54          3.5x5 in.

                                                        6           5x7 in.




4– 5 2                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Reduce/Enlarge Presets

                                   Set the Preset % ratios displayed in Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan
                                   Options screen in Scan mode.
                                   Any ratio can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7, except for 100%.
                                   Setting frequently used magnification ratio saves you from having
                                   to change the setting each time.
             R/E Preset 1 ~ 7      Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                   in the following table.



         Setting                 Description              Setting                 Description

            1            25.0%                              12            129.4%
            2            35.3%                              13            141.4%

            3            50.0%                              14            163.2%

            4            57.7%                              15            173.2%
            5            61.2%                              16            200.0%

            6            64.7%                              17            282.8%

            7            70.7%                              18            400.0%
            8            81.6%                              19            78.5%

            9            86.6%                              20            94.0%

           10            115.4%                             21            154.5%
           11            122.5%




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 53
Other Scan Settings

                                This section describes how to set other scanner-related settings.
                                The following items can be configured in Other Settings.
                Scan Service    Set whether or not to enable scan features. The default is
                                Enabled.
     Memory Full Procedure      Set the processing method when the scanner runs out of memory
                                during scanning. Set whether or not to enable documents stored
                                so far.
                                Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                in the following table. The default is 1, Enabled.



                                                Setting                 Description

                                                   0              Disabled (Discard
                                                                  stored documents)
                                                   1              Enables stored data

    Maximum Stored Pages        Set the maximum number of stored pages for scanning. Set any
                                number between 1 ~ 999.
                                Enter the number of the pages using the Numeric Keypad. The
                                default is 999.
         Lighter/Darker Level   Set the default for the density assigned to Lighter ~ Darker in
                                Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format screen
                                in Scan mode. Set the density between -100 ~ +100 in increments
                                of 1.
                                Lighter (+3) ~ Lighter (+1) must be set between -100 and -1, and
                                Darker (+1) ~ Darker (+3) must be set between +1 ~ +100.
                                Normal, 0, cannot be changed. Set so that the values increase
                                from Lighter (+3) to Darker (+3).
                                Select scanning density using the up and down arrow buttons on
                                the left, and set the value using the up and down arrow buttons on
                                the right.




4– 5 4                                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Contrast Level      Set the default density assigned to Lower ~ Higher for Contrast in
                                  Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality screen. Contrast
                                  Settings are not enabled when Output Color is set to Black. Set
                                  the density between -100 ~ +100 in increments of 1.
                                  Lower ~ Slightly Lower must be set between -100 and -1, and
                                  Slightly Higher ~ Higher must be set between +1 ~ +100.
                                  Standard, 0, cannot be changed. Set so that the values increase
                                  from Lower to Higher.
                                  Select Contrast using the up and down arrow buttons on the left,
                                  and set the values using the up and down arrow buttons on the
                                  right. The defaults from the top are, -50, -25, 0, 25, 50.
                 Color Space      Set the default for Color Space.
                                  Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed
                                  in the following table. The default is 0, sRGB.



                      Setting                            Description

                         0              sRGB output
                         1              Output by device RGB. This limits the file
                                        format to TIFF (with ICC profile). Profiles are
                                        used to enable output at tones close to those
                                        of the machine.

                                  NOTE: You can find profile data on the Driver CD.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            4 – 55
Auditron Administration




                          Auditron Administration is an audit feature. This feature
                          electronically records the number of copies or prints made for
                          each user account and controls the access and use of the copier.
                          Auditron Administration allows you to:
                          •   Create, change, and delete up to 1000 user accounts.
                          •   Control access to copy features.
                          •   Control access to scan features.
                          •   Limit copying to B/W, Color, or allow both.
                          •   Limit the number of copies made per user account.
                          •   Check the number of copies made per user account.
                          •   Print account information.
                          •   Reset account meters.




4– 5 6                                                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Create/Check Accounts

                                  To setup Auditron you must create user accounts. Users will then
                                  be required to enter the password setup with their account to
                                  perform certain machine functions. You can create up to 1000
                                  accounts. The following information is contained within each
                                  account.
                   Password       Set any password between 4 - 12 digits long.
              Account Name        Set any account name up to 31 characters long, using letters and
                                  symbols.
               Color Access       Set whether or not to restrict color copying or B/W copying.
               Account Limit      Set the maximum number of copies that can be made with this
                                  account. The account limit can be set between 100 - 1999900, in
                                  100 page increments.




                            1     Select Create/Check Accounts on the Auditron Administration
                                  screen. The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed.

                            2     Select an item that is not in use, and select Create/Delete.

                            3     Enter a 4-digit number as the Password using the Numeric
                                  Keypad on the Control Panel. The password cannot be set if an
                                  identical password has already been registered to another
                                  account. When you have finished entering the Password, select
                                  Save. The screen for that account number is automatically
                                  displayed.

                            4     Enter the desired password for that account.

                            5     Select Account Name. The screen for entering text is displayed.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              4 – 57
6    Enter the account name, and select Save. The screen returns to
                           the Create/Delete screen.

                      7    Select Color Access. The Color Access screen is displayed.
                           Select the desired option, and select Save.
                           •   Free Access - Allows both Color and B/W copies.
                           •   Black Only - Allows only B/W copies.

                      8    Select Change Account Limit. The Account Limit screen is
                           displayed. Enter the maximum number of color copies using
                           Numeric Keypad, and select Next. Enter the maximum number of
                           B/W copies using Numeric Keypad, and select Save. The screen
                           returns to the Create/Delete screen.

                      9    Select Close.



         Deleting/Resetting Data by Account

                           Information for individual user accounts can be deleted and reset.




                      1    Select Create/Check Accounts on the Auditron Administration
                           screen. The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed.

                      2    Select the account whose data is to be deleted or reset, and select
                           Create/Delete. The Create/Delete screen is displayed.

                      3    Select Change Account Limit to change the limits for Color or
                           B/W copying.

                      4    Select Reset Total Pages Printed or Reset Account.
                           •   When Reset Total Pages Printed is selected, the number of
                               copies made for the selected account is reset and returned to
                               0. A reset cannot be undone.
                           •   When Reset Account is selected, account data and the
                               settings of registered account data are deleted. When this
                               button is selected, a confirmation screen is displayed. If you
                               select Yes, the account will be deleted. To cancel, select No.




4– 5 8                                                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Enabling Auditron Mode

                                  You can enable Auditron Mode for copy, scan, or both. When
                                  Auditron Mode is enabled, the user must select the Access button
                                  and enter the appropriate user account password to start using
                                  the machine.




                            1     Select Auditron Mode on the Auditron Administration screen. The
                                  Auditron Mode screen is displayed.

                            2     Select On or Off for Copy and Scan, and select Save. The screen
                                  returns to the Auditron Administration screen.

                            3     Select Close until the System Settings screen is displayed.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                             4 – 59
System Administrator Data

                          You can check the total number of pages printed for color and
                          B/W. You can also reset this data.




                      1   Select System Administrator Data on the Auditron
                          Administration screen. The System Administrator Data screen is
                          displayed.




                      2   Check the total number of pages printed. To reset this data, select
                          Reset.

                      3   Select Close.




4– 6 0                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Delete/Reset All Account Data

                                  Five different types of data can be deleted from all accounts.
                All Accounts      Deletes all accounts and all account information associated with
                                  each account.
  All Copy Access Settings        Enables color copying for all accounts by setting the Color Access
                                  in all accounts to Free Access.
          All Account Limits      Sets all Account Limits to the maximum number on the machine,
                                  1999900.
     All Total Pages Printed      Resets the Total Pages Printed for Color and B/W for each
                                  account to 0.
            Print Meter Data      Resets the meters in System Administrator Data for the total
                                  number of pages printed.




                            1     Select Delete/Reset Account Data on the Auditron
                                  Administration screen. The Delete/Reset Account Data screen is
                                  displayed.




                            2     Select the button for the desired operation, and select Delete/
                                  Reset. The Confirmation screen is displayed.

                            3     Select Yes in the Confirmation screen. The details you selected
                                  are cleared. Deleted data cannot be restored.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                4 – 61
Printing Meter Reports

                              When a password for entering System Settings mode is set, you
                              can print Printer Meter Reports and Auditron Reports.
         Print Meter Report   Check the total number of pages printed on this machine. The
                              number of printed pages is counted individually for color and for
                              B/W.
           Auditron Report    Check the number of pages printed by individual user accounts.
                              You can print a report for a certain account, or all the accounts set
                              up on the machine.




                         1    Press the Access button. Enter the password and select
                              Confirm.

                         2    Select User Mode.

                         3    Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel. The
                              Machine Status screen is displayed.

                         4    Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab. The Billing Meter/Print
                              Report screen is displayed.

                         5    Select Print Report/List. The Print Report/List screen is
                              displayed.

                         6    Select Auditron Administration.

                         7    Select the desired report:
                              •   Print Meter Report
                              •   Auditron Report
                              If you select Auditron Report, select the desired account number
                              or All Accounts.
                              NOTE: 50 account numbers can be selected at a time or all
                              accounts can be selected as the account number.

                         8    Press Start. The report is printed.

                         9    Select Close.




4– 6 2                                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
5.     Specifications




                                  This chapter contains details on how to load the paper trays, and
                                  paper tray specifications. It also provides you with information on
                                  the DocuColor 3535 machine specifications and Finisher (optional
                                  accessory).


Loading Paper

                                  This section contains basic information about loading paper and
                                  transparencies, and about using paper trays. It also includes some
                                  paper usage guidelines for the DocuColor Series.
                                  For more information about the materials you can use, refer to the
                                  Recommended Materials for the DocuColor Series.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              5–1
Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4

                                 Trays 1,2,3 and 4 hold the paper supply for the DocuColor printer/
                                 copier.
                                 Trays 1 - 4 can feed Transparencies and paper weights 18 lb. to
                                 110 lb. (64 to 220 gsm). The machine automatically detects the
                                 size and orientation of loaded paper. The paper type must be set
                                 in System Setting mode.
                                 Trays 1 - 4 can accommodate approximately 300 striped
                                 transparencies and approximately 450 stripeless transparencies.
                                 Both striped and stripeless transparencies can be used, but
                                 stripeless transparencies are recommended. It is not
                                 recommended that you output more than 20 transparencies at a
                                 time. If your job is larger than 20 pages, use the Transparency
                                 Separators feature.
                                 NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher
                                 (optional accessory). Transparencies cannot be used for 2 Sided
                                 output.
                                 NOTE: When making copies you can select transparencies from
                                 Tray 5 (Bypass). If you want to select transparencies from Trays 1-
                                 4, your System Administrator must change the Paper Type setting
                                 in System Settings mode. To select transparencies for print jobs,
                                 you can select the correct paper type in the printer driver at the
                                 client.
             3-Tray Module       Trays 1 through 4 can accommodate transparencies and an
                                 assortment of and standard paper sizes, from 5.5x8.5 through
                                 11x17 inch, and A5 through A3. Trays 1 and 2 have width and
                                 length adjustment guides that can be adjusted if the paper size in
                                 the tray needs to be changed.
       Tandem Tray Module        Trays 1 and 2 can accommodate transparencies and an
                                 assortment of standard paper sizes, from 5.5x8.5 through 11x17
                                 inch, and A5 through A3. Trays 1 and 2 have width and length
                                 adjustment guides that can be adjusted if the paper size in the tray
                                 needs to be changed. Trays 3 and 4 can accommodate 8.5x11
                                 inch, A4, or B5 paper. Trays 3 and 4 can feed Transparencies and
                                 paper weights 18 lb. to 110 lb. (64 to 220 gsm).




5– 2                                                              Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Tray 5 (Bypass)

                                  Tray 5 (Bypass) is located on the left side of the printer/copier.
                                  Tray 5 (Bypass) can accommodate transparencies and other
                                  specified paper stocks, and various paper sizes up to 12x18 in. or
                                  SRA3. Tray 5 (Bypass) has the capacity to hold up to 95 sheets.
                                  Approximately 20 transparencies should be loaded in Tray 5
                                  (Bypass) at a time.

                          Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass)

                                  Certain standard paper sizes can be automatically detected in
                                  Tray 5 (Bypass) by selecting Auto Size Detect on the Tray 5
                                  programming screen. The following paper sizes can be used with
                                  the Auto Size Detect feature:
                                  •   US/Canada - 5.5x8.5 in. LEF/SEF, 8x10 in. LEF, 8.5x11 in.
                                      LEF/SEF, 8.5x13 in. SEF, 8.5x14 in. SEF, 11x17 in. SEF.
                                  •   Europe - A5 LEF/SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A3 SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, B4,
                                      Postcard (100 x 148mm).
                                  All other paper sizes must be specified using the selections under
                                  Standard Size, or by inputting the size under Non-standard size.
                                  For example, you must specify 12x18 inch when using that paper
                                  size.
                                  NOTE: A paper size mismatch message will be displayed if you try
                                  a job with Auto Size Detect selected and a paper size that is not
                                  included in the list above.


           Auto Tray Switching

                                  The Auto Tray Switching feature enables the printer/copier to
                                  automatically switch to another tray when a tray runs out of paper.
                                  The trays must be loaded with the same size paper in the same
                                  orientation (long edge feed or short edge feed).
                                  Auto Tray Switching must be enabled in System Settings mode,
                                  with the same paper type assigned to two or more trays.
                                  Auto Tray Switching may be enabled only for Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4.
                                  Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be enabled for Auto Tray Switching.
                                  The default for Auto Tray Switching is On with Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4
                                  enabled. To use Auto Tray Switching with the default settings, load
                                  the trays you want to use with the same size paper in the same
                                  orientation. Select the paper tray button for the tray with the lowest
                                  number on the Control Panel. For example, if you load Trays 1
                                  and 2 with the same size paper and the same orientation, select
                                  the Tray 1 Paper Supply button on the Basic Copying tab of the
                                  Touch Screen. The printer/copier draws from Tray 1 until it is
                                  empty, then switches automatically to Tray 2.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                  5 –3
Loading Stock


                  Paper

                          Load the paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 with the preferred printing
                          side up.




                          Load the paper into Tray 5 (Bypass) with the preferred printing
                          side down.




                          The capacity of the tray varies with the paper weight that is loaded
                          in the tray.
                          NOTE: For the best results, use only the recommended paper
                          sizes, paper weights, or paper types. If you do not use
                          recommended papers, you may experience copy quality
                          problems, paper jams, or possible component failures.
                          If you are loading pre-drilled paper load it into Tray 5 (Bypass) with
                          the undrilled long edge as the leading edge (holes to the left) for 1
                          sided output, the undrilled long edge as the trailing edge (holes to
                          the right) for 2 sided output.




5– 4                                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
NOTE: Do not load paper above the fill line of the paper tray edge
                                  guides.
                                  NOTE: Fan the desired paper before loading it into the Tray.
                                  Straighten the paper stack each time the paper tray is opened.
                                  Close the paper tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack. This
                                  ensures that the paper is in the correct position when the paper
                                  tray is in the operating position.
                                  If paper feeding or copy curl problems occur, flip the paper over in
                                  the tray and make the copies again. If the performance improves,
                                  continue to load the paper in this manner. Testing has shown that
                                  paper handling and copy performance vary with room
                                  temperature, humidity, paper quality, image area on copies, etc.
                                  All of these variables interact and, in some cases, you must
                                  decide which paper loading method works best.
                                  NOTE: Coated papers are very susceptible to humidity. Multifeeds
                                  are much more likely with humidity greater than 40%.
                                  Environmental conditions may require that coated paper be fed
                                  one sheet at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass).




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                5 –5
Transparencies

            Transparencies can be fed from Trays 1- 5 (Bypass). Stripeless
            transparencies are recommended. Striped transparencies must
            be loaded in Trays 1 - 4 with the stripe face down, on the right side
            of the tray. For Tray 5 (Bypass) striped transparencies must be
            loaded with the stripe face up, on the left side of the tray.
            NOTE: Use only the transparencies recommended in the
            Recommended Materials for the DocuColor Series.
            After loading the transparencies you can program the copier
            printer to insert a blank separator page between transparencies by
            using the Transparency Separators feature.
            For more information about the Tranparency Separators feature,
            refer to the section entitled Transparency Separators, in this
            chapter.
            Follow these guidelines to prevent static build up when using
            transparencies:
            •   Place no more than twenty 8.5x11 inch or A4 transparencies in
                Tray 5 (Bypass) at one time.
            •   Place only one 11x17 in. or A3 transparency in Tray 5
                (Bypass) at a time.
            •   Remove the transparencies from the Center Output Tray
                before running additional sets.
            •   It is not recommended that you output more than 20
                transparencies at a time. If your job is larger than 20 pages,
                use the Transparency Separators feature.
            NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher Tray.




            For more specific information about materials that have been
            tested and approved for use in the DocuColor 3535, refer to the
            Recommended Materials for the DocuColor Series. Current
            information is also available at the Xerox web site.




5– 6                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Envelopes

                                  Envelopes can be fed from Tray 5 (Bypass). You can use
                                  envelopes for print jobs. Copying on envelopes is not supported.
                                  Three types of envelopes are supported:
                                  •   Monarch 7 3/4 “ (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm)
                                  •   Commercial #10 (104.8 mm x 241.3 mm)
                                  •   DL (110 mm x 220 mm)




                            1     Load a maximum of 10 envelopes into Tray 5 (Bypass) at a time.
                                  You may be able to fit a few more depending on the thickness of
                                  the envelope, but do not exceed the max fill line on the tray.
                                  •   Envelopes must be loaded LEF, face down in Tray 5 (Bypass).
                                  •   The flap should be closed, and enters the machine first.
                                  •   The machine is not designed to handle high-capacity
                                      production envelope printing.
                                  •   The envelope may wrinkle depending on its weight and
                                      stiffness.

                            2     In the Printer Driver, you must select Custom Paper Size to use
                                  envelopes.

                            3     Set the Media Type to Heavyweight 2.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              5 –7
Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4




        1    To load a paper tray, pull the tray out.

        2    Fan the paper and load the desired paper into the tray by aligning
             the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray. The side to
             be copied should be facing up.
             Do not fill the paper tray above the fill line.

        3    Adjust the paper guides if necessary, until they lightly touch the
             paper.

        4    Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.




5– 8                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Loading Stock into Tray 5 (Bypass)

                                  The number of sheets that can be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass)
                                  varies with the weight of the stock.
                                  NOTE: Paper stocks which exhibit difficulties when fed from Trays
                                  1,2,3 and 4 may be fed more reliably from Tray 5 (Bypass).
                                  Do not add paper during a copying job. Do not interleave
                                  transparencies with paper in Tray 5 (Bypass).
                                  NOTE: Make sure to select the appropriate paper type (i.e.
                                  transparencies, heavyweight paper). This will ensure that the
                                  images are fused properly in the printing/copying process.




                            1     Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it
                                  away and down from the printer/copier.

                            2     Check the position of the front edge paper guide for Tray 5
                                  (Bypass).
                                  NOTE: The guide should only be set to the 12 inch position for
                                  papers wider than A3 (297 mm), such as 12x18 inches.

                            3     Fan the paper and load paper with the side to be copied or printed
                                  on facing down. Insert the paper lightly along the paper guide on
                                  the front side of the machine until it comes to a stop.

                            4     Adjust the back edge paper guide until it lightly touches the paper.
                                  NOTE: Do not load mixed size paper into the tray. Do not load
                                  materials above the fill line located on the paper guide

                            5     Select the appropriate size and type for the paper you have
                                  loaded.

                            6     Remove all stock from Tray 5 (Bypass) after the job is complete.
                                  Dust and moisture can cause copy quality defects.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                5 –9
Loading 12 x 18 inch Paper

               Use Tray 5 (Bypass) for 12x18 inch (305 x 457 mm) paper.




          1    Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it
               away and down from the printer/copier.

          2    Adjust the front edge paper guide for Tray 5 (Bypass) to the 12x18
               position.

          3    Load up to 100 sheets of 12x18 inch (305 x 457 mm) 20 lb. paper
               into Tray 5 (Bypass). Load paper with the side to be copied or
               printed on facing down.

          4    Adjust the back edge guide until it lightly touches the paper.

          5    Select 12x18 in. under Standard Size, and select the appropriate
               type for the paper you have loaded.

          6    When the job is complete, return the paper guides for Tray 5
               (Bypass) to their normal position.




5– 1 0                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Loading SRA3 Paper into Tray 5 (Bypass)




                            1     Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it
                                  away and down from the printer/copier.

                            2     Adjust the front edge paper guide to the closest position forward
                                  beyond the 12 inch position.

                            3     Load the SRA3 paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Load the paper with
                                  the side to be printed on facing down.

                            4     Adjust the back edge guide until it lightly touches the paper.
                                  NOTE: You can select SRA3 paper as one of the default paper
                                  sizes for Tray 5 (Bypass). Performance using this paper size may
                                  vary. The maximum image area is 302 x 476.6mm with a
                                  guaranteed area of 297 x 476.6mm.

                                  CAUTION: Do not place any objects or materials other than the
                                  appropriate stock on Tray 5 (Bypass). Printer/copier damage may
                                  occur.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                5– 11
Machine Specifications


         Speed by Media

         DocuColor 3535   Bond Paper (8.5x11 in./A4) 18 lb. - 24 lb. (64 gsm - 98 gsm):
                          •   Black and white: 35 ppm
                          •   Color: 35 ppm
                          Bond Paper (11x17 in./A3) 18 lb. - 24 lb. (64 gsm - 98 gsm):
                          •   Black and white: 22 ppm
                          •   Color: 22 ppm
                          Transparency (8.5x11 in./A4):
                          •   Black and white: 16 ppm
                          •   Color: 8 ppm
                          Heavyweight 1 (8.5x11 in./A4) 28 lb. bond - 90 lb. index (99 - 169
                          gsm):
                          •   Black and white: 22 ppm
                          •   Color: 22 ppm
                          Heavyweight 1 (11x17 in./A3) 28 lb. bond - 90 lb. index (99 - 169
                          gsm):
                          •   Black and white: 11 ppm
                          •   Color: 11 ppm
                          Heavyweight 2 (8.5x11 in./A4) 65 lb. cover- 110 lb. index (170 -
                          220 gsm):
                          •   Black and white: 11 ppm
                          •   Color: 11 ppm
                          Heavyweight 2 (11x17 in./A3) 65 lb. cover- 110 lb. index (170 - 220
                          gsm):
                          •   Black and white: 5 ppm
                          •   Color: 5 ppm




5– 1 2                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Coated 1 (8.5x11 in./A4) 80 lb. text - 100 lb. text (120 gsm - 169
                                  gsm):
                                  •   Black and white: 22 ppm
                                  •   Color: 22 ppm
                                  Coated 1 (11x17 in./A3) 80 lb. text - 100 lb. text (120 gsm - 169
                                  gsm):
                                  •   Black and white: 11 ppm
                                  •   Color: 11 ppm
                                  Coated 2 (8.5x11 in./A4) 65 lb. cover - 80 lb. cover (170 gsm - 220
                                  gsm):
                                  •   Black and white: 11 ppm
                                  •   Color: 11 ppm
                                  Coated 2 (11x17 in./A3) 65 lb. cover - 80 lb. cover (170 gsm - 220
                                  gsm):
                                  •   Black and white: 5 ppm
                                  •   Color: 5 ppm


           Dimensions and Weight

            DocuColor 3535        The dimensions are: 26.0 x 30.7 x 45.1 inches (660 x 780 x
                                  1145mm). Each size +/- 5mm.
           Finisher (optional     The dimensions are: 300 x 590 x 945mm. Each size +/- 5mm. The
                 accessory)       weight is: 35kg.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              5 – 13
Finisher (Optional Accessory)

                                   The DocuColor printer/copier may be equipped with an optional
                                   Finisher. The Finisher contains the following components:
         Finisher Cover Button     Provides access to the Finisher paper path.
                  Finisher Tray    Completed jobs are delivered to this tray.
           Finisher Front Door     Provides access to the Stapler area.
               Staple Cartridge    Load a new staple pack when needed.
                Finisher Stand     Supports the Finisher and may be used for storage.
             Finisher Interface    Delivers the copies to the Finisher.
         Center Tray Exit Cover    Provides access to the paper path.

                                   WARNING: Never cheat the safety interlock switch. Injury or
                                   a document jam may occur. This switch shuts off the Finisher
                                   power when you open the front door or when you move the
                                   Finisher to the right to clear a paper jam.


              Using the Finisher

                                   The Finisher can staple from 2 to 50 sheets (50-sheet maximum
                                   applies to up to 24lb / 90 gsm paper.) You can staple both portrait
                                   and landscape documents with single or dual staples. Output to
                                   the Finisher Tray is delivered face down. The Finisher Tray can
                                   hold up to 1000 sheets.
                                   •   Jobs containing more than 50 sheets will not be stapled.
                                   •   Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be selected as the paper source for a
                                       job going to the Finisher.




5– 1 4                                                              Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Stapling Options

                                   Stapling options are selected from the UI or from your printer
                                   driver and depend on the paper selected. The table below shows
                                   the acceptable paper sizes and stapling options.
                     Copying

    Paper
  Orientation    Paper Size       One Left      Two Left     Two Up      One Right    Two Right

 LEF            B5, A4,
                8.5x11 in.




 SEF            A4, 8x10 in.,
                8.5x11 in.,
                8.5x13 in.,
                8.5x14 in.




 SEF            B4, A3, 11x17
                in.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                          5 – 15
Printing

    Paper       Paper Size       One Left   Two Left   Two Up     One Right    Two Right
  Orientation

 LEF            B5, A4,
                8.5x11 in.




 SEF            A4, 8x10 in.,
                8.5x11 in.,
                8.5x13 in.,
                8.5x14 in.




 SEF            B4, A3,
                11x17 in.




5– 1 6                                                   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
6.     Maintenance




                                  This chapter describes maintenance procedures that should be
                                  performed on your machine regularly. When replacing
                                  consumable items, such as Toner Cartridges, refer to the
                                  instructions in this chapter for information on how to replace them.
                                  When consumable items need to be replaced the following
                                  message will appear: “Consumables need to be replaced.” Press
                                  the Machine Status button on the Control Panel to view the status
                                  of the consumables in your machine. There are several pages of
                                  consumables listed along with their status. If a consumable needs
                                  to be replaced it will be highlighted in white. If you are able to
                                  replace it the status will say “Replace Now.” If a service technician
                                  must replace it the status will say “Replace Now (Call for
                                  Service).” The consumables do not need to be replaced
                                  immediately when the status says “Replace Soon.”




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                6–1
Ordering Consumables

                       Consumable supplies can be ordered using the part numbers
                       listed in the following table. To order consumable supplies call the
                       supply number below:
                       United States: 1-800-822-2200



                                     Part Number                Description

                                      006R01122           Black Toner Cartridge

                                      006R01123           Cyan Toner Cartridge

                                      006R01124           Magenta Toner Cartridge

                                      006R01125           Yellow Toner Cartridge

                                      013R00579           Drum Cartridge

                                      008R12904           Fuser (110 Volt)

                                      008R12905           Fuser (220 Volt)

                                      008R12903           Waste Toner Container

                                      008R12915           Staple Cartridge




6– 2                                                    Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass

                                  Keep the DADF and Document Glass clean to ensure clean
                                  copies and acceptable copy quality. Clean the DADF and
                                  Document Glass as needed.




                            1     Open the DADF document cover.

                            2     Wipe off any dirt from the underside of the DADF document cover
                                  (belt section) with a dry cloth moistened with water. Wipe the
                                  cover with a soft, dry cloth until it is clean and dry.

                            3     Wipe off any dirt from the document glass with a soft cloth
                                  moistened with water. Wipe in a lengthwise direction making sure
                                  to keep your fingers off the glass. Repeat until the Document
                                  Glass has no visible marks or streaks.

                            4     Close the DADF document cover.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                            6 –3
Cleaning the ROS Window

                     The following procedure describes how to clean the ROS (Raster
                     Output Scanner) window.
                     NOTE: This procedure is normally performed after replacing the
                     Waste Cartridge or when image-quality defects, such as white or
                     color streaks appear during copying or printing.




                 1   Turn off the machine and open the Front Cover.

                     CAUTION: Place a drop-cloth or other suitable protection on the
                     floor or carpeting to catch any waste toner that may spill while
                     performing the next step.


                 2   Lower the Waste Toner Cartridge Cover.




6– 4                                                Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
3     Remove the Waste Toner Cartridge.
                                  •   Pull the Waste Toner Cartridge straight from the machine.




                            4     Remove the ROS Window Cleaning Tool from its storage area
                                  inside the Front Cover.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               6 –5
5   Clean the ROS Windows. Perform this twice for each cleaning
           slot.
           a. Gently insert the cleaning tool into the cleaning slot with the pad
           facing down.
           b. When the cleaning tool has gone in as far as possible, gently
           draw it out of the machine towards you.
           c. Repeat for each of the three (3) cleaning slots.




       6   Return the cleaning tool to its original position on the rear of the
           Front Cover.

       7   Reinstall the Waste Toner Cartridge and Waste Toner Cartridge
           Cover.

       8   Close the Front Cover.

       9   Turn on the machine.




6– 6                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Changing Toner Cartridges

                                  When a message is displayed to replace a Toner Cartridge, follow
                                  the instructions provided here in addition to those on the labels
                                  surrounding the cartridges.
                                  NOTE: When a message appears indicating that a Toner
                                  Cartridge is low, the color that is low will be shown. If additional
                                  cartridges are low, a more generic message will be displayed and
                                  you will not know which cartridges require replacement. Press the
                                  Machine Status button on the Control Panel, then select the
                                  Consumables tab to view the status of all the consumables.




                            1     Open the Front Door of the printer/copier and locate the Toner
                                  Cartridges. From left to right the Toner Cartridge colors are Black,
                                  Cyan, Magenta, Yellow.




                            2     Place a few sheets of paper on the floor under the Toner
                                  Cartridges to catch any toner that may spill.

                            3     Remove the empty cartridge by rotating it counterclockwise until
                                  the arrow on the cartridge is aligned with the arrow and unlock
                                  position on the printer/copier.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                6 –7
4   Pull the cartridge completely out of the printer/copier. Dispose of
           the cartridge according to local regulations.




       5   Remove the new cartridge from the box.

       6   Shake the cartridge from side to side.




       7   With the arrow on the cartridge facing upward, slide the cartridge
           into the printer/copier.




       8   Rotate the cartridge clockwise until the arrow on the cartridge is
           aligned with the arrow and lock position on the printer/copier.




6– 8                                        Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
9     Close the Front Door of the printer/copier.




                          10      Remove the sheets of paper on the floor under the Toner
                                  Cartridge, and dispose of them according to local regulations.

                                  CAUTION: Do not use warm or hot water, or cleaning solvents, to
                                  remove toner from your skin or clothing. This will set the toner and
                                  make it difficult to remove. If any toner gets on your skin or
                                  clothing, use a brush to remove the toner, blow it off, or wash it off
                                  with cold water and mild soap.

                                  CAUTION: If more than one Toner Cartridge needs to be replaced
                                  at the same time, be careful to place the new cartridges in their
                                  correct color locations.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                  6 –9
Changing Staple Cartridges

                      If you have the optional Finisher on your machine, you will need to
                      replace staple cartridges periodically. Open the Finisher Front
                      Cover and replace the staple cartridges according to the
                      instructions on the label located on the inside of the door.




6– 1 0                                                Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Changing the Fuser




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier   6– 11
6– 1 2   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier   6 – 13
Changing the Waste Toner Container




6– 1 4                               Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier   6 – 15
Changing Drum Cartridges




6– 1 6                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier   6 – 17
6– 1 8   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
7.     Troubleshooting




                                  The DocuColor Series 3535 is designed to help you find and solve
                                  problems as they happen. The printer/copier can detect problems
                                  and display the corrective action on the screen.
                                  This section describes the printer/copier faults and how to perform
                                  the appropriate recovery procedure.
                                  Sometimes you may not succeed in your efforts to clear a fault.
                                  When this happens you should call Xerox. Before calling for
                                  assistance, perform the steps provided on the following pages.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               7 –1
Paper Jam Clearance

                      When paper jams in the machine, the machine stops and a tone
                      sounds. A message display in the message area of the Touch
                      Screen with the corrective actions to take. Occasionally,
                      simultaneous multiple paper jams occur or multiple sheets of
                      paper jam during an extended copy job. A paper message
                      displays until all paper jams in the printer/copier have been
                      cleared. The Touch Screen displays the appropriate message
                      screen for the area of the printer/copier, which needs to be
                      checked until all jams are cleared.

                      WARNING: When clearing the paper path in the Fuser area
                      (located in the Paper Path Module), remember that the
                      surfaces are hot. To avoid injury, proceed with caution when
                      clearing the path.
                      Paper may jam in several areas inside the printer/copier.
                      •   Behind the Top Cover
                      •   Behind the Left Center Cover
                      •   Behind the Bottom Left Cover
                      •   In Trays 1 to 4
                      •   At Tray 5 (Bypass)
                      •   In the Duplex Paper Path
                      •   In the DADF
                      •   In the Finisher (Optional Accessory)
                      NOTE: Gradually remove the jammed paper so you do not rip it. If
                      the jammed paper rips, be sure to remove all of the pieces.
                      The action required to clear a paper jam varies with the location of
                      the jam. Clearance procedures for each of these areas are
                      provided in the actions that follow.
                      When the jam is cleared successfully and all doors are closed,
                      printing is automatically resumed from the state before the paper
                      jam occurred.
                      If the jam occurred during copying, press Start. Copying is
                      resumed from the state before the jam occurred.




7– 2                                                   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover

                                  This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the
                                  top left cover of the machine.




                            1     Gently open the top left cover while lifting up the release lever.

                            2     If the edge of the jammed paper can be reached at the output tray,
                                  pull the jammed paper in the direction of the feed-out tray.

                                  WARNING: The fuser area is very hot. Be careful when
                                  clearing a jam in this area.



                            3     Remove the jammed paper.
                                  NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                                  the machine.

                            4     If you cannot remove paper jammed inside the fuser unit, lift up
                                  the lever and remove the jammed paper.
                                  NOTE: After you have removed the jammed paper, return the
                                  lever to its original position.

                            5     Press the center section of the top left cover to gently close the
                                  cover, and lift up Tray 5 (Bypass).




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                    7 –3
Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover

                         This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the
                         left center cover of the machine.




                    1    Gently open the left center cover while pulling the release lever.

                    2    Remove the jammed paper.
                         NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                         the machine.

                    3    Gently close the left center cover.



       Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover

                         This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the
                         bottom left cover of the machine.




                    1    Gently open the bottom left cover while pulling the release lever.

                    2    Remove the jammed paper.
                         NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                         the machine.

                    3    Gently close the bottom left cover.




7– 4                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4

                                  This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur in Trays
                                  1 to 4.




                            1     Open the Left Center Cover (for paper jams in Tray 1) or the
                                  Bottom Left Cover (for paper jams in Trays 2 to 4), and remove the
                                  jammed sheet by pulling on the lead edge, if present. If the lead
                                  edge is not present, perform steps 2 to 4.

                            2     Open the tray where the paper jam occurred.

                            3     Remove the jammed paper.
                                  NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                                  the machine.

                            4     Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop.



           Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass)

                                  This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur in Tray
                                  5 (Bypass).




                            1     Inspect the paper feed entrance of Tray 5 (Bypass), and remove
                                  any jammed paper.
                                  NOTE: When two or more sheets of paper are loaded, remove all
                                  of the sheets from the tray.
                                  NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                                  the machine.

                            2     Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are
                                  neatly aligned.

                            3     Insert the paper into the Tray with the printed side facing down
                                  until its lead edge lightly touches the paper feed entrance.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                  7 –5
Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit

                         This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur on the
                         duplex unit.




                    1    Open the duplex cover above Tray 5 (Bypass).

                    2    Remove the jammed paper.
                         NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                         the machine.

                    3    Close the duplex unit cover, and lift up Tray 5 (Bypass).



       Paper Jams in the Finisher

                         This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur inside
                         the Finisher when the Finisher (optional accessory) is installed.

                   Paper Jams on the Finisher Top Cover




                    1    Press the button on the Finisher top cover. Open the Finisher top
                         cover.

                    2    Remove the jammed paper.
                         NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                         the machine.

                    3    Close the Finisher top cover.




7– 6                                                      Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Paper Jams on the Finisher Interface




                            1     Move the Finisher to the right.

                            2     Open the top cover on the Finisher.

                            3     Remove the jammed paper.
                                  NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                                  the machine.

                            4     Close the top cover on the Finisher.

                            5     Slide the Finisher back to the left.

                          Paper Jams on the Center Tray Exit




                            1     Move the Finisher to the right.

                            2     Remove the jammed paper.
                                  NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside
                                  the machine.

                            3     If the jammed paper is hidden from view, open the exit cover and
                                  check inside.

                            4     Slide the Finisher back to the left.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                              7 –7
Document Jams

                        If a document jams on the DADF, the machine stops, and an error
                        message appears on the display. Clear the document jam
                        according to the instructions displayed, then reload the document.


       Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top)

                        This section describes how to clear document jams on the left
                        cover (top) of the DADF.




                    1   Pull up the handle at the center of the left cover on the DADF, and
                        open the cover until it comes to a stop. The inside cover also rises
                        up interlocked with the other cover.
                        NOTE: Unlatch the document scanner cover completely to
                        stabilize it. Gently open the covers.

                    2   Remove the jammed paper.

                    3   Close the left cover of the DADF until you hear it click into place.

                    4   Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and
                        load the document again following the instructions displayed.
                        NOTE: After removing the jammed document, load the entire
                        document again including delivered document sheets. Already
                        scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped and
                        scanning will resume from the previous document sheet.
                        NOTE: Torn, wrinkled, or folded documents may cause document
                        jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the
                        document on the document glass to make copies.




7– 8                                                     Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass

                                  A message is displayed if a document jam occurs in the Original
                                  Input Area of the DADF, or on the Document Glass. Follow the
                                  instructions displayed to clear the problem.




                            1     If there is a document jammed in the Original Input Area, remove it
                                  gently.

                            2     Gently lift up the DADF.

                            3     Remove the jammed paper.

                            4     Gently return the DADF to the original position.

                            5     Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and
                                  load the document again following the instructions displayed.
                                  NOTE: After removing the jammed document, load the entire
                                  document again including delivered document sheets. Already
                                  scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and
                                  scanning will resume from the previous document sheet.
                                  NOTE: Torn, wrinkled, or folded documents may cause document
                                  jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the
                                  document on the document glass to make copies.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                               7 –9
Stapler Faults

                     This section describes how to clear stapler faults. Follow the
                     procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or
                     when staples are bent.
                     NOTE: To staple copies, the Finisher (optional accessory) must
                     be installed.




                 1   Make sure that the machine has stopped, then open the front
                     cover in the Finisher.

                 2   Hold the staple cartridge by its lever, and pull the staple cartridge
                     out to the right toward you.

                 3   Lift up the staple cartridge to remove it.

                 4   After removing the staple cartridge, check the inside of the
                     Finisher for any remaining staples.

                 5   Pull up the lever on the front of the staple cartridge.

                 6   Remove the jammed staples together with the staple sheet.
                     NOTE: When removing jammed staples, also remove the staple
                     sheet. Do not remove unused staples from the staple cartridge.

                     WARNING: Be careful when removing jammed staples to
                     avoid hurting your fingers.



                 7   Close the lever on the front of the staple cartridge until you hear it
                     click into place.

                 8   Return the staple cartridge to its original position until you hear it
                     click into place.

                 9   Close the Finisher front cover.
                     NOTE: A message will be displayed and the machine will not
                     operate if the Finisher front cover is not closed completely.




7– 1 0                                                 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Resolving Hardware Problems


           Toner Cartridge



             Problem                                       Suggested Solution

   –   Operator mistakenly          –   Reinstall the toner cartridge using the following procedure:
       removed the wrong            NOTE:The following procedure may result in dry ink spillage on
       toner cartridge and          the floor. To protect the floor, put a disposable covering or drop
       wishes to reinsert it.       cloth beneath and in front of the printer/copier.
                                    –   Reinstall the used and partially full toner cartridge by
   –   Operator cannot                  pushing in the cartridge until it is fully seated against the
       reinstate a partially full       rear stop.
       toner cartridge after it
       has been removed.

                                    NOTE:Inform the Xerox service representative at the next service
                                    call about the above action since he or she may need to clean up
                                    the dry ink on internal printer/copier components.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                     7– 11
Resolving Programming Problems



            Problem                                    Suggested Solution

    The Control Panel          –   Press Clear All on the Control panel
    Touch Screen does not      –   Touch a selectable button on the Touch Screen with one
    respond to a touch             finger. A slight pressure is required to cause the printer/copier
    command                        to react.
                               –   If the problem persists, open the Front Door of the printer/
                                   copier. Close the Front Door and make a selection on the
                                   Touch Screen. If the Touch Screen does not respond to any
                                   touch commands, switch off the power. Wait 15 seconds, then
                                   switch on the power. Reprogram the printer/copier for the copy
                                   features that are desired.
    You cannot program a       –   Jobs cannot be programmed or copies made while some
    job while a screen is          screens, such as administration screens, jam clearance
    open                           screens, or consumable status information screens, are open.
                               –   Follow the directions on the information screen. Then program
                                   the desired job.
    Printer/copier features    Certain features cannot be selected because of the previous
    are not selectable         selections. Generally, features or buttons you can select appear
                               selectable to indicate you can use them with the previous
                               selection.
    You cannot complete        Attempt to complete all the programming more quickly. The time-
    the programming. The       out values have been exceeded during the programming. The
    printer/copier times out   values can be changed.
    too quickly and resets     For more information about adjusting the machine timeouts, refer
    to the default settings.   to the section entitled Setting the Common Settings, in the User
                               Guide (Machine Administrator).




7– 1 2                                                              Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Resolving Processor Problems



          Problem                                      Suggested Solution

  Transparencies             Load transparencies by following the instructions in the section
                             Loading Stock, in the User Guide (Copier).
  11 x 17 (A3)               Remove each copy of 11x17 inch (A3) transparencies from the
  transparencies jam         Output Tray before subsequent copies exit the printer/copier
  when exiting the
  printer/copier to the
  output tray
  Transparencies stick       Select the Transparency Separators feature to eliminate the problem.
  together after copying     For more information about this feature refer to the section entitled
                             Transparency Separators, in the User Guide (Copier).
  Multiple sheets feed       –   Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Trays
  from the Trays                 1 and 2 hold approximately 520 sheets each of 24 lb. (90 gsm)
                                 paper. Tray 3 850 sheets 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper, Tray 4: 1150
                                 sheets 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper
                             –   Remove the paper from the Tray and fan the sheets to separate
                                 the joined sheets.
                             –   Predrilled sheets may stick together at the holes. Remove the
                                 paper from the Tray and fan the sheets to separate the joined
                                 sheets
  Multiple sheets feed       –   Paper and transparencies may stick together if environmental
  from Tray 5 (Bypass)           conditions are too dry and cause excessive static. Increase the
                                 humidity level in the printer/copier room to minimize static.
                             –   Do not overload Tray 5 (Bypass).
                             –   Gently fan transparencies to separate the sheets before you load
                                 them into Tray 5 (Bypass). If multiple sheet feeding continues,
                                 feed the transparencies one at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass).
  Sheets will not feed       –   Ensure that the height of the stack does not exceed the MAX fill
  from the Tray 5                line.
  (Bypass)                   –   Check that the paper guide is not too tight. The paper guide
                                 should be adjusted to be just snug against the paper stack.
  Paper jams when            –   Ensure that the edge guides of the paper trays fit snugly against
  exiting the Trays              the paper stack.
                             –   Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Tray 1
                                 and 2 hold approximately 520 sheets of 24 lb. (90gsm) paper.
                                 Tray 3 holds approximately 850 sheets of 24 lb. (90gsm) paper
                                 and tray 4 holds approximately 1150 sheets of 24lb (90 gsm)
                                 paper. Close the Tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 7 – 13
Problem                                      Suggested Solution

  Output jams when          –   Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the paper tray.
  exiting the printer/          When the Finisher Transport is present the Center Output Tray
  copier to the Center          can hold up to 200 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Empty the
  Output Tray (when the         Tray when output approaches this limit, to ensure continuous
  Finisher is installed)        production.
                            –   Ensure the first sheet is not blocking the paper exit, particularly
                                for 11x17 inch output.
  Output jams when          –   Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the Tray.
  exiting the printer/      –   The Center Output Tray has a capacity of 400 sheets of 24lb
  copier to the Center          (90gsm) paper. Remove the output when it approached this limit
  Output Tray (when the         to ensure continuous production. Ensure the first sheet is not
  Finisher is not               blocking the paper exit, particularly for 11x17 inch output.
  installed)
  11 x 17 inch output       Ensure the first sheet of 11x17 inch output exits completely.
  blocks exit
  Copies originating from   The paper guide on Tray 5 (Bypass) may not be set correctly or may
  Tray 5 (Bypass) are       be too tight against the paper stack. Ensure that the paper guide
  skewed. Jams may be       snugly touches the paper stack.
  occurring
  Printer/copier does not   For the Auto Paper selection to function correctly, the size of the
  make copies when          original document must be the same size as the paper supply that is
  Auto Paper is selected.   loaded in at least one of the trays. If not, select the paper tray size
                            that best meets your needs. Or if you wish to continue to use the
                            Auto Paper feature, load one of the trays with the same size paper as
                            the original document.
  Loss of information or    –   If you must use folded or creased paper, use a lightweight paper,
  image deletions on            24 lb. (90 gsm). Also, avoid imaging the copy paper in the are of
  copies made on paper          the fold or the crease.
  that has been folded or   –   Handle the copy paper carefully. Slight folds or creases may
  creased.                      result in output deletions.




7– 1 4                                                             Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Problem                                       Suggested Solution

  Excessive paper curl        –   Paper curl may be a result of:
                                  –   The mass of toner coverage on the copy - the greater the
                                      toner mass, the greater the paper curl.
                                  –   The paper weight.
                                  –   The humidity conditions at the printer/copier.
                              –   You can sometimes minimize curl problems by flipping the paper
                                  over in the tray and making the copies again. If excessive curl is
                                  still present, use a heavier paper.
                              –   Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the Paper Tray.
                              –   Attempt to minimize the amount of toner on the copy paper by
                                  selecting the Photo feature as the Original Type and /or the
                                  lighter and/or less contrast image quality options.
                              –   When the Finisher is present the Center Output Tray can hold up
                                  to 200 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Empty the output tray
                                  when output approaches this limit to ensure continuous
                                  production.
                              –   The Center Output Tray has a capacity of 400 sheets of 24 lb. (90
                                  gsm) paper. Remove the output when it approaches this limit to
                                  ensure continuous production.
                              –   Copying high density background areas or documents with
                                  alternating high and low density areas results in more curl.
                                  Attempt to reduce the amount of curl by adjusting the copy quality
                                  controls to reduce the amount of toner on the copies.
                              –   Place the printer/copier and paper in a room with air conditioning
                                  and low humidity to minimize the moisture in the environment.
                              –   Attempt to copy on thicker paper or on paper stock that is less
                                  sensitive to moisture.
  Wrinkled Copies or Prints   –   The following factors increase the likelihood of this problem:
                                  –   Lighter weight papers (i.e. 24 lb./90 gsm or lighter)
                                  –   Larger papers (i.e. 11 x 17 inch / A3)
                                  –   Short Grain 11 x 17 inch / A3 papers
                                  –   Old (not freshly opened) paper
                                  –   Humid environment
                                  –   2 Sided / Duplex copying or printing
                              –   To eliminate / minimize this problem:
                                  –   Use fresh paper from a newly opened ream
                                  –   Use Long Grain 11 x 17 inch / A3 paper
                                  –   Use a heavier weight paper
                              –   If the problem persists, contact your Xerox Customer Support
                                  Center.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 7 – 15
Resolving Output Problems using Basic Copying, Added Features, and
Image Quality Tabs

                                  For more information on the features on these tabs, refer to the
                                  section entitled Copier Features, in the Copy chapter.



          Problem                                     Suggested Solution

  Moiré patterns on the     This problem occurs when original documents have halftone images.
  copies                    Perform the suggested solutions in the following order:
                            –    Use the Sharpness feature to select Softer options until the moiré
                                 patterns are not visible.
                            –    If using Photo mode, switch to Text & Photo mode.
                            –    Select Halftone as the Original Type.
                            –    Rotate the original on the Document Glass by 180 degrees.
                            –    Reduce or enlarge the output by 5%.
  The entire document is    –    Enter the Original Size.
  not being copied          –    Reduce the image.
                            –    Ensure that the document placement matches the Original
                                 Orientation setting.
  Scattered, very light     –    Select Background Suppression in the Preset Color Balance
  show-through images            feature on the Image Quality tab.
  occur when copying a      –    To eliminate the unwanted show-through images, place the thin
  document that is on            (translucent) document on the Document Glass. Cover the
  thin paper                     document with a black (or very dark) sheet of paper that is the
                                 same size as the document you are copying.
                            –    Place the 2-sided original document on the document Glass with
                                 a blank sheet of paper on top of it.
  A black border appears    Select Auto Center in the Margin Shift feature or Border Erase on
  at the edge of the copy   the Added Features tab.
  when a reduction
  option is selected
  A black border appears    –    Select Auto Center in the Margin Shift feature or Border Erase
  on the copy of a small         on the Added Features tab.
  document                  Or
                            –    Program the Original Size on the Scan Options tab for the dark
                                 bordered document that you wish to copy.
  Colors are incorrect or   –    Perform an Auto Gradation Adjustment.
  have shifted over time.   For more information on Auto Gradation Adjustment, refer to the User Guide
                            (Machine Administrator).




7– 1 6                                                              Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Problem                                      Suggested Solution

  Deletions on the copy      –   Edge deletion on all sides of the copy is normal, and is greatest
  edges.                         on the lead edge of the copy. Set the Border Erase feature,
                                 Variable Erase option, to 4mm to minimize the deletion. Select
                                 the size for the original document on the Scan Options tab and an
                                 appropriate setting from the Reduce/Enlarge option from the
                                 Basic Copying tab.
                             –   Moisture may be present in the paper. Load a fresh supply of
                                 paper into the trays.
                             –   Some deletions may be caused by small pieces of paper
                                 remaining in the printer/copier components after a paper jam has
                                 been cleared. When clearing a paper jam, be sure to look for and
                                 remove any paper fragments.
  Copies made from           Most emulsions used to develop photographs have color. Sometimes
  photographs show           this color shows on the border of the photograph. To prevent the
  color or background on     color from being copied as part of the image or as background, use
  output edges               one of the following suggested solutions:
                             –   Select Background Suppression in the Image Quality Presets
                                 feature on the Image Quality tab.
                             –    Use the Border Erase feature on the Added Features tab to
                                 deliberately erase the unwanted color or background from the
                                 edge.
  The copies made using      Select the Original Size feature and program the exact size of the
  100% Reduce/Enlarge        dark bordered document that you wish to copy.
  feature do not include
  the entire image along
  the edge of the
  document.
  Output is too light        Use the Lighter/Darker feature to select a darker level. Select the
                             Text or Maps option in the Original Type feature.
  Output is too dark         Use the Lighter/Darker feature to select a lighter level. Select the
                             Photo option in the Original Type feature
  Output has too much        –   Select less Contrast (toward Lower) on the Light/Dark/Contrast
  contrast                       feature on the Image Quality tab.
                             –   Select less Color Saturation (toward Lower) on the Sharpness/
                                 Saturation feature on the Image Quality tab.
  Output has low             –   Select more Contrast (toward Higher) on the Light/Dark/Contrast
  contrast                       feature on the Image Quality tab.
                             –   Select more Color Saturation (toward Higher) on the Sharpness/
                                 Saturation feature on the Image Quality tab.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                 7 – 17
Problem                                     Suggested Solution

  Background on copies      –   Examine the input document for the source of the problem.
                            –   Ensure that the document is held flat on the Document Glass and
                                that the document cover is closed.
                            –   From the Image Quality tab, adjust the Lighter/Darker control to
                                lighter.
                            –   When making Black copies, select Black as the output color.
                                Reduce the color Balance-Low Density values so that the
                                background does not appear on the copies.
                            –   When copying colors, set the Output Color to Auto Color and
                                select Auto Exposure so that the background does not appear
                                on the copies.
                            –   Determine the type of document you are copying. From the
                                Original Type feature, indicate whether the original is Photo &
                                Text, Text, Photo or other color originals (Maps) for best copy
                                quality.
                            NOTE:You can select the Photo option for documents other than
                            photographs if the document contains areas of different density, from
                            light to dark, and all levels of density need to be copied.
  The copies are blurred    –   Increase the Sharpness.
  when copying thick        –   Select the Text or Other Color Originals (Maps) option in the
  documents, three-             Original Type feature
  dimensional objects, or
  books                     –   Ensure that the document is held flat on the Document Glass and
                                that the Document cover (DADF) is closed as much as possible.
                                DO NOT force the cover closed.
  Copies have dark          –   The bands may be caused by curled edges on the document or
  bands on the lead edge        by misregistration of the document on the Document Glass.
  and a corner when         –   Ensure that the document is registered correctly.
  100% Reduce/Enlarge
  is selected.              –   Ensure that the Border Erase is at No Erase (2mm). Increasing
                                the amount of the Border Erase should remove more of the dark
                                bands. Increasing the amount of Border Erase, however, may
                                eventually cause image loss.
  Copies have dark          –   The bands may be caused by curled edges on the document or
  bands on the lead edge        by misregistration of the document by the Duplex Automatic
  and a corner when             Document Feeder (DADF).
  100% Reduce/Enlarge       –   Ensure that the document is registered correctly.
  is selected and the
  DADF is used.             –   Ensure that the Border Erase is at No Erase (2mm). Increasing
                                the amount of the Border Erase should remove more of the dark
                                bands. Increasing the amount of Border Erase, however, may
                                eventually cause image loss.




7– 1 8                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Problem                                     Suggested Solution

  Corner Shift appears in    If the document is positioned on the Document Glass in the short
  the wrong area on the      edge direction, and the paper used for copying is in the long edge
  copy                       feed direction, the copy will appear to be positioning the corner shift
                             selection in the wrong corner. Corner shift selections are referenced
                             from the Document Glass location.
                             NOTE:Corner Shift is also intended only for documents that are
                             smaller than the copy paper selected.
  Copies have black          –   No shift is selected. Select Auto Center to eliminate the black
  borders. Large black           borders.
  borders appear on the      –   Also, select the Auto Center feature to eliminate the black when
  copies with documents          using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF).
  smaller than the copy
  paper size.
  Copies made from a         –   The DocuColor Series printer/copier detects low densities of color
  newspaper, a map, or a         and reproduces them. This is especially true with the Maps and
  photograph have                Photo options. The background can be reproduced or eliminated
  background when                by adjusting the Lighter/Darker feature toward lighter.
  Original Type is defined   –   Newspaper show-through can be reduced or eliminated by
  as Map or Photo.               backing the document with a black sheet of paper.
                             –   Use the Auto Exposure option in the Image Quality tab.
  The image density of       This defect is noticeable only when the input document has large
  the copy seems lighter     solid areas. To reduce or eliminate this defect, select the Photo
  toward the trail edge      option in the Original Type feature of the Image Quality tab.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                7 – 19
Calling for Service

                      There is information and support available at www.Xerox.com.
                      There you can find answers to many of your questions, solutions
                      to problems, order toner and supplies, and request service
                      support.
                      For information on clearing fault codes, refer to the section entitled
                      Fault Codes, in this chapter.
                      There may be times when you will not be able to correct a
                      problem. When this happens, you should call for service. The
                      numbers for calling for service are as follows.
                      •   North America:    1-800-821-2797
                      •   Europe:           _____________________
                      Be prepared to provide a complete description of the problem to
                      the service operator. This includes the following information:
                      •   Machine Serial Number -
                          Press the Machine Status button, then select Machine
                          Information to view the serial number.
                      •   Fault Codes
                          The Fault Code will appear on the screen when a fault occurs.
                      Defining the problem accurately may help to solve the problem
                      over the phone and minimize downtime. If the problem cannot be
                      resolved by telephone, a service representative will be dispatched
                      to your machine promptly.




7– 2 0                                                  Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Fault Codes

                                  This section describes the fault codes that are displayed on the UI
                                  screen and refer you to the DocuColor 3535 User Guide for
                                  information. If the fault code is not specified in the table, refer to
                                  the information with fault code “xxx-xxx” at the end of the table for
                                  instructions.



  Fault Code                                       Cause/Remedy

   003-747      •   Cause - An illegal print feature combination was set.
                •   Remedy - Check the print data.
   003-761      •   Cause - The paper size in the Tray selected by Auto Tray Switching is different
                    from the paper in the Tray selected in Tray Selection.
                •   Remedy - Change the paper size for the Tray, or change the paper type
                    priority setting.
   003-795      •   Cause - The Reduce/Enlarge ratio exceeds the setting range when the
                    scanned document is enlarged/reduced to the specified paper size.
                •   Remedy - Enter the Reduce/Enlarge ratio, or change the paper size.
   015-790      •   Cause - The scanned document is a copy-prohibited document
                •   Remedy - See the section entitled Illegal Copies in the front section of the
                    DocuColor 3535 User Guide to check the types of documents that can be
                    copied.
   016-450      •   Cause - The SMB host name has been set twice.
                •   Remedy - Change the host name.
   016-452      •   Cause - The IP address has been set twice.
                •   Remedy - Change the IP address.
   016-453      •   Cause - Failed to acquire the IP address from the DHCP server.
                •   Remedy - Set the IP address manually.
   016-454      •   Cause - Could not acquire the IP address from DNS.
                •   Remedy - Confirm the DNS settings and IP address acquisition method
                    setting.
   016-735      •   Cause - An attempt was made to print a job template while it was being
                    updated.
                •   Remedy - Wait a while before instructing printing again.
   016-737      •   Cause - An error occurred during reading of data from the job template pool
                    server.
                •   Remedy - Check the access rights of the directory to which the job template is
                    stored.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                7 – 21
Fault Code                                     Cause/Remedy

    016-739    •   Cause - Could not find the specified job template pool server.
               •   Remedy - Check the path name to the job template pool server.
    016-740    •   Cause - Could not log into the job template pool server.
               •   Remedy - Check the login user name, password, and other information.
    016-741    •   Cause - Could not connect to the job template pool server.
               •   Remedy - Ask the network administrator to check the network environment or
                   server environment.
    016-742    •   Cause - The job template could not be stored to memory due to insufficient
                   hard disk space.
               •   Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk
                   space.
    016-743    •   Cause - The settings on the job template pool server are incorrect.
               •   Remedy - Check the settings of the job template pool server.
    016-748    •   Cause - Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space.
               •   Remedy - Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing
                   up the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies.
    016-757    •   Cause - The entered password is wrong.
               •   Remedy - Enter the correct password.
    016-758    •   Cause - The account is not registered as an authorized copy user.
               •   Remedy - Contact the System Administrator.
    016-759    •   Cause - The maximum number of copies has been reached.
               •   Remedy - Contact the System Administrator.
    016-778    •   Cause - Conversion of the scanned image was discontinued due to insufficient
                   hard disk space.
               •   Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk
                   space.
    016-779    •   Cause - An error occurred during conversion processing of the scanned
                   image.
               •   Remedy - Instruct scanning again.
    016-780    •   Cause - An error occurred on the hard disk during conversion processing of
                   the scanned image.
               •   Remedy - A probable cause is hard disk malfunction. For information about
                   replacing hard disks, contact your Xerox Customer Support Center.
    016-781    •   Cause - Could not connect to the server during file forwarding by Scan
                   Services.
               •   Remedy - Ask the network administrator to check the network environment or
                   server environment.



7– 2 2                                                            Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Fault Code                                         Cause/Remedy

    016-782       •   Cause - Could not login to the server during file forwarding by Scan Services.
                  •   Remedy - Check the login user name, password, and other information.
    016-783       •   Cause - Could not find the specified server path during file forwarding by Scan
                      Services.
                  •   Remedy - Check the path name of the server currently set to the job template.
    016-784       •   Cause - A write to server error occurred during file forwarding by Scan
                      Services.
                  •   Remedy - Confirm that there is sufficient space in the directory on the server,
                      and that access rights are present.
    016-785       •   Cause - The file could not be sent due to insufficient space on the server’s
                      hard disk by Scan Services.
                  •   Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the server’s hard disk to increase hard
                      disk space.
    016-787       •   Cause - The server IP address set to the job template is illegal.
                  •   Remedy - Specify the correct job template.
    016-788       •   Cause - Failed to retrieve the file from the Web browser.
                  •   Remedy - Refresh the browser page, or restart the browser, or turn the
                      machine off then on again. Try retrieving the file again.
    020-530       •   Cause - No correct operations were performed in a certain period of time.
                  •   Remedy - Perform an operation within a certain period of time.
    xxx-xxx       •   Cause - An error occurred.
 (Fault Code)
 For all other
                  •   Remedy - Turn the machine Off, wait for the display on the control panel to go
 Fault Codes          out, then turn the machine back On again. If the same message is displayed,
  not listed in       record the message in (***-***). Next, turn the machine Off, wait for the display
   the above          on the Control Panel to go out, then contact your Xerox Customer Support
     table.           Center.
   Abnormal       •   Cause - An error occurred causing the operation to end abnormally.
  End (***-***)
                  •   Remedy - Program the same operation again.




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                                  7 – 23
7– 2 4   Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Index




                                  Numerics

                                  2 Sided 1–21, 1–32
                                  2 Sided Originals 3–8, 3–11

                                  A

                                  Added Features Tab 1–31
                                      2 Sided 1–32
                                      Border Erase 1–41




                                                                                            IN D EX
                                      Margin Shift 1–38
                                      Output 1–35
                                  Audio Tones 1–8
                                  Auditron Administration 4–56
                                      Create/Check Accounts 4–57
                                      Delete/Reset All Account Data 4–61
                                      Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4–58
                                      Enabling Auditron 4–59
                                      Printing Meter Reports 4–62
                                      System Administrator Data 4–60
                                  Auto Exposure 1–46, 3–23
                                  Auto Gradation Adjustment 4–24
                                  Auto Tray Switching 5–3

                                  B

                                  Basic Copying Tab 1–18
                                        2 Sided 1–21
                                        Output Color 1–19
                                        Paper Supply 1–28
                                        Reduce/Enlarge 1–24
                                  Basic Scanning Tab 3–4
                                        2 Sided Originals 3–8
                                        Job Template 3–5
                                        Output Color 3–6
                                        Scanning Resolution 3–7
                                  Billing Meters 1–90




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                             Index–1 1
INDEX

              Book Duplex 1–74
              Booklet Creation 1–81
              Border Erase 1–41, 3–19
              Bound Originals 1–70, 3–17
              Build Job 1–79

              C

              Calling for Service 7–20
              Certifications in Europe xii
              Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 4–6
              Changing Staple Cartridges 6–10
              Changing the Drum Cartridges 6–16
              Changing the Fuser 6–11
              Changing the Waste Toner Container 6–14
              Changing Toner Cartridges 6–7
              Checking Consumables 1–90
              Checking Paper Trays 1–89
              Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 6–3
              Cleaning the ROS Window 6–4
              Color Balance 1–50
              Color Shift 1–49
              Common Settings 4–7
                   Audio Tones 4–10
                   Auto Gradation Adjustment 4–24
                   Image Quality Adjustment 4–21
                   Machine Clock/Timers 4–8
                   Other Machine Settings 4–26
                   Paper Tray Attributes 4–13
                   Printing Priority 4–20
                   Screen Defaults 4–12
              Configuring the Client for Scanning 3–26
              Control Panel 1–4
              Conventions xviii
                   Symbols xviii
              Copier Features 1–18
                   Added Features Tab 1–31
                   Basic Copying Tab 1–18
                   Image Quality Tab 1–43
                   Job Assembly Tab 1–76
                   Output Format Tab 1–52
                   Scan Options Tab 1–66
              Copy 1–1
              Copy Mode Settings 4–26
                   Basic Copying Presets 4–27
                   Copy Control 4–41



In d ex – 2                                       Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
INDEX

                                      Copy Defaults 4–28
                                      Custom Colors 4–44
                                      Original Size Defaults 4–42
                                      Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–43
                                  Covers 1–59
                                  Create/Check Accounts 4–57
                                  Creating Job Templates 3–4

                                  D

                                  DADF 1–8, 1–82
                                      Component Names and Functions 1–82
                                      Document Specifications 1–83
                                      Documents Not Recommended 1–84
                                      Loading the Documents 1–84
                                  Delete/Reset All Account Data 4–61
                                  Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4–58




                                                                                             I ND EX
                                  Document Glass 1–8
                                  Document Jams 7–8
                                      Left Cover (Top) 7–8
                                      Original Input Area and Document Glass 7–9

                                  E

                                  Electrical Safety vii
                                       Disconnect Device viii
                                  Enabling Auditron 4–59
                                  Entering the System Settings Mode 4–5
                                  Envelopes 5–7
                                  Environmental Notices for Canada xvi
                                  Environmental Notices for the USA xvi
                                  Error History Report 1–90
                                  Exiting the System Settings Mode 4–6

                                  F

                                  Fault Codes 7–21
                                  File Format 3–24
                                  Finisher 5–14
                                       Stapling Options 5–15
                                       Using the Finisher 5–14

                                  G

                                  Getting to Know Your Copier 1–1




Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                                Index–3
INDEX

              H

              How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 3–25
              How to Scan 3–2

              I

              Image Quality Presets 1–51
              Image Quality Tab 1–43
                    Auto Exposure 1–46
                    Color Balance 1–50
                    Color Shift 1–49
                    Image Quality Presets 1–51
                    Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1–47
                    Original Type 1–44
                    Sharpness/Saturation 1–48
              Image Quality/File Format Tab 3–21
                    Auto Exposure 3–23
                    File Format 3–24
                    Lighter/Darker/Contrast 3–22
              Image Rotation 1–72
              In Canada xi
              It’s Illegal in Canada xv
              It’s Illegal in the USA xiii

              J

              Job Assembly Tab 1–76
                  Booklet Creation 1–81
                  Build Job 1–79
                  Stored Jobs 1–77
              Job Status 1–86
                  Changing the Print Priority 1–87
                  Checking Completed Jobs 1–88
                  Checking Current Jobs 1–86
              Job Template 3–5

              L

              Laser Safety viii
              Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1–47, 3–22
              Loading Paper 5–1
                  12 x 18 inch 5–10
                  Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3
                  Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 5–2, 5–8
              Loading Stock 5–4
                  Envelopes 5–7



In d ex – 4                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
INDEX

                                      Paper 5–4
                                      Transparencies 5–6
                                      Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–9

                                  M

                                  Machine Administrator 4–1
                                  Machine Information 1–91
                                  Machine Specifications 5–12
                                      Dimensions and Weight 5–13
                                      Speed by Media 5–12
                                  Machine Status 1–89
                                      Billing Meters and Printing Reports 1–90
                                      Checking Consumables 1–90
                                      Checking Paper Trays 1–89
                                      Error History Report 1–90
                                      Machine Information 1–91




                                                                                           I ND EX
                                  Maintenance 6–1
                                  Maintenance Safety ix
                                  Making Copies from the Document Glass 1–13
                                  Making Copies Using Features 1–14
                                  Making Copies Using the DADF 1–12
                                  Managing Scanned Documents 3–26
                                  Margin Shift 1–38
                                      Auto Center 1–39
                                      Variable Shift 1–40
                                  Mirror Image/Negative Image 1–65
                                  Mixed Size Originals 1–69, 3–13
                                  Multiple Up 1–53

                                  N

                                  Network Settings 4–44
                                  Notices xi
                                      Certifications in Europe xii
                                      Environmental Notices for Canada xvi
                                      Environmental Notices for the USA xvi
                                      It’s Illegal in Canada xv
                                      It’s Illegal in the USA xiii
                                      Radio Frequency Emissions xi

                                  O

                                  Operational Safety ix
                                  Ordering Consumables 6–2
                                  Original Orientation 1–73
                                  Original Size 1–67



Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                              Index–5
INDEX

              Original Type 1–44
              Output 1–35
                   Stapling 1–37
              Output Color 1–19, 3–6
              Output Format Tab 1–52
                   Covers 1–59
                   Mirror Image/Negative Image 1–65
                   Multiple Up 1–53
                   Poster 1–63
                   Repeat Image 1–61
                   Transparency Separators 1–56
              Output Trays 1–10
              Ozone Safety x

              P

              Paper Jam Clearance 7–2
                   Bottom Left Cover 7–4
                   Center Tray Exit 7–7
                   Duplex Unit 7–6
                   Finisher Interface 7–7
                   Finisher Top Cover 7–6
                   Left Center Cover 7–4
                   Top Left Cover 7–3
                   Tray 5 (Bypass) 7–5
                   Trays 1 to 4 7–5
              Paper Supply 1–28
                   Tray 5 (Bypass) 1–29
              Paper Trays 1–9
                   3-Tray Module 1–9
                   Tandem Tray Module 1–9
                   Tray 5 (Bypass) 1–10
              Poster 1–63
              Power Saver Mode 1–11
              Power Switch 1–8
              Print 2–1
              Printing Meter Reports 4–62
              Printing Reports 1–90
              Product Recycling and Disposal xvii

              Q

              Quick Start Guide to Copying 1–12

              R

              Radio Frequency Emissions xi



In d ex – 6                                         Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
INDEX

                                      FCC in the USA xi
                                      In Canada xi
                                  Reduce/Enlarge 1–24, 3–14
                                      Auto% 3–16
                                      Independent X-Y% 1–27
                                      Presets % 1–25, 3–14
                                      Variable% 1–26, 3–15
                                  Repeat Image 1–61
                                  Resolving Hardware Problems 7–11
                                  Resolving Output Quality Problems 7–16
                                  Resolving Processor Problems 7–13
                                  Resolving Programming Problems 7–12

                                  S

                                  Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval xii
                                  Safety Notices vii




                                                                                     I ND EX
                                      Electrical Safety vii
                                      Laser Safety viii
                                      Maintenance Safety ix
                                      Operational Safety ix
                                      Ozone Safety x
                                  Scan 3–1
                                  Scan Mode Settings 4–46
                                      Basic Scanning Presets 4–46
                                      Other Settings 4–54
                                      Output Size Defaults 4–52
                                      Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–53
                                      Scan Defaults 4–47
                                      Scan Size Defaults 4–51
                                  Scan Options Tab 1–66, 3–10
                                      2 Sided Originals 3–11
                                      Book Duplex 1–74
                                      Border Erase 3–19
                                      Bound Originals 1–70, 3–17
                                      Image Rotation 1–72
                                      Mixed Size Originals 1–69, 3–13
                                      Original Orientation 1–73
                                      Original Size 1–67
                                      Reduce/Enlarge 3–14
                                      Scan Size 3–12
                                  Scan Size 3–12
                                  Scanning Features 3–4
                                      Basic Scanning Tab 3–4
                                      Image Quality/File Format Tab 3–21
                                      Scan Options Tab 3–10



Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier                                        Index–7
INDEX

              Scanning in Batches 3–25
              Scanning Resolution 3–7
              Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 4–3
              Sharpness/Saturation 1–48
              Specifications 5–1
              Stapler Faults 7–10
              Stored Jobs 1–77
                   Deleting a Job 1–78
                   Retrieving a Job 1–78
              Symbols xviii
              System Administrator Data 4–60
              System Settings 4–2

              T

              Touch Screen 1–7
              Transparencies 5–6
              Transparency Separators 1–56
                   Blank Separators 1–57
                   Separators + N Sets 1–58
              Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3
                   Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3
                   Loading SRA3 Paper 5–11
              Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 5–2
                   3-Tray Module 5–2
                   Tandem Tray Module 5–2
              Troubleshooting 7–1




In d ex – 8                                          Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
Xerox 3535 User Guide
701P39761
March 2003
Xerox Corporation
Global Knowledge and Language Services
780 Salt Road
Webster, New York 14580

More Related Content

PPT
Ict in education
PDF
Adira Energy August 2011
PDF
Adira Energy September Corporate Presentation
PDF
Adira Presentation July 2011
PDF
October 2011
DOC
மனசு...
PDF
Hip hop abs_-_6_day_slim_down
PDF
Adira Presentation August 2011
Ict in education
Adira Energy August 2011
Adira Energy September Corporate Presentation
Adira Presentation July 2011
October 2011
மனசு...
Hip hop abs_-_6_day_slim_down
Adira Presentation August 2011

Viewers also liked (10)

PDF
Concilio presentazione
PDF
ospitalità coranica induismo
PDF
и.бартоломей - чеченский букварь (чеченскIй букварь) - 1866
PDF
Adira presentation july 2011 final website
PDF
Adira energy october final
PDF
Il mestiere di crescere
PDF
Decalogo uno
PDF
2015 irc presentazione questionario valutazione
ODP
I valori della fede e della ragione
PPTX
Types of capital
Concilio presentazione
ospitalità coranica induismo
и.бартоломей - чеченский букварь (чеченскIй букварь) - 1866
Adira presentation july 2011 final website
Adira energy october final
Il mestiere di crescere
Decalogo uno
2015 irc presentazione questionario valutazione
I valori della fede e della ragione
Types of capital
Ad

Similar to Xerox 3535 User Guide (20)

PDF
Assembly Language For X86 Processors 6th Edition 6th Kip Irvine
PDF
Firsthalf Ocr D
PDF
Finalcute e01
PDF
PDF
Manual completo
PDF
Compressor 2 User Manual
PPTX
Risk Presentation (2)
PDF
Assembly Language for x86 Processors 6th Edition Kip Irvine
PPT
Chapter-05-IO (2).ppt
PDF
Thomas' Road Map
PPT
Computer graphic lecturer no 3
PDF
Introduction to DevOps
PDF
9800301 04 8080-8085_assembly_language_programming_manual_may81
PDF
Intel 8080 8085 assembly language programming 1977 intel
PDF
The Focal Easy Guide To Final Cut Pro 7 1st Edition Rick Young
PDF
Aspire Easystore H340 Service Book
PPT
5 backuprecoveryw imp
PDF
Configuration of cisco switches
ODP
2. operating systems
PDF
Security Challenges of Antivirus Engines, Products and Systems
Assembly Language For X86 Processors 6th Edition 6th Kip Irvine
Firsthalf Ocr D
Finalcute e01
Manual completo
Compressor 2 User Manual
Risk Presentation (2)
Assembly Language for x86 Processors 6th Edition Kip Irvine
Chapter-05-IO (2).ppt
Thomas' Road Map
Computer graphic lecturer no 3
Introduction to DevOps
9800301 04 8080-8085_assembly_language_programming_manual_may81
Intel 8080 8085 assembly language programming 1977 intel
The Focal Easy Guide To Final Cut Pro 7 1st Edition Rick Young
Aspire Easystore H340 Service Book
5 backuprecoveryw imp
Configuration of cisco switches
2. operating systems
Security Challenges of Antivirus Engines, Products and Systems
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPT
What is a Computer? Input Devices /output devices
PDF
WOOl fibre morphology and structure.pdf for textiles
PDF
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
PDF
CloudStack 4.21: First Look Webinar slides
PDF
Five Habits of High-Impact Board Members
PDF
A comparative study of natural language inference in Swahili using monolingua...
PPTX
The various Industrial Revolutions .pptx
PDF
Hybrid model detection and classification of lung cancer
PDF
Enhancing emotion recognition model for a student engagement use case through...
PDF
TrustArc Webinar - Click, Consent, Trust: Winning the Privacy Game
PPTX
Web Crawler for Trend Tracking Gen Z Insights.pptx
PPTX
observCloud-Native Containerability and monitoring.pptx
PDF
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
PPTX
Modernising the Digital Integration Hub
PDF
DASA ADMISSION 2024_FirstRound_FirstRank_LastRank.pdf
PDF
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
PPTX
MicrosoftCybserSecurityReferenceArchitecture-April-2025.pptx
PDF
A novel scalable deep ensemble learning framework for big data classification...
PDF
Hybrid horned lizard optimization algorithm-aquila optimizer for DC motor
PDF
Getting started with AI Agents and Multi-Agent Systems
What is a Computer? Input Devices /output devices
WOOl fibre morphology and structure.pdf for textiles
Zenith AI: Advanced Artificial Intelligence
CloudStack 4.21: First Look Webinar slides
Five Habits of High-Impact Board Members
A comparative study of natural language inference in Swahili using monolingua...
The various Industrial Revolutions .pptx
Hybrid model detection and classification of lung cancer
Enhancing emotion recognition model for a student engagement use case through...
TrustArc Webinar - Click, Consent, Trust: Winning the Privacy Game
Web Crawler for Trend Tracking Gen Z Insights.pptx
observCloud-Native Containerability and monitoring.pptx
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
Modernising the Digital Integration Hub
DASA ADMISSION 2024_FirstRound_FirstRank_LastRank.pdf
Getting Started with Data Integration: FME Form 101
MicrosoftCybserSecurityReferenceArchitecture-April-2025.pptx
A novel scalable deep ensemble learning framework for big data classification...
Hybrid horned lizard optimization algorithm-aquila optimizer for DC motor
Getting started with AI Agents and Multi-Agent Systems

Xerox 3535 User Guide

  • 2. © Copyright 2003 by Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs that are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc. Internet Explorer is a copyright protected program of Microsoft Corporation. Novell® and NetWare® are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. Netscape® is a registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. Adobe® and PostScript® are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. TIFF is a copyright of Adobe Systems Incorporated. AppleTalk, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. PCL® and HP-GL® are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Corporation. WinZip® is a registered trademark of Nico Mak Computing, Incorporated. ACITS LPR Printing for Windows 95 is a copyright of the University of Texas at Austin. Xerox®, The Document Company®, The stylized X, and all Xerox product names and product numbers mentioned in this publication are trademarks of XEROX CORPORATION. Other company brands and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies and are also acknowledged. Printed in the U.S.A.
  • 3. Table of Contents Table of Contents iii Safety Notices vii Electrical Safety vii Disconnect Device viii Laser Safety viii Maintenance Safety ix Operational Safety ix Ozone Safety x Notices xi Radio Frequency Emissions xi FCC xi In Canada xi Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval xii Certifications in Europe xii It’s Illegal in the USA xiii It’s Illegal in Canada xv Environmental Notices for the USA xvi Environmental Notices for Canada xvi Product Recycling and Disposal xvii Conventions xviii Symbols xviii Copy 1–1 Getting to Know Your Copier 1–1 Control Panel 1–4 Power Switch 1–8 Audio Tones 1–8 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 1–8 X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 P r i n te r / C o pi e r iii iii
  • 4. TA B L E OF CONTENTS Document Glass 1–8 Paper Trays 1–9 Output Trays 1–10 Power Saver Mode 1–11 Quick Start Guide to Copying 1–12 Making Copies Using the DADF 1–12 Making Copies from the Document Glass 1–13 Making Copies Using Features 1–14 Copier Features 1–18 Basic Copying Tab 1–18 Added Features Tab 1–31 Image Quality Tab 1–43 Output Format Tab 1–52 Scan Options Tab 1–66 Job Assembly Tab 1–76 Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) 1–82 Component Names and Functions 1–82 Documents Not Recommended 1–84 Loading the Documents 1–84 Job Status 1–86 Checking Current Jobs 1–86 Changing the Print Priority 1–87 Checking Completed Jobs 1–88 Machine Status 1–89 Machine Information 1–91 Print 2–1 Overview 2–1 Scan 3–1 Overview 3–1 How to Scan 3–2 Creating Job Templates 3–4 Scanning Features 3–4 Basic Scanning Tab 3–4 Scan Options Tab 3–10 Image Quality / File Format Tab 3–21 How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 3–25 Scanning in Batches 3–25 Managing Scanned Documents 3–26 Configuring the Client for Scanning 3–26 iv X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 Pr i n te r / C o pi e r
  • 5. TA B L E OF CONTENTS Machine Administrator 4–1 Overview 4–1 System Settings 4–2 Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 4–3 Entering and Exiting the System Settings Mode 4–5 Entering the System Settings Mode 4–5 Exiting System Settings Mode 4–6 Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 4–6 Common Settings 4–7 Machine Clock/Timers 4–8 Audio Tone 4–10 Screen Defaults 4–12 Paper Tray Attributes 4–13 Printing Priority 4–20 Image Quality Adjustment 4–21 Other Machine Settings 4–26 Copy Mode Settings 4–26 Basic Copying Presets 4–27 Copy Defaults 4–28 Copy Control 4–41 Original Size Defaults 4–42 Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–43 Custom Colors 4–44 Network Settings 4–44 Scan Mode Settings 4–46 Basic Scanning Presets 4–46 Scan Defaults 4–47 Scan Size Defaults 4–51 Output Size Defaults 4–52 Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–53 Other Scan Settings 4–54 Auditron Administration 4–56 Create/Check Accounts 4–57 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4–58 Enabling Auditron Mode 4–59 System Administrator Data 4–60 Delete/Reset All Account Data 4–61 Specifications 5–1 Loading Paper 5–1 Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 5–2 X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 P r i n te r / C o pi e r v
  • 6. TA B L E OF CONTENTS Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3 Auto Tray Switching 5–3 Loading Stock 5–4 Machine Specifications 5–12 Speed by Media 5–12 Dimensions and Weight 5–13 Finisher (Optional Accessory) 5–14 Using the Finisher 5–14 Maintenance 6–1 Ordering Consumables 6–2 Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 6–3 Cleaning the ROS Window 6–4 Changing Toner Cartridges 6–7 Changing Staple Cartridges 6–10 Changing the Fuser 6–11 Changing the Waste Toner Container 6–14 Changing Drum Cartridges 6–16 Troubleshooting 7–1 Paper Jam Clearance 7–2 Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover 7–3 Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover 7–4 Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover 7–4 Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 7–5 Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) 7–5 Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit 7–6 Paper Jams in the Finisher 7–6 Document Jams 7–8 Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top) 7–8 Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass 7–9 Stapler Faults 7–10 Resolving Hardware Problems 7–11 Toner Cartridge 7–11 Resolving Programming Problems 7–12 Resolving Processor Problems 7–13 Resolving Output Problems using Basic Copying, Added Features, and Image Quality Tabs 7–16 Calling for Service 7–20 Fault Codes 7–21 vi X er o x D o c uC ol o r 3 5 35 Pr i n te r / C o pi e r
  • 7. Safety Notices The Xerox DocuColor 3535 and the recommended supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. Attention to the following notes will ensure the continued safe operation of your printer/copier. Electrical Safety • Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment. • Plug the power cord directly into a correctly grounded electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord. If you do not know whether or not an outlet is grounded, consult a qualified electrician. • Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect this equipment to an electrical outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal. WARNING: You may get a severe electrical shock if the outlet is not correctly grounded. • Do not place the printer/copier where people may step on or trip on the power cord. Do not place objects on the power cord. • Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks. • Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. These openings are provided to prevent overheating of the machine. WARNING: Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings on this equipment. Making a contact with a voltage point or shorting out a part could result in fire or electrical shock. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier vii vii
  • 8. If any of the following conditions occur, immediately switch off the power to the machine and disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet. Call an authorized Xerox service representative to correct the problem. – The machine emits unusual noises or odors. – The power cord is damaged or frayed. – A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device has been tripped. – Liquid is spilled into the press. – The machine is exposed to water. – Any part of the machine is damaged. Disconnect Device The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment. It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug-in device. To remove all electrical power from the machine, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet. Laser Safety Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified in this documentation may result in a hazardous exposure to laser radiation. This equipment complies with international safety standards. With specific regard to laser safety, the equipment complies with performance standards for laser products set by government, national, and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light, as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance. v i ii Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 9. Maintenance Safety • Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation that is supplied with your press. • Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not approved may cause poor performance of the press, and could create a dangerous condition. • Use the supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this manual. Keep all of these materials out of the reach of children. • Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service. Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have been trained to do them by a Xerox representative, or unless a procedure is specifically described in one of the manuals included with your press. Operational Safety Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards. Your attention to the following safety guidelines will help ensure the continued safe operation of your digital press: • Use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your digital press. The use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance of the machine and possibly a hazardous situation. • Follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the machine. • Place the machine in a room that provides adequate space for ventilation and servicing. • Place the machine on a level, solid surface (not on a thick pile carpet) that has adequate strength to support the weight of the machine. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier ix
  • 10. Do not attempt to move the machine. A leveling device that was lowered when your machine was installed may damage the carpet or floor. • Do not set up the machine near a heat source. • Do not set up the machine in direct sunlight. • Do not set up the machine in line with the cold air flow from an air conditioning system. • Do not place containers of coffee or other liquid on the machine. • Do not block or cover the slots and openings on the machine. Without adequate ventilation, the machine may overheat. • Do not attempt to override any electrical or mechanical interlock devices. WARNING: Be careful when working in areas identified with this warning symbol. These areas may be very hot and could cause personal injury. If you need any additional safety information concerning the machine or materials, contact your Xerox representative. Ozone Safety This product produces ozone during normal operation. The ozone is heavier than air, and the quantity is dependent on print volume. Providing the correct environmental parameters, as specified in the Xerox installation procedures, ensures that concentration levels meet safe limits. If you need additional information about ozone, request the Xerox publication, OZONE, 600P83222, by calling 1-800-828-6571 in the USA. For a French language version, call 1-800-828-6571 in the USA, then press 2. x Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 11. Notices Radio Frequency Emissions FCC The following applies to the product when equipped with the Token Ring or Banyan Vines connectivity options: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense. Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations. In Canada This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as defined in the Radio interference regulations of Industry Canada. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier xi
  • 12. Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval The Xerox DocuColor 3535 is in compliance with various governmental agencies and national safety regulations. All system ports meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits for connection to customer-owned devices and networks. Additions of customer-owned or third-party accessories that are attached to the press must meet or exceed the requirements previously listed. All modules that require external connection must be installed per the installation procedure. Certifications in Europe The CE marking that is applied to this product symbolizes Xerox Europe’s Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated: January 1, 1995: - Council Directive 73/23/EEC amended by Council Directive 93/68/EEC, approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment. January 1, 1996: - Council Directive 89/336/EEC, approximation of the laws of the member states related to electromagnetic compatibility. Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by Xerox Europe may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC. This equipment is not primarily intended for use in a domestic environment. A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Xerox Europe representative. WARNING: In order to allow this equipment to operate in proximity to Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) equipment, the external radiation from ISM equipment may have to be limited or special mitigation measures taken. WARNING: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. xii Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 13. It’s Illegal in the USA Congress, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions. 1. Obligations or Securities of the United States Government, such as: Certificates of Indebtedness National Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Federal Reserve Bank Notes Silver Certificates Gold Certificates United States Bonds Treasury Notes Federal Reserve Notes Fractional Notes Certificates of Deposit Paper Money Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government, such as FHA, etc. Bonds. (U.S. Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds.) Internal Revenue Stamps. (If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp, this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes.) Postage Stamps, canceled or uncanceled. (For philatelic purposes, Postage Stamps may be photographed, provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75% or more than 150% of the linear dimensions of the original.) Postal Money Orders. Bills, Checks, or Drafts of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States. Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever denomination, which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress. 2. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars. 3. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, Bank, or Corporation. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier xiii
  • 14. 4. Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the “fair use” or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law. Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21. 5. Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.) 6. Passports. (Foreign Passports may be photographed.) 7. Immigration Papers. 8. Draft Registration Cards. 9. Selective Service Induction Papers that bear any of the following Registrant’s information: Earnings or Income Dependency Status Court Record Previous military service Physical or mental condition Exception: U. S. Army and Navy discharge certificates may be photographed. 10. Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by military personnel, or by members of the various Federal Departments, such as FBI, Treasury, etc. (unless photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.) Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states: Automobile Licenses - Drivers’ Licenses - Automobile Certificates of Title. The above list is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your attorney. xiv Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 15. It’s Illegal in Canada Parliament, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such copies. 1. Current bank notes or current paper money. 2. Obligations or securities of a government or bank. 3. Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper. 4. The public seal of Canada or of a province, or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada, or of a court of law. 5. Proclamations, orders, regulations or appointments, or notices thereof (with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have been printed by the Queen’s Printer for Canada, or the equivalent printer for a province). 6. Marks, brands, seals, wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province, the government of a state other than Canada or a department, board, Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada. 7. Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada. 8. Documents, registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof, where the reproduction falsely purports to be a certified copy thereof. 9. Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner. The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance, but it is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your solicitor. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier xv
  • 16. Environmental Notices for the USA As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Xerox Corporation has determined that this printer/copier model meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. ENERGY STAR is a registered United States trademark. The ENERGY STAR Program is a team effort between the Environment Protection Agency and the office equipment industry to promote energy-efficient copiers, printers, fax, multifunction machines, personal computers, and monitors. Reducing product energy consumption helps combat smog, acid rain and long-term changes to the climate by decreasing the emissions that result from generating electricity. Environmental Notices for Canada Terra Choice Environmental Services, Inc. of Canada has verified that this Xerox product conforms to all applicable Environmental Choice EcoLogo requirements for minimized impact to the environment. Environment Canada established the Environmental Choice program in 1988 to help consumers identify environmentally responsible products and services. Copier, printer, digital press, and fax products must meet energy efficiency and emissions criteria, and exhibit compatibility with recycled supplies. Currently, Environmental Choice has more than 1600 approved products and 140 licensees. Xerox has been a leader in offering EcoLogo approved products. In 1996, Xerox became the first company licensed to use the Environmental Choice EcoLogo for its copiers, printers, and fax machines. xvi Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 17. Product Recycling and Disposal Xerox operates a worldwide equipment takeback and reuse/ recycle program. Contact your Xerox sales representative (1-800- ASK-XEROX) to determine whether this Xerox product is part of the program. For more information about Xerox environmental programs, visit www.xerox.com/environment.html. If your product is not part of the Xerox program and you are managing its disposal, please note that the product may contain lead, mercury and other materials whose disposal may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For recycling and disposal information, contact your local authorities. In the United States, you may also refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site at www.eiae.org. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier xvii
  • 18. Conventions Standardized conventions have been used in this manual to assist you in visually locating and identifying information quickly. Symbols CAUTION: This symbol alerts you to an action that may cause damage to hardware, software, or result in the loss of data. WARNING: Warnings alert you to an action that may cause bodily injury. The 1 2 3... symbol indicates the beginning of a task or work process you should use to complete a procedure and is followed by the first step of a numbered procedure, task, or work process. 1 2 3 NOTE: This calls your attention to information that is helpful, but not essential to complete a procedure or task. x v i ii Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 19. 1. Copy Getting to Know Your Copier Your new Xerox DocuColor 3535 works as a digital copier. This section will provide an introduction to your new product. For more information about copy features, refer to the section entitled Copier Features in this chapter. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/CopierXerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier Printer/Copier 1–1
  • 20. 2 1 3 4 6 5 10 7 8 9 11 12 13 17 14 15 16 1– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 21. Number Name Function 1 Duplex Automatic Automatically feeds up to 50 documents. Also works as a Document Feeder Document Glass cover when making copies from the document (DADF) glass. 2 Original Input Area Location where originals are fed onto platen glass for copying. 3 Original Catch Tray Original return area. 4 Control Panel Used to program the copier for individual jobs. 5 Center Output Tray Output delivered here face down. 6 Power Switch Powers machine On/Off. 7 Front Door Panel Access for consumables replacement. 8 Trays 1 & 2 Adjustable paper trays: 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5 through A3) holding up to 520 sheets based on paper weight. 9 Trays 3 & 4 (Tandem Tray High capacity paper trays holding a total of 2080 sheets of 8.5 x Module) 11 in. (A4 and B5) based on paper weight. 10 Tray 5 (Bypass) For specialty papers which cannot be loaded in Trays 1 - 4. 11 Casters Lockable casters for mobility and safety. 12 Left Upper Cover Push the release lever up to access the paper path. 13 Duplex Cover Open this cover to access paper path. 14 Left Side Middle Cover Access to paper path. 15 Left Side Lower Cover Access to paper path. 16 Trays 3 & 4 (3-Tray Paper trays holding 520 sheets each of 8.5 x 11 in. (A4 and B5) Module) based on paper weight. 17 Finisher (Optional Finisher (Optional Accessory) that accomodates up to 1000 Accessory) sheets of output and offers stapling options. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 –3
  • 22. Control Panel Contrast Dial Touch Screen Numeric Keypad The Control Panel is used to program individual jobs. • The Numeric Keypad is used to enter copy quantity or other numeric information. • The Contrast Dial adjusts the brightness of the touch screen. • The Touch Screen is where you make selections for the jobs you are programming. Language Use this feature to change the language on the Touch Screen. The language set will remain until the machine is powered off/on. Access Use this feature to change machine default settings, and to create or modify user access numbers. Power Saver Lights up green and is initiated automatically if the machine is left idle for a specific amount of time. Press the Power Saver button to bring the machine back to full power after the warm-up period. 1– 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 23. Interrupt Stops the printer/copier during the current job. This allows another job to be run. There are two indications that the job has been interrupted: • The printer/copier displays a message indicating that Job Interrupt has been selected, and it is ready to copy. • The indicator light flashes to acknowledge that the Interrupt button has been selected. The light will continue to flash until the printer/copier has completed the activity in process. The light will remain constant to identify interrupt has occurred and a new job can be programmed. After Interrupted jobs are complete, press the Interrupt button again to return the machine to the first job. Clear All Returns the machine to the original Default State. When the Clear All button is selected in Interrupt mode, default settings are applied only to the interrupting job. Stop Pressing Stop will halt the copy job in process at the completion of the current activity. A message asking if you want to press Start to continue the job or Clear All to cancel the job is displayed on the Touch Screen. Start Initiates a job or continues the copying process. Clear Clears an incorrect numeric entry. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 –5
  • 24. Job Memory Indicator lights when data is stored in the machine's memory. Online Indicator lights when data is being received from a client. Features Allows you to alternate between scanning and copying feature screens. Job Status Allows you to check or cancel jobs currently executing, or to check or print saved documents. Machine Status Allows you to check the machine status, meters, the state of consumables, and output reports. 1– 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 25. Touch Screen Unused Tab Memory Message Area Quantity Selection Buttons Press the buttons and tabs displayed in the Touch Screen to select features or respond to on screen instructions. The selected buttons are highlighted to indicate activation. Buttons that do not have three-dimensional shadows are not active, and cannot be selected. Message Area Messages such as machine status and operation instructions are displayed here Unused Memory The amount of memory remaining to store a scanned original is displayed prior to output. Quantity The copy quantity is entered using the keypad, and appears in the upper right corner of the message area. Select between 1 - 999. Tab Feature Tabs displayed on the Touch Screen contain the programmable selections available for each feature. Selection Buttons Allow for the selection of feature / functions required for the desired output. Buttons identified, as More… have additional features, which will be displayed when this button is selected. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 –7
  • 26. Power Switch The power switch is located on the right top corner of the machine. Press the switch to the ( | ) position to turn the power on. Ground Fault Protector Located at the rear of the machine where the power cord attaches. The Ground Fault Protector removes all power from the machine if a fault is detected in the power to the printer/copier. To reset the GFI, press the switch in. Audio Tones Tone volume may be adjusted or turned off in System Settings mode. Three types of Audio Tones are available to assist the operator in selecting features and functions. Single Tone Acknowledges when a feature is selected, or a job has been completed. Double Tone Acknowledges an alert, such as a paper jam or consumable replacement. Triple Tone Acknowledges an improper selection or an error in button selection has occurred. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) Automatically feeds up to 50 documents onto the glass for copying. Documents must be placed face up into the Document Handler. Document Glass When using the Document Glass the original document must be placed face down and in the upper left-hand corner of the Document Glass. NOTE: The DADF must be closed for the Auto Color option to function 1– 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 27. Paper Trays Trays 1,2,3 and 4 are located at the lower front of the printer/ copier. Tray 5 (Bypass) is located on the left side of the printer/ copier. There are two possible tray configurations on the DocuColor 3535. Option 1 is a 3-Tray module. Option 2 is a Tandem Tray module. 3-Tray Module Trays 1 - 4 The 3-Tray Module consists of Trays 1 - 4. Trays 1 - 4 are all adjustable from 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5 through A3), and can each accommodate up to 520 sheets based on paper weight. Tandem Tray Module The Tandem Tray Module consists of 4 paper trays. With the Tandem Tray Module: Trays 1 and 2 Adjustable from 5.5x8.5 in. through 11x17 in. (A5 through A3), and can each accommodate up to 520 sheets based on paper weight. Trays 3 and 4 High capacity paper trays accommodating a total of 2080 sheets, (8.5x11 in., A4, and B5) based on paper weight. All Tray Modules Trays 1 - 4 can feed Transparencies and paper weights 18 lb. to 110 lb. (64 to 220 gsm). The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper. The paper type must be set in System Setting mode. Trays 1 - 4 can accommodate approximately 300 striped transparencies and approximately 450 stripeless transparencies. Both striped and stripeless transparencies can be used, but stripeless transparencies are recommended. It is not recommended that you output more than 20 transparencies at a time. If your job is larger than 20 pages, use the Transparency Separators feature. NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). Transparencies cannot be used for 2 Sided output. NOTE: When making copies you can select Transparencies from Tray 5 (Bypass). If you want to select Transparencies from Trays 1-4, your System Administrator must change the Paper Type setting in System Settings mode. To select Transparencies for print jobs, you can select the correct paper type in the printer driver at the client. For more information on selecting paper type, refer to the Machine Administrator chapter. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 –9
  • 28. Tray 5 (Bypass) Feeds specialty papers, non-standard sizes, and 12x18 in., and can accommodate up to 95 sheets based on paper weight. Approximately 20 transparencies should be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass) at a time. Output Trays The Center Output Tray delivers output face down, and holds up to 400 sheets. The Center Output Tray holds up to 200 sheets when the Finisher (optional accessory) is installed. The Finisher Tray (optional accessory) holds up to 1000 sheets, and can staple dual and single staples. NOTE: The DocuColor printer/copier should not be moved after it has been installed. Moving may damage the equipment, carpet or floor. If equipment must be moved, please contact your Xerox representative for assistance. 1– 1 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 29. Power Saver Mode Power Saver Mode automatically cuts off the electricity to the machine if it is left unused for a certain duration. The Power Saver feature has two modes, a Low Power mode and Sleep mode. The machine enters the Low Power mode after the preset time has elapsed if the machine is left unused for a fixed period of time. The machine then enters the Sleep mode if a further preset time elapses. • Low Power mode In this mode, the power to the control panel and fuser unit is lowered to save power. The display goes out, and the Power Saver button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the Power Saver button. Power Saver goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled. The default is 15 minutes. • Sleep mode In this mode, the power is lowered more than in the Low Power mode. The display goes out, and the Power Saver button on the control panel lights. To use the machine, press the Power Saver button. Power Saver goes out to indicate that the Power Saver feature is canceled. The Sleep mode default is 45 minutes after Low Power mode is engaged. For more information on setting Power Saver mode timers, refer to the Machine Administrator chapter in this guide. Exiting the Power Saver Mode The Power Saver mode can be exited in two ways: • By pressing the Power Saver button • By receiving a print job Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1– 11
  • 30. Quick Start Guide to Copying This section will lead you quickly through a number of features and steps used in making copies. For more information about copy features, refer to the section entitled Copier Features, in this chapter. Making Copies Using the DADF 1 Place original in the Original Input Area face up. A stack of up to 50 originals may be place in the tray. 2 Slide the documents forward until the green indicator lights, indicating the document is inserted correctly. 3 Adjust the side guide to the size of the paper. The guide should just touch the side of the document. 4 Press the Start button. 5 Remove the copies from the output tray. Remove the originals from the Original Catch Tray of the DADF. 1– 1 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 31. Making Copies from the Document Glass 1 Open the Document Cover. 2 Place the original face down on the Document Glass, aligning the left rear corner with the registration guide. 3 Close the cover before making a copy. 4 Press the Start button. 5 Remove the copies from the output tray. Remove the original document from the Document Glass. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 13
  • 32. Making Copies Using Features The feature tabs on the Touch Screen enable you to configure the printer/copier to suit your copying needs. The procedure below leads you quickly through a number of features you may want to use in making copies. It assumes that the feature tabs are in the default configuration. For more information about copy features, refer to the section entitled Copier Features, in this chapter. 1 Press Clear All to clear any previous programming Use any of the following steps that apply to your job and desired outcome. 2 Use the Numeric Keypad to enter the desired quantity. If you make a mistake, press the Clear button on the numeric keypad to clear an incorrect quantity 3 Select the option in Output Color if a setting other than the default, Auto Color, is desired. Perform one of the following: • Press the desired Output Color option on the Basic Copying tab. • Press More… to see additional options Press the desired option and press the Save button to return to the Basic Copying screen. 1– 1 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 33. 4 Select an option under 2 Sided if a setting other than the default, 1 to 1 Sided, is desired. If another option is desired, perform one of the following: • 1 to 1 Sided for default one-sided copies. • 1 to 2 Sided for two-sided copies from one-sided input. • Press Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for books. • Press Head to Toe for two-sided, head to toe output, as for calendars. • 2 to 2 Sided for two-sided copies from two-sided input. You must specify the original orientation and the copy orientation. • Press Head to Head for two-sided head-to-head output, as for books. • Press Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for calendars. • 2 to 1 Sided for one-sided copies from two-sided originals. • Press Head to Head if your original documents are two- sided, head-to-head. • Press Head to Toe if your original documents are two- sided head-to-toe. Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the loaded document(s). Press Save. 5 Select an option in Reduce/Enlarge if a setting other than the default, 100%, is desired. If another option is desired, perform one of the following: • Press the desired Reduce/Enlarge option on the Basic Copying screen. • Press More… to see additional options. Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to the Basic Copying screen. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 15
  • 34. 6 Select an option in Paper Supply if a tray other than the default, Auto Paper, is desired. If another option is desired, perform one of the following: • Press the desired Paper Supply option on the Basic Copying screen. • Press More… to see additional options. Press the desired option and touch the Save button to return to the Basic Copying screen. 7 On the Added Features tab, select Output to program the desired copy output option. • Press Collated for collated output. Collated will automatically be selected when the DADF is used. • Press Collated / Stapled to direct output to the Finisher (optional Accessory). Press Finisher Tray to set the Output Destination. Press Stapling on the Output screen to select the Original Orientation and Staple Position on the output. Select the desired option and press the Save button to return to the Basic Copying screen. 8 On the Image Quality tab, select Original Type to display the Original Type screen. • Press an option for Original Type if a setting other than the default is desired. Press the Save button to return to the Image Quality screen. 1– 1 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 35. 9 If other features are desired, select the appropriate feature tab and feature button on the Touch Screen. 10 Perform one of the following: • If you use the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder, place the document face up into the Original Input Area. The Document Feeder Lamp lights when the document is in the correct position. Ensure that the paper guide is against the original document. • Raise the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) and place the document face down on the Document Glass. • Ensure that the document lies against the registration area at the left rear corner of the glass. • Lower the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). 11 Press the Start button. 12 When copying is completed, perform the following: • Remove the copies from the Center Output Tray or Finisher Tray on the right side of the printer/copier. • Remove the original document(s) from the Document Glass or Original Catch Tray. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 17
  • 36. Copier Features Basic Copying Tab Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Basic Copying tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. Output Color Allows you to select the colors to be used for copying. 2 Sided Allows you to select one or two-sided originals, with options for one or two-sided output. Reduce/Enlarge Allows you to select the size of the output image from automatic reduction/enlargement, preset values, or variable independent ratios for the image length and width. Paper Supply Allows you to select the tray that contains the correct output paper size and type. 1– 1 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 37. Output Color The Output Color feature allows you to select the desired output color. The following options are available: Auto The Auto Color option enables the copier to determine if the document is black and white or color. If the document is black and white, the Black option is selected automatically. If the document is colored, the Full Color option is selected. The DADF must be closed for the Auto Color option to function. In order for the scanner to accurately sense color on a document, the color area must be greater than 50 mm2 (approximately 2 inches2). If the color area is less, select the Full Color option. Also some very dark colors may be sensed as black. In this case, select the Full Color option as well. NOTE: With Auto selected, the printer/copier runs at the speed for color copying, even if the originals are B/W. NOTE: The sensitivity of Auto for detecting color vs. B/W can be adjusted in System Settings mode under Output Color Recognition. Full Color Enables the copier to make copies using all four toner colors: Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black. Black The Black option should be selected when the desired output is a black and white copy. Black and white copies can be made from any original. With Black selected only Black toner is used. Dual Color The Dual Color option enables the copier to make copies in two preset colors. The color of colored areas and black areas of the document can be specified. Single Color The color setting Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan can be selected. NOTE: Custom colors can be programmed in System Settings mode under Setting Custom Colors. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 19
  • 38. You can select several Output Color options from the Basic Copying tab or select the More… button to get a complete set of options. 1 On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Output Color to display the Output Color screen. 2 Select the desired option: • Auto • Full Color • Black • Dual Color • Single Color 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE: Dual Color cannot be used with Negative Image. NOTE: When Single Color or Dual Color is selected, Original Type cannot be selected. 1– 2 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 39. 2 Sided Use the 2-Sided feature to select one or two-sided originals, with options for one or two-sided output. The following options are available: 1 to 1 Sided Makes one-sided copies from one-sided input. This is the default setting. 1 to 2 Sided Makes two-sided copies from one-sided input. 2 to 2 Sided Makes two-sided copies from two-sided input. 2 to 1 Sided Makes one-sided copies from two-sided input. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 21
  • 40. You can select several 2 Sided options from the Basic Copying tab or use the Added Features tab. 1 On the Basic Copying tab select More… under 2 Sided. 2 Select the desired option: • 1 to 1 Sided • 1 to 2 Sided • Select Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for books. • Select Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for calendars. 1– 2 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 41. 2 to 2 Sided Select the option for your Originals • Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-to- head. • Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-to-toe. Select the option for your Copies • Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for books. • Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for calendars. • 2 to 1 Sided • Select Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head- to-head. • Select Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head- to-toe. 3 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the loaded document(s). 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:1 to 2 Sided or 2 to 2 Sided cannot be selected when using Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass), Repeat Image, Book Duplex, Transparency Separators, Poster, or Booklet Creation. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 23
  • 42. Reduce/Enlarge The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at different magnifications. Copies may be reduced to 25% or enlarged to 400%, in 1% increments. The following options are available: 100% Copies are the same size as the original. This is the default setting. Auto% This option automatically reduces or enlarges the copy, based on the size and orientation of the document and the paper supply selected. This option is applied only to standard size documents. The copy image will be reduced or enlarged in the same proportions for X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions. Auto Paper selection is not available when Auto% is selected. Presets% There are 7 preset percentages to choose from. The selected percentage displays in the value box on the Reduce/Enlarge screen. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode. 1– 2 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 43. Variable% Select the Variable% option to enter the desired percentage for Reduce/Enlarge. Use either the up and down arrows or the number buttons that display on the Touch Screen. Independent X-Y% Select the Independent X-Y% option to copy the image at different, independent magnifications from 25% to 400% for the X and Y directions. For example, you can enlarge the image to 129% in the X direction and reduce it to 64% in the Y direction by using the Touch Screen arrows. Independent X-Y% Auto The Auto option automatically calculates the reduction and enlargement based on the original document size and on the output paper size when using Independent X-Y%. The copy image will be reduced or enlarged in the different proportions for X and Y directions. You can select several Reduce/Enlarge options from the Basic Copying tab or select the More… button to get a complete set of options. Using Presets% 1 On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Reduce/Enlarge. 2 On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Presets% option. 3 Select 100%, Auto%, or the desired preset percentage. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 25
  • 44. Using Variable% 1 Under Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying tab select More… 2 On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Variable% option. 3 Perform one of the following: • Press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the percentage value in increments of 1. • Use the Numeric Keypad on the Touch Screen to enter a specific percentage from 25 through 400. Press the Clear (C) button to clear the value entered. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 2 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 45. Using Independent X-Y% 1 Under Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying tab select More… 2 On the Reduce/Enlarge screen, select the Independent X-Y% option. 3 Perform one of the following: • Press the up arrow to increase the percentage value for X, X&Y, or Y in increments of 1. • Press the down arrow to decrease the percentage value for X, X&Y or Y in decrements of 1. • Press Auto. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 27
  • 46. Paper Supply The Paper Supply option enables you to select output paper size and type. The Basic Copying tab displays the Auto Paper selection feature. This option enables the copier to automatically detect the original document size and select the same standard size paper from Trays 1, 2, 3, or 4. The Basic Copying tab also displays the contents of three other trays enabling you to specify your selection for output size. The Paper Supply More… button enables you to access the Paper Supply screen. The paper size displayed for Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 is set when you adjust the paper guides as part of the process of loading paper. The paper type for the trays can be set in System Settings mode. You may select both the paper size and paper type on the detail screen when loading paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). 1 On the Basic Copying tab under Paper Supply, select one of the following: • Select Auto to enable the copier to automatically select the appropriate paper. • Select More… to display the Paper Supply screen. 2 If More... is selected, select the tray that displays the desired paper. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 2 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 47. Programming Paper Supply for Tray 5 (Bypass) You must select the paper size and paper type when loading paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Auto Size Detect can be used with standard size paper. 1 On the Basic Copying tab select More… under Paper Supply. 2 Select Tray 5 (Bypass) to display the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen. 3 Perform one of the following to select Paper Size: • Select Auto Size Detect. • Select Standard Size. • Select the paper size from the list. Use the up and down arrows to see more selections. • Select Non-standard Size and enter in the X (width) and Y (length) dimensions by using the arrows. • Press the left or right arrows to decrease or increase the X dimension (140-483mm or 5.5-19.0 inches). • Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Y dimension (100-305mm or 3.9-12.0 inches). Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 29
  • 48. 4 Select the appropriate Paper Type using the up and down arrow buttons. You can select Plain, Bond, Recycled, Transparency, and Lightweight - Extra Heavyweight paper. 5 Select Save to return to the Paper Supply screen. 6 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Paper Tray 5 cannot be used with the following features: Auto Size Detect with 1 to 2-Sided and 2 to 2-Sided, Auto Reduction/Enlargement, Auto Center, Corner Shift, Negative Image, Mirror Image, Book Duplex, Booklet Creation, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Bound Originals and Poster. 1– 3 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 49. Added Features Tab Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Added Features tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. 2 Sided Allows you to select one or two-sided originals, with options for one or two-sided output. Output Enables you to select the desired output order and destination of the output. Margin Shift Enables you to center a document image, shift the image to one edge or move the image to a specified edge of the output copy. Border Erase Allows you to erase any undesired images around the border or center of a document. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 31
  • 50. 2 Sided Use the 2 Sided feature to select one or two-sided originals, with options for one or two-sided output. The following options are available: 1 to 1 Sided Makes one-sided copies from one-sided input. This is the default setting. 1 to 2 Sided Makes two-sided copies from one-sided input. 2 to 2 Sided Makes two-sided copies from two-sided input. 2 to 1 Sided Makes one-sided copies from two-sided input. 1– 3 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 51. You can select several 2 Sided options from the Basic Copying tab or the Added Features tab. 1 On the Added Features tab select 2 Sided. 2 Select the desired option: • 1 to 1 Sided • 1 to 2 Sided • Select Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for books. • Select Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for calendars. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 33
  • 52. 2 to 2 Sided Select the option for your Originals • Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head-to- head. • Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head-to-toe. Select the option for your Copies • Head to Head for two-sided, head-to-head output, as for books. • Head to Toe for two-sided, head-to-toe output, as for calendars. • 2 to 1 Sided • Select Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head- to-head. • Select Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head- to-toe. 3 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the loaded document(s). 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:1 to 2-Sided or 2 to 2-Sided cannot be selected when using Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass), Repeat Image, Transparency Separators, Poster, or Booklet Creation. 1– 3 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 53. Output The Output feature enables you to select the destination of the output and determine whether it will be collated or uncollated. The following options are available: Auto The copier automatically determines which output mode (collated or uncollated) for the job and delivers the copies to the output tray. Collated Collated sets are delivered to the output tray. Uncollated Uncollated sets are delivered to the output tray. Collated refers to copies that are delivered as sets. Each copy set is in the order in which the originals were place in the DADF. For example, if the originals are placed in the DADF in 1, 2, 3 order and you want to make 3 copies, the copy sets will output in 1, 2, 3 order. Uncollated refers to copies that are delivered in the order in which they were copied. For example, if the originals are placed in the DADF in 1, 2, 3 order and you want to make 3 copies, the copy sets will output in 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3 order. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 35
  • 54. 1 On the Added Features tab select Output. 2 Select the desired option: • Auto • Collated • Uncollated 3 If you have a Finisher (optional accessory), select the desired Output Destination: • Center Output Tray • Finisher Tray 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 3 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 55. Stapling This section describes the procedure for programming the Output feature to staple output. You must have a Finisher (optional accessory) to staple output. 1 On the Added Features tab select Output/Stapling. 2 Select Collated/Stapling. 3 Select Stapling. The Stapling screen is displayed. 4 Select the desired stapling position. The Finisher Tray is automatically selected as the Output Destination. 5 Select the desired Original Orientation: • Head to Top • Head to Left Select Save. 6 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 37
  • 56. Margin Shift The Margin Shift feature allows you to shift the position of the image on the copy. The image can be centered on the copy or moved to the top, bottom, left or right. When copying both sides, different settings can be set for Side 1 and Side 2. The following types of Margin Shift are available: No Shift Copies are made without shifting the original. This is the default setting. Auto Center Select this to center an image on the copy when the original and copy paper are a different size. It may also be used to center a reduced or enlarged image on the output paper. Corner Shift Select this to move your image to a specified corner. Variable Shift Select this to move your image up, down, left or right by entering in a value. The range is from 0 to 50mm (0.0-2.0 inches) in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments. 1– 3 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 57. Using the Auto Center Feature 1 On the Added Features tab select Margin Shift. 2 Select Auto Center. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 39
  • 58. Using the Margin Shift/Variable Shift Feature 1 On the Added Features tab select Margin Shift. 2 Select Margin Shift/Variable Shift. 3 Select the desired option: • Side 1 • Side 2 4 Select the desired shift option: • No Shift • Auto Center • Corner Shift • Press the arrow icon that illustrates the desired location of the image on the output copy. • Variable Shift • Press the left arrow to shift the image toward the left edge. Press the right arrow to shift the image toward the right edge. • Press the up arrow to shift the image toward the top edge. Press the down arrow to shift the image toward the bottom edge. 5 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the original. 6 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 4 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 59. Border Erase The Border Erase feature enables you to eliminate unwanted marks near the edges of the original from the output copy. The range for Border Erase is 0 through 50mm (0.0 through 2.0 inches) in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments. Border Erase options can be used individually or combined together: Top & Bottom For Normal the default is 2mm (0.1 inch). For Variable Erase the default is 5mm (0.2 inch). Left & Right For Normal the default is 2mm (0.1 inch). For Variable Erase the default is 5mm (0.2 inch). Center The default is 0mm (0 inches). The selected settings are applied to both sides of 2-sided copies. When the image is reduced or enlarged, the selected percentage will be applied to the Border Erase. When making copies the copier adds a margin of 2mm (0.1 inch) to all sides. This cannot be eliminated. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 41
  • 60. 1 On the Added Features tab select Border Erase. 2 Select Variable Erase. 3 Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Border Erase amount(s) for Top & Bottom, Left & Right, and Center. 4 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the loaded document(s). 5 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 4 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 61. Image Quality Tab Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Image Quality tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. Original Type Enables you to select the type of original document you wish to copy to ensure optimum copy quality. Auto Exposure Prevents the background color of an original from appearing on the output copies. Lighter/Darker/Contrast Allows you to adjust the lightness, darkness and contrast of the output copy. Sharpness/Color Allows you to adjust the amount of edge definition and the overall Saturation richness of the color of the output copy. Color Shift Allows you to shift all of the copy colors toward the adjacent hue. Color Balance Enables you to set the balance of Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black by varying degrees of density for each color. Image Quality Presets Automatically adjusts the image quality settings to produce output with various predetermined effects. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 43
  • 62. Original Type The Original Type feature enables you to define the kind of original document you wish to copy. The copier automatically makes adjustments to optimize the copy based on the original type. The following types are available: Text & Photo Use for original documents that contain pictures and printed text, as you often see in magazines or professional journals. NOTE:This is the default setting. Originals do not have to contain photographs and text. Simply use this setting to apply the best sharpness and density levels automatically for optimum color quality on all your color copies. Text Use for text documents composed of fine line characters or other high contrast documents with bright, dense colors. Selecting this option suppresses background color. Photo Use for photographs or lithographs. Other Color Originals Use for original documents containing colored background such as maps, originals marked by highlighter pens, and documents printed on inkjet printers. 1– 4 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 63. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Original Type. 2 Select the type of Original: • Text & Photo Select the Photo Type that best describes the photo in the original document • Halftone: Use this option when copying from newspapers or magazines • Photograph: Use this option when copying photos • Color Copies: Use this option when copying Xerographic reproductions • Text • Photo Select the Photo Type that best describes the photo in the original document • Halftone: Use this option when copying from newspapers or magazines • Photograph: Use this option when copying photos • Color Copies: Use this option when copying Xerographic reproductions • Other Color Originals Select the option that best describes the original document • Map: Use this option when copying from originals with colored backgrounds such as maps • Highlighted Originals: Use this option when copying from originals marked with highlighter pen • Inkjet Originals: Use this option when copying from originals made on Inkjet printers 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 45
  • 64. Auto Exposure This feature prevents the background color of an original from appearing on the output copy. A newspaper or colored paper are examples of this type of original. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Auto Exposure. 2 Select On. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 4 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 65. Lighter/Darker/Contrast The Lighter/Darker feature enables you to adjust the overall lightness or darkness of the output copy. Contrast allows you to adjust the clearness of the image. If you increase the Contrast, the copy appears sharp & vivid and is composed of mainly high and low density elements. If you decrease the Contrast, the copy is softer and renders more uniformly using mid-tones. There are seven levels of adjustment for Lighter/Darker and five levels of adjustment for Contrast. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Lighter/Darker/Contrast. 2 Press the up and down arrows to Lighten or Darken the original. 3 Press the up and down arrows to adjust the Contrast the original. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 47
  • 66. Sharpness/Saturation The Sharpness feature allows you to adjust the amount of edge definition on the copies. The Color Saturation feature allows you to adjust the overall richness of color on the copy. There are five levels of adjustment for each feature. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Sharpness/Saturation. 2 Press the up and down arrows to increase or decrease the Sharpness of the original. 3 Press the up and down arrows to adjust the Color Saturation of the original. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Color Saturation cannot be adjusted when the Black is selected for Output Color. 1– 4 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 67. Color Shift The Color Shift feature allows you to shift all of the copy colors toward the adjacent hue. If you select one of the Warm buttons, the red colors shift toward the yellow hue, the green colors shift toward the cyan hue, and the blue colors shift toward the magenta hue. All colors between these original colors also shift in the same direction. If you select one of the Cool buttons, the red colors shift toward the magenta hue, the blue colors shift toward the cyan hue, and the green colors shift toward the yellow hue. Again, all colors between these original colors also shift in the same direction. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Color Shift. 2 Press the button for the desired Color Shift ranging from Coolest to Warmest. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Color Shift cannot be adjusted when Black is selected for Output Color. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 49
  • 68. Color Balance The Color Balance feature allows you to adjust the balance between colors and the overall amount of color on the output copies. You can adjust the levels of all four process colors (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black) for their low, medium and high density ranges. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Color Balance. 2 Select the button for the color you want to adjust. 3 Select the desired density (Low, Medium, High) and perform one of the following: • Press the up arrow to increase the amount of color to be added. • Press the down arrow to decrease the amount of color to be added. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 5 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 69. Image Quality Presets The Image Quality Presets feature automatically changes Image Quality settings to produce various predetermined effects. The following options are available: Normal Makes no changes to the image quality and produces copies with the same quality and density of the original. This is the default setting. Lively Uses the highest color saturation to produce rich, vivid output colors. Bright Produces a sharp, clear image on the copy. Warm Produces a soft image on the copy by transforming low density colors into light and reddish colors. Use this setting to apply a light pink tone to skin colors and to give a soft tone to dark, warm colors. Cool Produces a strong, clear blue tone on the copy. This setting can be used to make the blue color of water stronger and to make dark, cold colors clearer. Background Suppression Prevents undesired marks or images that are printed on the back of an original from appearing on the output copies. Auto Contrast Adjusts brightness and saturation to produce clearer looking images. 1 On the Image Quality tab select Image Quality Presets. 2 Press the button for the desired option. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 51
  • 70. Output Format Tab Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Output Format tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. Multiple Up Allows you to copy 2 or 4 images from multiple originals onto a single page. Transparency Separators Allows you to insert blank paper separators between transparencies. Also copy sets can be made in conjunction with the transparencies. Covers Allows you to add covers to your copied sets using paper drawn from a different tray than your copies. Repeat Image Allows you to copy a single image multiple times onto one page. Poster Allows you to create a poster size reproduction of the original document by creating multiple images that can be trimmed and joined together after. Mirror Image/Negative Enables you to create negative, mirror or negative mirror images Image on your output copy. 1– 5 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 71. Multiple Up The Multiple Up feature enables you to copy 2 or 4 images from multiple originals onto a single page. NOTE:When using this feature place the originals in the DADF. NOTE:Depending on the size of the original, some image loss might occur along the edge of the image. The following options are available: 1 Up Copies one image on each output copy. 2 Up Copies two images on each output copy. 4 Up Copies four images on each output copy. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 53
  • 72. 1 On the Output Format tab select Multiple Up. 2 Select the desired option: • 1 Up • 2 Up Select the desired Image Order: • Left to Right • Right to Left • Top to Bottom 1– 5 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 73. 4 Up Select the desired Image Order: • Horizontally from the upper left corner • Horizontally from the upper right corner • Vertically from the upper left corner • Vertically from the upper right corner 3 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the loaded documents. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Multiple Up cannot be used with the following features: Auto Paper Tray Selection, Bound Originals, Book Duplex, Poster, Repeat Image, Booklet Creation, and Mixed Size Originals. NOTE:When Border Erase or Margin Shift is used with Multiple Up, the erase or shift amount is reflected on each original document. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 55
  • 74. Transparency Separators When the Transparency Separators feature is used, the copier automatically inserts a blank sheet of paper between the transparency copies. In addition to the transparency set, you may also select copy sets. The following options are available: Off Copies are made without transparency separators. Blank Separators A blank sheet of paper is inserted between every transparency. Only one set can be made. Separators + N Sets A blank sheet of paper is inserted between every transparency. In addition the quantity selected determines how many copy sets (N sets) will also be made as part of the job. No Separators + N Sets A transparency set is made without blank separators. In addition the quantity selected determines how many copy sets (N sets) will also be made as part of the job. NOTE:When using this feature, load transparencies into a Paper Tray. Make sure that there is paper of the same size and orientation in another tray for the separators and/or copy sets. NOTE:Separators are blank sheets of paper and are not added to the Meter count. 1– 5 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 75. Selecting Blank Separators 1 On the Output Format tab select Transparency Separators. 2 Select Blank Separators. 3 Select Paper Tray Settings. 4 Select the size/orientation of the transparencies loaded in the Paper Tray. 5 Select the paper tray to use for the Blank Separators. 6 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 57
  • 76. Selecting Separators + N Sets 1 On the Output Format tab select Transparency Separators. 2 Select Separators + N Sets. 3 Select Paper Tray Settings. 4 Select the size/orientation of the transparencies loaded in the Paper Tray. 5 Select the paper tray to use for the Separators and N sets. 6 Select Save. 7 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Transparency Separators cannot be used with the following features: Uncollated, Reduce/Enlarge, Covers, Booklet Creation, Book Duplex, and 2-Sided output. 1– 5 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 77. Covers This feature allows you to add covers to your copied sets, using paper drawn from a different tray than your copies. You can have blank or printed covers. The following options are available: No Covers No Covers are added to the copy set. This is the default setting. Front Covers A Front Cover is added to the copy set with or without an image. Front & Back Covers A Front & Back Cover is added to the copy set with or without an image. To copy an image on only one side of the cover when making 2- Sided copies, insert a blank sheet in the original set of documents in the appropriate position before making copies. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 59
  • 78. 1 On the Output Format tab select Covers. 2 Select the desired option: • No Covers • Front Covers • Front & Back Covers 3 If you selected Front Covers or Front & Back Covers, select the desired Printed Covers option. 4 Select Paper Tray Settings. 5 Select the correct paper tray for the Body Pages and Covers. 6 Select Save. 7 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Covers cannot be used with the following features: Uncollated, Repeat Image, Poster, Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, and Auto Paper selection. 1– 6 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 79. Repeat Image The Repeat Image feature enables you to copy a single image multiple times onto one page. The following options are available: Off This is the default setting, which produces only one image per output page. Auto Repeat This option enables the copier to automatically determine the number of output images that will fit on a single page. Variable Repeat With this option you can specify the number of images that will print on a single sheet by selecting the number of rows and columns. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 61
  • 80. 1 On the Output Format tab select Repeat Image. 2 Select the desired option: • Off • Auto Repeat • Variable Repeat • Press the up arrow to increase the number of images to print in a column, or press the down arrow to decrease the number. The range is from 1 through 33. • Press the up arrow to increase the number of images to print in a row, or press the down arrow to decrease the number. The range is from 1 through 23. 3 For Auto Repeat and Variable Repeat select the Image Layout for the output copy. • Even: Centers all the images on the output copy. • Bias: Places the images one after the other on the output copy. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Repeat Image cannot be used with the following features: Auto Paper selection, Multiple Up, Bound Originals, Poster, Book Duplex, Covers, and Booklet Creation. 1– 6 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 81. Poster This feature allows you to create a poster size reproduction of the original document by creating multiple images that can be trimmed and joined together after. There will be a 10mm image overlap on the copies to allow for the trimming and joining required to assemble the copies into a poster. When using this feature place the original on the Document Glass in the same orientation as the orientation of the paper loaded in the selected paper tray. The DADF cannot be used. The following options are available: 2x2 The document is copied and divided onto a total of four sheets, two in the X direction and two in the Y direction. 3x3 The document is copied and divided onto a total of nine sheets, three in the X direction and three in the Y direction. 4x4 The document is copied and divided onto a total of sixteen sheets, four in the X direction and four in the Y direction. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 63
  • 82. 1 On the Output Format tab select Poster. 2 Select the desired option: • 2x2 • 3x3 • 4x4 3 Select the desired Paper Tray. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Poster cannot be used with the following features: Tray 5 (Bypass), Auto Paper Tray selection, 1 to 2 Sided, 2 to 2 Sided, Multiple Up, Collated, Repeat Image, Bound Originals, Covers, Book Duplex, Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation, and Build Job. 1– 6 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 83. Mirror Image/ Negative Image When the Mirror Image feature is selected, the output copy appears as a mirror image reflection of the original document. The Negative Image feature reverses the colors of the whole document image. NOTE:Negative Image cannot be used with Dual Color. NOTE:When Negative Image is used with Border Erase, the Border Erase area becomes white. 1 On the Output Format tab select Mirror Image/ Negative Image. 2 Select the desired options: • Select On or Off for Mirror Image. • Select On or Off for Negative Image. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 65
  • 84. Scan Options Tab Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Scan Options tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. Original Size Enables you to specify the size of the original document to be copied. Mixed Size Originals Allows you to place documents of mixed sizes into the DADF for copying. Bound Originals Automatically scans two adjoining pages of a bound document and copies them onto two separate sheets of paper. Image Rotation Automatically rotates the image to match the copy output paper when the original orientation and the copy paper are different. Original Orientation Allows you to indicate the top of the original so that your output will be oriented as desired. Book Duplex Allows you to make two-sided copies from a bound original. 1– 6 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 85. Original Size Use the Original Size feature to specify the original document size. The following options are available: Auto Detect The copier automatically recognizes the size of standard documents in the DADF or on the Document Glass. This is the default setting. Standard Sizes Select the document size from one of the 11 preset sizes. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode. You must place the original on the Document Glass. Non-standard Sizes Allows you to manually enter the size of the document placed on the Document Glass. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 67
  • 86. 1 On the Scan Options tab select Original Size. 2 Perform one of the following: • Select Auto Size Detect to have the copier identify the size of the original document. • Select the appropriate size of the document from one of the preset size buttons. • Enter the width (X) and length (Y) dimensions of the original document. • Press the arrow buttons to decrease or increase the X and Y dimensions. X dimensions range from 15 to 432mm (0.6 to 17.0 inches) in 1 mm (0.1 inch) increments. Y dimensions range from 15 to 297mm (0.6 to 11.7 inches) in 1 mm (0.1 inch) increments. 3 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. 1– 6 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 87. Mixed Size Originals This option allows you to place documents of standard mixed sizes into the DADF for copying. When the Mixed Size Originals feature and Auto Paper selection are selected, the copier automatically identifies each document size and selects the appropriate paper tray. You can also specify a paper tray so that all copies are made on the same size paper. 1 On the Scan Options tab select Mixed Size Originals. 2 Select the desired option: • Off: when documents are all the same size. • On: when documents are different sizes. 3 Load the mixed size originals with one edge of every sheet aligned evenly against the top left corner of the DADF to avoid misfeeds. 4 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation for the loaded documents. 5 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Mixed Size Originals cannot be used with the following features: Covers, Transparency Separators, Multiple Up, Auto Repeat Image, and Booklet Creation. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 69
  • 88. Bound Originals The Bound Originals feature enables you to copy a bound document such as books, magazines, notebooks, or stapled sets. When this feature is selected, each page is copied onto a separate sheet of paper. You must place your bound document face down in the upper left corner of the Document Glass. The DADF cannot be used. The following options are available: Off This is the default. Left Page then Right Copies are made starting from the left page of a bound document. Right Page then Left Copies are made starting from the right page of a bound document. Top Page then Bottom Copies are made starting from the top page of a bound document. When using the Bound Originals feature, the Center Erase option is available. This option allows you to remove the shadow caused by the center binding of bound documents when they are copied. 1– 7 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 89. 1 On the Scan Options tab select Bound Originals. 2 Select the desired format: • Left Page then Right • Right Page then Left • Top Page then Bottom 3 Select which pages are to be copied: • Both Pages • Left Page Only • Right Page Only 4 Press the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the Center Erase amount from 0 to 50mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches). 5 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Bound Originals cannot be used with the following features: Auto Size Detect for Tray 5, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Book Duplex, and Poster. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 71
  • 90. Image Rotation This feature allows the machine to automatically rotate the image so that the orientation of the document matches the output paper. The following options are available: Off The copier will not rotate the image even if the orientation differs from the output paper. Always On The copier will automatically rotate the image if the orientation differs from the output paper. On during Auto The copier will automatically rotate the image if the orientation differs from the output paper only when Auto Paper selection is selected, or Auto % is selected in Reduce/Enlarge. If a specific paper tray is selected without Auto %, image rotation will not occur. 1 On the Scan Options tab select Image Rotation. 2 Select the desired option: • Off • Always On • On during Auto 3 If using Mixed Size Originals, select Rotation Direction. Select the desired option: • Portrait Original - Left Edge • Portrait Original - Right Edge 1– 7 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 91. 4 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Image Rotation cannot be used with the following features: Auto Size Detect for Paper Tray 5, Repeat Image and Poster. NOTE:When Booklet Creation is selected, Image Rotation occurs automatically regardless of the Image Rotation setting. Original Orientation The document orientation must be set to indicate the top of the original when using the following features: 2-Sided, Margin Shift, Border Erase, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Mixed Size Originals, and Independent X-Y%. Original Orientation is designed as follows: Head to Top Select this when placing the top of the document at the top of the DADF or Document Glass. Head to Left Select this when placing the top of the document towards the left of the DADF or Document Glass. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 73
  • 92. Book Duplex The Book Duplex feature enables you to make 2 Sided copies of a bound document such as books, magazines, notebooks, or stapled sets. You must place your bound document face down in the upper left corner of the Document Glass. The DADF cannot be used. The following options are available: Left Page then Right Copies are made starting from the left page of a bound document. Right Page then Left Copies are made starting from the right page of a bound document. Top Page then Bottom Copies are made starting from the top page of a bound document. Along with the Book Duplex feature, Center Erase is offered. This option allows you to remove the shadow caused by the center binding of bound documents when they are copied. 1– 7 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 93. 1 On the Scan Options tab select Book Duplex. 2 Select the desired option: • Left Page then Right • Right Page then Left • Top Page then Bottom 3 Select Start Page & End Page and select the desired options. Press Save to return to the Book Duplex screen. 4 Press the left and right arrows to decrease or increase the Center Erase amount from 0 to 50mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches). 5 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 75
  • 94. Job Assembly Tab Below is a brief description of each feature available on the Job Assembly tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. Stored Jobs Allows you to program various feature settings in the built-in copier memory as a single job. Build Job Allows you to build a job using different settings for each page or segment of a job. Booklet Creation Automatically copies your originals such that the output set can be folded into a booklet. 1– 7 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 95. Stored Jobs The Stored Jobs feature allows you to program various feature settings in the built-in copier memory as a single job. Up to 8 jobs can be stored and up to 18 characters can be entered for each job name. This feature is especially helpful for complex jobs that you run frequently. You can retrieve stored jobs and apply their programming features to a new copy job. Deleting stored jobs frees that memory position for storing different jobs. Storing a Job 1 Program the features and options you want to save for future use. 2 On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs. 3 Select Store. 4 Select the desired icon to identify the job number. 5 Select Enter/Change Name to name the job. 6 Select the job number. 7 Enter a name up to 18 characters long for the stored job and select Save. 8 Select Close. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 77
  • 96. Deleting a Job 1 On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs. 2 Select Delete. 3 Select the job number you want to delete. 4 Select the desired option: • Yes: to confirm the deletion. • No: to cancel the deletion. 5 Select Close. You can now store a new job in place of the job you deleted. Retrieving a Job 1 On the Job Assembly tab select Stored Jobs. 2 Select the job number you want to retrieve. 3 Select Close. 4 Select Start to make copies. 1– 7 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 97. Build Job Build Job enables you to program, scan, and store individual job segments of a large or complex job, and then print all the segments as one complete job. 1 On the Job Assembly tab, select Build Job. 2 Select On. 3 To make a sample set of your originals, select On for Sample Set. Select Save. 4 Load your originals for the first segment of the job. 5 Set the desired features for the job and press Start. 6 Check that Next Original is selected while the document is being copied. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 79
  • 98. 7 Load the next segment of the job, and set the desired features. • Chapter Division - If you select Chapter Division, the next document will be copied onto Side 1, if 2 Sided is selected. • Change Settings - Select Change Settings to change job features for the next segment of the job. When you select Change Settings, the Basic Copying screen is displayed. Select the desired features. 8 Select Start. Repeat steps 5 through 7 for each job segment. 9 Select Last Original after the last segment is scanned. • Sample Set Off - If you selected Off for Sample Set, the entire job will be output. • Sample Set On - If you selected On for Sample Set, one copy of the job will be output. • Check the sample set, and select whether or not to output the remaining number of copies. Select Start. 1– 8 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 99. Booklet Creation This feature copies your originals to make a booklet. The maximum number of originals that can be used is 100. If the number of originals is not a multiple of four, blank pages will be automatically added. The following options are available to indicate binding location: Left Bind / Top Bind Use this for a booklet that will be bound in a left to right format or top to bottom format, such as a calendar. Right Bind Use this for output that will be bound in a right to left format. 1 On the Job Assembly tab select Booklet Creation. 2 Select the required binding location. • Left Bind/Top Bind • Right Bind 3 Select Gutter if you want to add space in the center of your output for a gutter ranging from 0 to 50mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches). 4 Select Covers if you want to add a cover to the job. 5 Select Originals to specify 1 or 2 Sided originals and their orientation. 6 Select Start to make copies or Save to select additional features. NOTE:Booklet Creation cannot be used with Auto Paper selection, Mixed Size Originals, 2 Sided, Uncollated, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Poster, Covers, and Transparency Separators. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 81
  • 100. Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) This section describes the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) for the DocuColor Series printer/copier. The DADF automatically feeds up to 50 sheets of the same size documents or mixed size documents, one at a time, onto the Document Glass, feeding the top sheet first. Documents are delivered to the Original Catch Tray after they have been copied. NOTE: If the DADF belt is dirty and the original is a thin or transparent document, background may appear on the output. This may also occur when copies are made using the Document Glass. Place a white sheet of paper of the same size on top of the document being copied to eliminate background until the belt is cleaned. Component Names and Functions The following items are the principal components of the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder. Document Feed Lamp This lamp displays a green arrow when a document is inserted correctly into the feeder. This light can also indicate a document jam. Original Catch Tray Documents are delivered to this tray. Original Input Area Place documents here to start copying. 1– 8 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 101. Document Specifications Always use the recommended types of input documents so that the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder operates within the design specifications. Documents jams may occur if non-standard documents are used, resulting in damaged documents. Standard DADF document specifications Weight The document should be 16 lb. to 32 lb. (64 to 128 gsm) Size North and South America: 8.5x5.5 in., 8.5x11 in., 8.5x14 in., 11x17 in., A4 European market: A5, A4, A3, 8.5x13 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x11 in., 11x17 in. If the DADF senses non-standard size documents in the feeder, a message is displayed and the printer/copier stops. Place such non-standard documents on the Document Glass, or enter the document size using the Original Size feature on the Scan Output tab. For more information about Original Size, refer to the section entitled Scan Output Tab in this chapter. If the input document is slightly smaller or larger than a standard size document, the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder may detect it as a standard size document. Dark areas or an image loss along the edges may occur. Enter the document size using the Original Size feature, or use the Border Erase feature on the Added Features tab. For more information about Border Erase, refer to the section entitled Added Features Tab, in this chapter. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 83
  • 102. Documents Not Recommended The following document types cause document jams or malfunction of the printer/copier. Make copies of these documents by placing them directly onto the Document Glass. • Book, pamphlet, and booklet documents • Broken, creased, or paste-up documents • Documents with clips and staples • Transparent documents (the document size cannot be detected automatically, or the DADF belt is copied) • Coated paper or carbon-backed documents • Documents smaller than A5 size (8.5 x 5.5 inches) • Documents with glossy surfaces such as photographs Loading the Documents Placing Documents on the Document Glass 1 Open the DADF. 2 Place the document face down, and align it against the inside left cover of the Document Glass. 3 Close the DADF. 1– 8 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 103. Loading Documents in the DADF You can load up to 50 documents from 16 lb. to 32 lb. (64 to 128 gsm) into the DADF. 1 Remove any paper clips or staples from the documents. Align the documents. 2 Place the documents face up in the Original Input Area of the DADF. Slide the documents to the left until the green Document Feed Lamp lights. If the lamp does not light, readjust the alignment and or the placement of the documents until the lamp lights. 3 Slide the document guide toward the stack of documents until the guide lightly touches the side edges of the documents. If the document guide is set too tight, the documents may not feed or may become damaged. If the guide is set too loose, the documents may skew as they feed, which could cause a document jam. 4 Extend the DADF Original Catch Tray to accommodate the size of the documents. 5 Press the Start button. The documents automatically feed one by one, onto the Document Glass. The feeding begins from the top of the stack of documents. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 85
  • 104. Job Status This section describes how to check currently copying, printing, queued, or completed jobs. It also describes how to change print schedules to cancel print jobs, or to change the print priority of queued jobs. Checking Current Jobs This section describes the procedure for checking currently copying, printing or queued jobs. 1 Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Current and Pending Jobs. The Current and Pending Jobs screen is displayed. A job list is displayed if jobs are stored to memory. The list displays currently printing or queued jobs and documents stored to memory. It also displays the current status of each job. 3 Display the desired job using the up and down arrow buttons, and select the desired item from the list. The screen for checking the job status is displayed. 1– 8 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 105. 4 Check the status of the selected job. • To cancel a job select Stop. This cancels processing of the currently printing, copying, or queued job. • You can change the print priority when there are two or more queued jobs. To change the print priority: • Select Promote Job. The print order will be changed so that the job you instructed higher print priority to will be printed after the current job. NOTE: If you continue to change the print priority again after changing the print order in the print schedule, priority will be given to the job that you last instructed. Changing the Print Priority The print order of jobs queued for printing can be changed. If there are two or more queued jobs in the list, you can change the print order so that jobs are printed in the order that they were received. 1 Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Print Waiting Jobs. Queued jobs in the list are printed according to the print priority. If there are no queued jobs in the list, Print Waiting Jobs cannot be selected. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 87
  • 106. Checking Completed Jobs This section describes how to check completed jobs. A list displays whether jobs have been completed normally or not. This list also allows you to check details of completed jobs in more detail. 1 Select the Job Status button on the Control Panel. The Job Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Completed Jobs. The Completed Jobs screen is displayed. A job list is displayed if there are completed jobs. 3 Select the job you want to check using the up and down arrow buttons. The screen for checking the job status is displayed. 4 Select Close. The screen returns to the Job Status screen. 1– 8 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 107. Machine Status Machine status can be checked by selecting the Machine Status button on the Control Panel. The following items are on the Machine Status screen: • Serial Number • Machine Configuration • Software Version • Consumable Status • Paper Tray Information • Billing Meters • Error Reports Machine information, Consumable status, Paper Tray information, Billing Meters, and Error Reports can be checked by selecting the appropriate tab on the Machine Status screen. Checking Paper Trays To check the status of the Paper Trays, select the Paper Tray button on the Machine Status screen. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 89
  • 108. Billing Meters and Printing Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab to check the current meter Reports readings and to print reports. Checking Consumables Select the Consumables tab to check the status of the machine consumables. Error History Report Select the Faults tab to print the Error History Report. 1– 9 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 109. Machine Information 1 Press Machine Status. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 2 Select Machine Information. The Machine Information screen is displayed. 3 The Serial Number will be displayed. 4 Select Close to return to the Machine Status screen. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 1 – 91
  • 110. 1– 9 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 111. 2. Print Overview The DocuColor 3535 works with a Network Controller to process and output print jobs. Print jobs are submitted from the client workstation and processed (Raster Image Processed, or RIPped) through the machine’s Network Controller. Print jobs are then transferred to the DocuColor 3535 for printing. For more information on print functions and features, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. 1 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 2–1
  • 112. 2– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 113. 3. Scan Overview Your printer/copier can also be used as a scanner. You can select a job template that you have created, or you can use one of the default job templates on the machine. The job template will determine the characteristics of your scanned job and its destination. For more information on scanning functions, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. NOTE: The Network Controller user documentation may refer to Job Templates as Mailboxes. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3 –1
  • 114. How to Scan You can scan originals using one of the default job templates on the machine, or you can use a job template that you have created. For more information on creating job templates, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. NOTE: The Network Controller user documentation may refer to Job Templates as Mailboxes. 1 Place the document in the DADF or on the Document Glass. 2 Select Scan from the Menu screen. The Job Template screen is displayed. 3 Select the desired template by selecting it on the screen, or enter the Job Template number using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel. • Select Refresh on the Job Template screen to refresh the list of job templates. • Select Template Description on the Job Template screen to view a description of the selected job template. 3– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 115. 4 Press Close on the Job Template screen. The Basic Scanning Screen is displayed. 5 Select the desired scanning features on the feature tabs. 6 Press Start to begin scanning, or press Save to select additional scanning features. For more information on scanning features, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–3
  • 116. Creating Job Templates Job Templates can be created, edited, copied, and deleted at the client using the software supplied with the Network Controller. You can create these templates with different features and settings that will be applied to specific scan jobs on the machine. For more information on creating job templates, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. NOTE: The Network Controller user documentation may refer to Job Templates as Mailboxes. Scanning Features Basic Scanning Tab Below is a brief explanation of each feature available on the Basic Scanning tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. Job Template Allows you to apply preexisting job templates to jobs on the machine. Output Color Allows you to select the output color for specific types of originals. You can choose from Full Color, Grayscale, Black (Text & Photo), Black (Text), or Black (Photo). Scan Resolution Allows you to select the desired scan resolution. Select from 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi. 2 Sided Originals You can scan both sides of 2-sided originals automatically. 3– 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 117. Job Template Scanned documents can be saved in JPEG or TIFF format. The Job Template must be configured before you can scan. Contact your Network or System Administrator to setup a personal job template. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Job Template on the Basic Scanning tab. 3 Select the desired Job Template. 4 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–5
  • 118. Output Color Output Color allows you to define the kind of original document you wish to scan. The default is Auto. The following options are available: Full Color Best used when scanning color originals. The text in the document will be clearer, and the color graduation will be represented in greater detail. Grayscale Select when scanning originals with different shades of black and white. This option can be used for originals that cannot be scanned in black and white only. Black Select when the desired output is a black and white copy. Black and white copies can be made from any original. With Black selected only Black toner is used. Select Black (Text & Photo) when you are scanning documents that contain both text and photos. Select Black (Text) when you are scanning text documents. Select Black (Photo) when you are scanning photos. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select the desired Output Color on the Basic Scanning tab. 3 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 119. Scanning Resolution Scan Resolution allows you to select the desired scan resolution. Select from 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, or 600 dpi. The higher the scanning resolution, the larger the image file created. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select the desired Scan Resolution on the Basic Scanning tab. 3 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–7
  • 120. 2 Sided Originals 2 Sided Originals allows you to select 1 Sided or 2 Sided originals and output. You can select 2-Sided options from the Basic Scanning tab or select the More... button to get a complete set of options. The 2 Sided Originals feature can be set on the Basic Scanning tab and the Scan Options tab. 2 Sided (H to H) Select 2 Sided Head to Head if your originals are two-sided, head- to-head. 2 Sided (H to T) Select 2 Sided Head to Toe if your originals are two-sided, head- to-toe. More... Select the More... button to get a complete set of options. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select the desired 2 Sided option on the Basic Scanning tab. 3 Select the desired option: • 1 Sided • 2 Sided (Head to Head) • 2 Sided (Head to Toe) • More... 3– 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 121. When More... is selected the 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed. 4 Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided. • If 1 Sided has been selected, proceed to the next step. • If 2 Sided has been selected, select Head to Head or Head to Toe for the Original. 5 In Original Orientation, select the icon that most closely resembles the orientation for the loaded document(s), Head to Top or Head to Left. 6 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–9
  • 122. Scan Options Tab Below is a brief explanation of each feature available on the Scan Options tab. Each feature is explained in detail on the following pages. 2 Sided Originals Use this setting to specify the original orientation when using the DADF for scanning. When the DADF is used for scanning, the original orientation must be set in order to specify the “Head” position of the document. Scan Size Allows you to scan the original for automatic size detection, or the size may be input manually. Mixed Size Originals Automatically determines the correct paper size, based on the original size and the selected reduction/enlargement. Reduce/Enlarge The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at different magnifications. Bound Originals Allows you to scan the original for automatic size detection, or the size may be input manually. Border Erase Allows you to erase unwanted edge markings from the original on the scanned image. 3– 1 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 123. 2 Sided Originals When the DADF is used for scanning, the original orientation must be set in order to specify the “Head” position of the document. 2 Sided Originals can be set on the Basic Scanning tab and the Scan Options tab. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select 2 Sided Originals on the Scan Options tab. The 2 Sided Originals screen is displayed. 3 Select 1 Sided or 2 Sided on the 2 Sided Originals screen. 4 Based on how the originals are loaded, select either Head to Top or Head to Left from Original Orientation. 5 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–11
  • 124. Scan Size The Scan Size feature lets you to specify how the size of the original document is determined. Auto Size Detect The copier automatically recognizes the size of standard originals in the DADF. This is the default setting. Standard Sizes Select the document size from one of the 11 preset sizes. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode. You must place the original on the Document Glass. Non-standard Sizes Allows you to manually enter the size of the document placed on the Document Glass. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Scan Size on the Scan Options tab. The Scan Size Input screen is displayed. 3 Select the desired option: • Select Auto Size Detect to have the machine identify the size of the original document. • Select the appropriate size from one of the preset buttons. • Enter the width (x) and the length (y) dimensions of the original document. Press the arrows to decrease or increase the X and Y dimensions. X dimensions range from 15 to 432 mm (0.6 to 17.0 inches). Y dimensions range from 15 to 297 mm (0.6 to 11.7 inches) in 1 mm (0.1 inch) increments. 4 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 1 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 125. Mixed Size Originals This feature automatically determines the correct paper size when scanning different size documents. The correct paper size will be determined based on the original size and the selected reduction/ enlargement. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options tab. The Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed. 3 Select On. 4 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–13
  • 126. Reduce/Enlarge The Reduce/Enlarge feature allows you to copy the image at different magnifications. The following options are available: Preset % There are 7 preset percentages to choose from. The selected percentage displays in the value box on the Reduce/Enlarge screen. These presets can be changed in System Settings mode. Variable % Select the Variable% option to enter the desired percentage for Reduce/Enlarge. Use either the up and down arrows or the number buttons that display on the Touch Screen. Auto % This option automatically reduces or enlarges the copy, based on the size and orientation of the document and the paper supply selected. This option is applied only to standard size documents. Using Presets 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options tab. The Reduce/ Enlarge screen is displayed. 3 Select Preset %. 4 Select the desired percentage. 5 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 1 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 127. Using Variable% 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options tab. The Reduce/ Enlarge screen is displayed. 3 Select Variable%. 4 Perform one of the following: • Press the arrow buttons to increase or decrease the percentage value. • Use the Numeric Keypad on the Control Panel to enter a specific percentage. Use C to clear the value entered. 5 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–15
  • 128. Using Auto % 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options tab. The Reduce/ Enlarge screen is displayed. 3 Select Auto %. 4 Select the desired Output Size. 5 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 1 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 129. Bound Originals The Bound Originals feature enables you to scan bound originals such as books, magazines or journals, notebooks, glued forms, or stapled sets. When this feature is selected, each page is scanned into a separate file. The pages of the book may be any size up to 8.5 x 11 inches (A4). The Center Erase option allows you to remove the shadow caused by the center binding of bound originals when they are scanned. CAUTION: Do not force the DADF down onto the book. Forcing the DADF down could damage it. Instead, leave the DADF open and apply a slight pressure with your hand to the book to keep it flat against the Document Glass. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Bound Originals on the Scan Options tab. The Bound Originals screen is displayed. 3 Select the desired option: • Left Page then Right • Right Page then Left • Top Page then Bottom Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–17
  • 130. 4 Select the pages that you want scanned: • Both Pages • Left Page only • Right Page only 5 Enter the value for the Center Erase, if necessary. • Center Erase is used to delete the center shadow from the output. Use the arrows to adjust the amount of erase. Center Erase values range from 0 to 50 mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches). 6 Place the open document face down with the upper outside corner of the right page in the upper left corner of the document glass. 7 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 1 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 131. Border Erase The Border Erase feature enables you to eliminate unwanted marks near the edges of the original from the output copy. The range for Border Erase is 0 through 50 mm (0.0 to 2.0 inches) in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments. Border Erase offers the following options which can be used individually or combined together: Top & Bottom The default is 5mm (0.1 inches). Left & Right The default is 5mm (0.1 inches). Center (Gutter) The default is 5mm (0.0 inches). The selected settings are applied to both Side 1 and Side 2 of 2- sided copies. When the image is reduced or enlarged, the selected percentage will be applied to the border erase. When scanning, the machine adds a margin of 2mm (0.1 inches) to all sides. This cannot be eliminated. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–19
  • 132. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Border Erase on the Scan Options tab. The Border Erase screen is displayed. 3 Select Normal or Variable Erase. 4 Press the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the Border Erase amount for Top & Bottom, Left & Right, and Center. 5 Select the icon that most closely resembles the Original Orientation. 6 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 2 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 133. Image Quality / File Format Tab Lighter/Darker/Contrast Allows you to adjust the lightness, darkness and contrast of the scanned original. Auto Exposure Prevents undesired marks or images that are printed on the back of an original from appearing on the scanned images. File Format Allows you to select the desired file format and image compression of your scanned document. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–21
  • 134. Lighter/Darker/Contrast Lighter/Darker enables you to adjust the overall lightness or darkness of the output image. NOTE: If Full Color or Grayscale is selected in Output Color, the contrast level can be set as well. Contrast allows you to adjust the clarity of the image. If you increase the Contrast, the copy appears sharp & vivid. If you decrease the Contrast, the copy is softer. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format tab. The Lighter/Darker/Contrast screen is displayed. 3 Press the up or down arrow to lighten or darken the original. 4 Press the up and down arrow to adjust the Contrast of the original. NOTE: Contrast can only be set when Full Color or Grayscale is selected in Output Color. 5 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 2 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 135. Auto Exposure . Auto Exposure automatically reduces or eliminates undesired marks or images that are printed on the back of an original from appearing on the scanned image. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File Format tab. The Auto Exposure screen is displayed. 3 Select On 4 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–23
  • 136. File Format File Format allows you to select the format for your scanned document. You can also select how to compress the files. High Files will be saved at a high compression rate. The file size will be small, but may impact image quality. Normal Files will be saved at a standard compression rate. This is the best balance between image quality and file size. Low Files will be saved at a low compression rate. Image quality will be optimum, but file size will be large. 1 Load your originals and select the desired job template. 2 Select File Format on the Image Quality/File Format tab. The File Format screen is displayed. 3 Select the desired format. 4 Select Start to begin scanning, or Save to select additional scanning features. 3– 2 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 137. How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job You can cancel a scan job during the scanning process or delete scan jobs that are stored in the machine. In order to pause or cancel a scan job the procedure below: 1 Press Stop to pause scanning. The machine will stop. 2 Press Stop to end scanning, or press Start to resume scanning. Scanning in Batches This section describes how to scan multiple originals as one scan job if you have more originals to be scanned than can fit into the DADF. 1 Begin scanning your first original, then select Next Original. NOTE: When using the DADF, wait until the machine has completed scanning the first batch of originals before loading the next batch. NOTE: If no action is carried out after the above screen has been displayed, the machine will assume that there are no more originals to be scanned and end the job. 2 Load the next original and then press Start. 3 Select Last Original after all originals have been scanned. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 3–25
  • 138. Managing Scanned Documents Scanned documents can be viewed, manipulated, printed, and deleted on the client using the software provided with the Network Controller. For more information about managing scanned documents, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. Configuring the Client for Scanning The client must be setup for scanning before scanned documents can be viewed, managed, printed, or deleted. The software provided with the Network Controller must be installed and configured properly. For more information about configuring the client for scanning, refer to the Network Controller user documentation. 3– 2 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 139. 4. Machine Administrator This chapter describes the features found in the System Settings Mode. Overview The System Settings Mode allows you to change the machine default settings, and the image quality settings. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 –1
  • 140. System Settings System Settings allows you to change the default of the following features: Common Settings : Change the default settings for: • Date/Timers • Audio Tones • Screen Defaults • Paper Trays • Printing Priority • Image Quality/Auto Gradation Adjustment • Sleep Mode Copy Mode Settings: Change the default settings for: • Copy Defaults • Control of Copy Operation • Original Size • Reduce/Enlarge • Custom Colors Network Settings: Set the default settings for: • Protocol Settings Scan Mode Settings: Change the default settings for: • Scanner Settings • Other Scan Settings 4– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 141. Setting and Changing the Administrator Password This section explains how to set and change the System Settings Mode password. The default password is set to "11111". You cannot enter System Settings Mode unless the password is entered. Setting a password also allows you to output total reports and a list of registered mailboxes. 1 Press the Access button. The Password Entry screen is displayed. 2 Enter the password using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel, and select Confirm. The System Administrator Menu screen is displayed. NOTE: Your password will be displayed by an asterisk (*). If you make a mistake, press Clear (C) and re-enter the password. 3 Select System Settings. The System Settings screen is displayed. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 –3
  • 142. 4 Select System Administrator Password. The System Administrator Password screen is displayed. 5 Select Off to disable entering a password. 6 Select On, and enter the new password using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel. 7 Select Enter. 8 Re-enter the password, exactly as you did in Step 6, and select Enter. NOTE: Enter the exact same number in Step 6 and Step 8. If you make a mistake, select Reset and return to Step 6. 9 Select Close. You will be returned to the System Settings screen. 10 Select Exit to exit the System Settings Mode. 4– 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 143. Entering and Exiting the System Settings Mode This section explains how to enter and exit System Settings Mode. Entering the System Settings Mode This section explains how to enter the System Settings Mode. NOTE: The machine will not enter the System Settings Mode when an error message is displayed. 1 Press the Access button. The Enter Password screen is displayed. The default password is 11111. 2 Enter the password and select Confirm. The machine enters System Settings Mode, and the System Administrator Menu screen is displayed. NOTE: Your password will be displayed by an asterisk (*). If you make a mistake, press the Clear button and re-enter the password. If you want to cancel the operation, select Cancel. 3 Select either User Mode or System Settings. • User Mode - make copies and scan documents in the System Settings Mode. If you select Machine Status or Job Status while in the System Settings Mode, printer and copier total reports can be printed. • System Settings - you can change the settings of features. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 –5
  • 144. Exiting System Settings Mode This section outlines the procedure for exiting the System Settings Mode. 1 When you finish performing the desired operations, select Close until the System Settings screen is displayed. 2 Select Exit. Changing Settings in System Settings Mode This section provides an example of the basic procedures required to change settings in System Settings Mode using the System Clock Setting feature. Please follow these procedures for all the features in System Settings Mode. 1 Press the Access button. 2 Enter the password, and select Confirm. The System Administrator Menu screen is displayed. 3 Select System Settings. The System Settings screen is displayed. Select System Settings. 4 Select Common Settings. The Common Settings screen is displayed. NOTE: If you are setting a feature in Copy Mode Settings, Network Settings, Print Mode Settings, or Scan Mode Settings, press the desired button. 5 Select Machine Clock / Timers. The Machine Clock / Timers screen is displayed. 4– 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 145. 6 Select Date, then select Change Settings. The Date screen is displayed. 7 Select the desired Date format. 8 Use the up and down arrow buttons to enter the year, month, and date. NOTE: If Cancel is selected, the machine will return to the previous screen without saving any changes. 9 Select Save. You are returned to the Machine Clock / Timers screen. 10 To make changes to other settings, repeat the procedure. 11 When you are finished making changes, select Close until the System Settings screen is displayed. 12 Select Exit. System Settings Mode closes. Common Settings This section describes the Common Setting items, which relate to the main features on the machine. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 –7
  • 146. Machine Clock/Timers This setting allows you to set the time and date. You can also determine the duration of time until the Power Saver Mode or reset functions engage. Machine Clock/Timers allows you to set the following items. Date Sets the Date (Month/Day/Year) of the machine's system clock to: • Date Format - Y/M/D, M/D/Y, or D/M/Y • Month - 1 to 12 • Day - 1 to 31 • Year - 2000 to 2099 The date set here is printed on lists and reports. The default is 2001, January 1. Time Sets the system clock time (H / M) by 12-hour clock display or 24- hour clock display. • Hours - 0~23 (24-hour clock) OR 1~12 (12-hour clock) • Minutes - 0~59. • Set AM or PM if it is a 12-hour clock display. The time set here will be printed on lists and reports. The default is 12-hour clock display, 0:00 AM. Time Zone Sets the time zone that you are in. Use the up and down arrow buttons to set the time difference from Greenich Mean Time. Daylight Savings Sets whether or not to apply daylight savings to the system clock time. • Adjust Off • Adjust On 4– 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 147. Auto Clear Sets the time to wait before returning the Control Panel to the default screen. The amount of time until reset can be set to: • 0 OR • 60 ~ 240 seconds, in 60-second increments. Enter the value using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel. The default is 60 seconds. Auto Job Release Tells the machine to release the current job to enable the execution of the next job when a fault occurs during copying or scanning. The job can be executed only in parts of the machine that are functioning normally. Set the time to: • 0 - do not automatically release the job. • 240 ~ 5940 seconds (4 ~ 99 minutes) in 60-second increments. Enter the value using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel. The default is 600 seconds. Auto Print Allows the machine to automatically start print jobs when there has been no activity for a set amount of time. Set the time to: • 1 ~ 240 seconds in 1-second increments. Enter the value using the number keys on the Control Panel. The default setting is 10 seconds. Auto Power Saver Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode are part of the energy-saving mode. As time lapses, the machine lowers power consumption: Last Operation -> Low Power Mode -> Sleep Mode. • Set the time to Low Power Mode from 6 ~ 240 minutes and • Set the time to Sleep Mode from 0 ~ 234 minutes Both are set in 1 minute increments. NOTE: Low Power Mode cannot be disabled. The total set time of both Low Power Mode and Sleep Mode must be between 15 - 240 minutes. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 –9
  • 148. Audio Tone This determines the conditions under which Audio Tones are used. Audio Tone Settings allows you to set the following items. Control Panel Select Tone Sets the tone when a button is selected on the display. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. Control Panel Alert Tone Sets the tone when an incorrect button was selected, or an operation was attempted during an error. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. Machine Ready Tone Sets the tone when the machine is ready for copying or printing. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. Copy Job Complete Tone Sets the tone when copying has been completed successfully. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. 4– 1 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 149. Non-Copy Job Complete Sets the tone when a job other than copying has been completed Tone successfully. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. Fault Tone Sets the tone when a fault occurs and the job is held in a faulted state. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. Alert Tone Sets the tone when a job finishes abnormally. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Off. Low Toner Alert Tone Sets the tone when the Drum Cartridge or Toner Cartridge has to be replaced. It can be set to: • Off • Soft • Normal • Loud The default is Normal. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4– 11
  • 150. Screen Defaults This allows you to chose the default screen that is displayed when the machine is turned on. Screen Defaults allows you to set the following items. Screen Default at Power On Select one of the following screens to display as the default screen when the machine is turned on: • Features • Job Status • Machine Status The default is the Features screen. Features Screen Default Select one of the following screens to display as the default screen when Features is selected: • Menu - gives you the option to select copy or scan. • Copy - displays the copy feature tabs. • Scan - displays the scan feature tabs. The default is the Copy Screen. Default Language Select the desired language to appear on the Touch Screen. The selected language will be displayed until the machine is powered off/on. It will then return to the language set by your System Administrator. 4– 1 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 151. Paper Tray Attributes This enables you to set the type and priority of paper loaded in trays, image quality processing settings by paper type, and other paper tray related settings. Paper Tray Attributes allows you to set the following items. Custom Paper Name Allows you to set up to 4 custom paper types. The paper must be plain, bond, or recycled. Set a name up to 12 characters long for custom paper 1 to 4 using letters and symbols. Custom 5 has been set to Bond S as the default. Paper Type - Trays 1-4 Sets up the type of paper loaded in Trays 1-4. The Paper Type setting affects the image quality and speed of output from the specific tray. NOTE: It is very important that you set the correct paper type for the paper you are using. Setting the correct paper type will improve the image quality of your output, and will reduce the probability of paper jams and other machine problems. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Refer to the table for specific information and recommendations for the type of paper you are using. The default is 14, or Bond Paper. For more information on recommended paper types, refer to the Recommended Materials List. NOTE: Coated papers are very susceptible to humidity. Multifeeds are much more likely with humidity greater than 40%. Environmental conditions may require that coated paper be fed one sheet at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass). Setting Paper Type Description 14 Bond Paper 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * 0 Plain Paper 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * 3 Recycled Paper 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * 161 Custom Paper 1 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * 162 Custom Paper 2 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * 163 Custom Paper 3 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * 164 Custom Paper 4 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 pages per minute. * Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 13
  • 152. Setting Paper Type Description 165 Bond S (Custom 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 35 5) pages per minute. This setting has a higher speed output than Heavyweight 1B paper for use with lower area coverage originals. * 5 Transparency For use with transparencies. Transparencies can be fed from Trays 1 - 5, and have an output speed of 8 pages per minute for color and 16 pages per minute for black and white. For best results, do not send more than 20 transparencies at a time to the output tray. 17 Labels Label special application media can be fed from Trays 1 - 5. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. 1 Heavyweight 1 28 lb., 32 lb., 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (99 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. * 25 Heavyweight 1A 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. 26 Heavyweight 1B 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting has a slower output speed than Bond S thus providing a higher gloss than Bond S. 27 Heavyweight 1C 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. 28 Heavyweight 1S Special media (99 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. 19 Heavyweight F 28 lb., 32 lb. (99 - 128 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). * 29 Heavyweight FA 127 - 128 gsm paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1A paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). 30 Heavyweight FB 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1B paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). 31 Heavyweight FC 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1C paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). 32 Heavyweight FS Special media (99 - 128 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Heavyweight 1S paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). 8 Heavyweight 2 65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch paper is 11 pages per minute. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. * 33 Heavyweight 2A 65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. 37 Heavyweight 2S 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. 4– 1 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 153. Setting Paper Type Description 21 Coated 1 80 lb. text, 100 lb. text (120 - 169 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. 20 Coated F 80 lb. text (120 - 128 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 22 pages per minute. This setting should be used for Coated paper that is delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). 23 Coated 2 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. 36 Coated 1 Gloss 80 lb. silk text, 100 lb. text, 8 pt. (120 - 169 gsm) Coated paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. This setting has a slower output speed than the Coated 1 setting thus providing a higher gloss than Coated 1. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. 34 Gloss 1C 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. This setting has a slower output speed than the Heavyweight 1C setting thus providing a higher gloss than Heavyweight 1C. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. 35 Gloss 1A 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm) paper. Output speed for 8.5x11 inch (A4) paper is 11 pages per minute. This setting has a slower output speed than the Heavyweight 1A setting thus providing a higher gloss than Heavyweight 1A. You are not able to Auto Duplex using this paper type setting. You may manually duplex. * There are Image Quality options available for these paper types. Refer to the Image Quality information for details on the different options available. NOTE: Any paper type designated with an “F” for the Finisher can also be delivered to the Center Output Tray. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 15
  • 154. Paper Type - Tray 5 Sets up the type of paper loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass). The Paper (Bypass) Type setting affects the image quality and speed of output from Tray 5 (Bypass). NOTE: It is very important that you set the correct paper type for the paper you are using. Setting the correct paper type will improve the image quality of your output, and will reduce the probability of paper jams and other machine problems. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 14, or Bond Paper. For more information on recommended paper types, refer to the Recommended Materials List. Setting Paper Type Media Weight 14 Bond Paper * 81-98 gsm 0 Plain Paper * 71-80 gsm 3 Recycled Paper * 71-80 gsm 161 Custom 1 * 81-98 gsm 162 Custom 2 * 81-98 gsm 163 Custom 3 * 81-98 gsm 164 Custom 4 * 81-98 gsm 165 Bond S (Custom 5) * 99-105 gsm 16 Lightweight 55-63 gsm 5 Transparency 1 Heavyweight 1 * 99-169 gsm 8 Heavyweight 2 * 170-220 gsm 12 Heavyweight 1 - Side 2 * 99-169 gsm 13 Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 * 170-220 gsm 21 Coated 1 120-169 gsm 23 Coated 2 170-220 gsm 22 Coated 1 - Side 2 120-169 gsm 24 Coated 2 - Side 2 170-220 gsm 11 Labels * There are Image Quality options available for these paper types. Refer to the Image Quality information for details on the different options available. 4– 1 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 155. Paper Tray Priority Select the order that Trays 1 - 4 are selected for Auto Tray Switching. You can select the priority of each tray: First, Second, Third, and Fourth. The same tray cannot be selected twice. The default is Tray 1 -> Tray 2 -> Tray 3 -> Tray 4. Paper Type Priority Set the priority of each of the paper types for Auto Tray Switching. Set the priority for: • Bond Paper • Plain Paper • Recycled Paper • Bond S (Custom 5) • Custom Paper 1 - 4 Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description 255 Auto Tray Switching Off 1 Highest priority 2 2nd priority 3 3rd priority 4 4th priority 5 5th priority 6 6th priority 7 7th priority 8 8th priority Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 17
  • 156. Image Quality Different image quality settings can be selected for Bond, Plain, Recycled, Custom 1 to 4, Bond S (Custom 5), Heavyweight 1, Heavyweight 2, Heavyweight 1-Side 2, and Heavyweight 2-Side 2 Paper. NOTE: It is very important that you set the correct image quality setting for the paper type you are using. Setting the correct image quality setting will produce the best image quality of your output, and will reduce the probability of paper jams and other machine problems. The default settings are as follows: • 1 for Bond paper • 8 for Plain paper • 32 for Recycled paper • 128 for Bond S paper • 1 for Custom paper • For Heavyweight 1 paper, the range of settings is 19 to 21. The default is 19 for Heavyweight 1 paper and 21 for Heavyweight F paper. • For Heavyweight 1 - Side 2 paper, the range of settings is 23 to 26. The default is 23 for Heavyweight 1 - Side 2 paper. • For Heavyweight 2 paper, the range of settings is 27 to 31. The default is 27 for Heavyweight 2 paper. • For Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 paper, the range of settings is 33 to 36, and 200. The default is 200 for Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 paper. • For Heavyweight 2 and Heavyweight 2 - Side 2 paper, the settings include settings for Gloss 1C, Gloss 1A, and Coated 1 Gloss. These are alternative gloss settings for Heavyweight 1C, Heavyweight 1A, and Coated 1. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description 1 Best suited for color-exclusive Bond paper 24 lb. (81 - 98 gsm). 2 Best suited for lighter paper used in office environments 18 lb. (64 - 70 gsm). 4 Best suited for lighter Recycled paper 18 lb. (64 - 70 gsm). 8 Best suited for paper used in office environments 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm). 16 Best suited for paper used in offices for photos 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm). 32 Best suited for Recycled paper 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm). 64 Best suited for Recycled paper for photos 20 lb. (71 - 80 gsm). 128 Best suited to color-exclusive Bond paper 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm). 4– 1 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 157. Setting Description 19 Best suited for Heavyweight 1A 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm). 20 Best suited for Heavyweight 1B 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm). 21 Best suited for Heavyweight 1C 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm). 22 Best suited for Heavyweight 1S special media (99 - 169 gsm). 23 Best suited for Heavyweight 1A - side 2 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm). 24 Best suited for Heavyweight 1B - side 2 28 lb. (99 - 105 gsm). 25 Best suited for Heavyweight 1C - side 2 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm). 26 Best suited for Heavyweight 1S - side 2 special media (99 - 169 gsm). 27 Best suited for Heavyweight 2A 65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm). 28 Best suited for Gloss 1C 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm). 29 Best suited for Gloss 1A 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm). 30 Best suited for Coated 1 Gloss 80 lb. silk text, 100 lb. text (120 - 169 gsm). 31 Best suited for Heavyweight 2S 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm). 200 Best suited for Heavyweight 2A - side 2 65 lb. cover, 110 lb. index, 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm). 33 Best suited for Gloss 1C - side 2 32 lb. (106 - 126 gsm). 34 Best suited for Gloss 1A - side 2 90 lb. index, 60 lb. cover (127 - 169 gsm). 35 Best suited for Coated 1 Gloss - side 2 80 lb. silk text, 100 lb. text, 8 pt. (120 - 169 gsm). 36 Best suited for Heavyweight 2S - side 2 80 lb. cover (170 - 220 gsm). Tray 5 (Bypass) Paper Size Paper sizes can be assigned to Tray 5 Standard Size buttons 1 to Defaults 11. Eleven sizes can be assigned to this paper size list. • A/B Series Size -A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 • Inch Size - 12 x 18", 11 x 17", 11 x 15", 8.5 x 14", 8.5 x 13", 8.5 x 11" SEF, 8.5 x 11" LEF, 5.5 x 8.5" SEF, 5.5 x 8.5" LEF, SRA3, 8 x 10” SEF, 8 x 10” LEF • Others - 8K, 16K LEF, 16K SEF • Variable - Set the X (horizontal) range between 140 and 483mm (5.5 - 19.0 inches), and the Y (vertical) range between 100 and 305mm (3.9 - 12.0 inches) in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 19
  • 158. Printing Priority Select which job will be prioritized when the machine receives a copy job and printer job at the same time. If both are set at the same priority, jobs are processed in the order they are received. Depending on the condition of the machine, they may not be processed according to this setting. Copy Job Sets the priority that will be given to copy jobs. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 38, 3rd Priority. Print Job Sets the priority that will be given to print jobs. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 48, No Priority. Setting Description 18 1st priority 28 2nd priority 38 3rd priority 48 No priority Promoted Job Set whether or not to automatically overtake a job if there is another job that can be started when something on the machine prevents execution of a job. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Promote Disabled. Setting Description 0 Disables promotion of jobs 1 Enables promotion of jobs 4– 2 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 159. Image Quality Adjustment You can set the default for Image Quality/Automatic Gradation Adjustment. Image Quality The following items can be set in Image Quality Setting. Photo & Text Recognition The level at which the machine judges text or photos during document scanning can be changed when making copies by selecting Text&Photo on the Original Type screen. • More Text - fine text can be easily identified as text. • More Photo - halftone images, such as newspapers or circulars, can be easily identified as photos. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 3, Normal. Setting Description 1 More Text 2 Text 3 Normal 4 Photo 5 More Photo Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 21
  • 160. Output Color Recognition The level at which the machine judges B/W and color during document scanning can be changed when making copies by selecting Auto under Output Color. • More B/W - a black & white original is easily identified. • More Color - a color original is easily identified. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 3, Normal. Setting Description 1 More B/W 2 B/W 3 Normal 4 Color 5 More Color Photo Reproduction Level You can adjust the color reproduction of images judged by the machine as photos when making copies by selecting Text&Photo on the Original Type screen. • Heavy Text - the black areas of the image are intensified, creating a sharper looking copy. Select Heavy Text to emphasize black text in documents containing both text and photos. • Heavy Photo - the tones in photo areas in the images are reproduced smoother. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 3, Normal. Setting Description 1 Heavy Text 3 Normal 5 Heavy Photo 4– 2 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 161. Photo Image Quality You can adjust the image quality when printing photos. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Sharper, clearer photos. Setting Description 0 Normal 1 Sharper, clearer photos Color Copy - Auto You can set how the machine detects the density of background Exposure color and processes to remove the background color. • Speed Priority - part of the original will be scanned to determine the background color level. • Image Quality Priority - the machine pre-scans the document, and samples the entire document to detect the background color level. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. B/W Copy - Auto Exposure Configure how background color is removed when making B/W copies. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description 0 Speed Priority 1 Image Quality Priority Image Enhancement Print data is smoothed to reproduce smoother images. This feature is enabled on print jobs only. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Image Enhance On. Setting Description 0 Image Enhance Off 1 Image Enhance On Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 23
  • 162. Auto Gradation Adjustment Auto Gradation Adjustment is a color calibration for the copier and printer. An Auto Gradation Adjustment compensates for differences between the actual and the expected toner densities for each color. An Auto Gradation Adjustment should be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in the appearance (quality) of the output, particularly changes in color tones or densities. Performing an Auto Gradation Adjustment on a regular basis will help to maintain consistent color quality over time. NOTE: Since an Auto Gradation Adjustment can affect all jobs for all users, it is recommended that this procedure be performed only by the Machine Administrator. Copy Job - Text Compensates tones when a text original is copied. Copy Job - Photo Compensates tones when a photo original is copied. Print Job Compensates tones when printing with controller line screen. Network Controller - 1 Compensates tones when printing with Network Controller screen type 1. Network Controller - 2 Compensates tones when printing with Network Controller screen type 2. NOTE: Printing the chart for Auto Gradation does not increase the meter count. NOTE: When gradation adjustment is executed, the following changes will be made to default copy settings set in System Settings mode: Copy density = Normal or Auto, Color Shift = Normal, Saturation = Normal, Color Balance = 0, Sharpness = 0. NOTE: When Print or Network Controller gradation adjustment is executed, the printer’s output profiles for the available screen types are compensated. 4– 2 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 163. 1 On the Image Quality Adjustment screen, select Auto Gradation Adjustment. 2 Load 8.5x11 inch or A4 paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Move the paper guide to gently touch the edge of the paper. 3 Select the desired gradation adjustment screen: • Copy Job - Text • Copy Job - Photo • Print Job • Network Controller - 1 • Network Controller - 2 Press Start. The Adjustment Chart is output. 4 Place the Adjustment Chart face down on the Document Glass with both Magenta color patches against the left side of the glass. 5 Place 5 sheets of white paper on top of the Adjustment Chart and close the DADF. Select Start. 6 To continue Auto Gradation Adjustment with other screens, repeat steps 2 to 5. When you are finished, select Close until the System Settings screen is displayed. 7 Select Exit to exit the System Settings mode. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 25
  • 164. Other Machine Settings The following items can be set in Other Settings. Sleep Mode This sets up whether to allow machine to switch to the Sleep Mode. When Sleep Mode is disabled, timers in Auto Power Saver on the Machine Clock/Timers Settings screen cannot be set. The default is Enabled. NOTE: Low Power Mode cannot be disabled. Job Offset (Center Tray) This sets up whether to offset jobs per set or per job when outputting to the Center Tray. Job Offset (Finisher Tray) This sets up whether to offset jobs per set or per job when outputting to the Finisher Tray (optional). Copy Mode Settings This section describes how to change the default for different copier settings. For more information on copying features, refer to the Copy chapter. 4– 2 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 165. Basic Copying Presets You can increase efficiency for each copy job by setting frequently used trays and Reduce/Enlarge settings. Paper Supply - 2nd to 4th You can select which Paper Trays to display on the Basic Copying Buttons screen. You can set Trays 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (Bypass) to appear in 3 of the 5 buttons displayed under Paper Supply on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is Tray 1 for the 2nd button from the top, Tray 2 for the 3rd button from the top, Tray 3 for the 4th button from the top. Setting Description 1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Tray 5 (Bypass) Reduce/Enlarge - 3rd to 4th The 3rd and 4th buttons under Reduce/Enlarge can be changed Buttons on the Basic Copying screen. Select the ratio from the preset ratio buttons. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 64% for the 3rd button from the top, 129% for the 4th button from the top. Setting Description 1 Ratio set to R/E Preset 1 2 Ratio set to R/E Preset 2 3 Ratio set to R/E Preset 3 4 Ratio set to R/E Preset 4 5 Ratio set to R/E Preset 5 6 Ratio set to R/E Preset 6 7 Ratio set to R/E Preset 7 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 27
  • 166. Copy Defaults Set up the defaults for different copy features. The machine returns to the defaults when the power is turned on, the machine is returned from the Power Saver mode, the Auto Clear timer times out, or the Clear All button is pressed. The following items can be set in Copy Defaults. Output Color Set the default for Output Color on the Basic Copying screen. Select one of the following options: • No Default • Auto • Full Color • Black • Dual Color • Single Color The default is Auto. NOTE: If No Default is selected, an Output Color must be selected for copy jobs, or the machine will not start copying. NOTE: If Black is selected on the Basic Copying screen, the copy output will have the same image quality as Halftone, selected in Text&Photo. NOTE: When Dual Colors or Single Color is selected on the Basic Copying screen, the Original Type cannot be set. 4– 2 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 167. Single Color Set the default for Single Color on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Red. Dual Color - Color Image Sets the default for Color Image in Dual Color on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Red. Dual Color - B/W Image Set the default for a B/W Image in Dual Color on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Black. Setting Description 0 Black (can be only be set when Dual Color is selected) 1 Red 2 Green 3 Blue 4 Yellow (Y) 5 Magenta (M) 6 Cyan (C) 7 Specified Color set to Custom Color 1 8 Specified Color set to Custom Color 2 9 Specified Color set to Custom Color 3 10 Specified Color set to Custom Color 4 11 Specified Color set to Custom Color 5 12 Specified Color set to Custom Color 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 29
  • 168. Reduce/Enlarge Sets the default for Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen. Select one of nine buttons. Seven buttons are registered as preset ratio buttons, 100%, and Auto %. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, 100%. Setting Description 0 100% 1 Ratio set to R/E Preset 1 2 Ratio set to R/E Preset 2 3 Ratio set to R/E Preset 3 4 Ratio set to R/E Preset 4 5 Ratio set to R/E Preset 5 6 Ratio set to R/E Preset 6 7 Ratio set to R/E Preset 7 8 Auto% NOTE: If the default for Paper Supply is set to Auto, Auto% cannot be selected for Reduce/Enlarge. Paper Supply This sets the default for Paper Supply on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Auto. If the default for Reduce/Enlarge is set to Auto%, Auto cannot be selected. Setting Description 0 Auto 1 Tray 1 2 Tray 2 3 Tray 3 4 Tray 4 5 Tray 5 (Bypass) 4– 3 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 169. 2 Sided This sets up the default for 2 Sided on the Basic Copying and Added Features screens. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, 1 to 1. Setting Description 0 1 to 1 Sided 1 1 to 2 Sided 2 2 to 1 Sided 3 2 to 2 Sided Output This sets up the default for Output on the Added Features screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Auto. Setting Description 0 Auto 1 Collated 2 Uncollated Output Destination This sets up the Output Tray for copy and print jobs. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Center Output Tray. Setting Description 0 Center Output Tray 2 Finisher Tray NOTE: The Optional Finisher must be installed to use the Finisher Tray. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 31
  • 170. Margin Shift - Side 1 This sets up the default for Side 1 in Margin Shift on the Added Features screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, No Shift. Setting Description 0 No Shift 1 Auto Center 2 Corner Shift (Top Right) 3 Corner Shift (Bottom Right) 4 Corner Shift (Top Left) 5 Corner Shift (Bottom Left) 6 Corner Shift (Top Center) 7 Corner Shift (Bottom Center) 8 Corner Shift (Left Center) 9 Corner Shift (Right Center) 4– 3 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 171. Margin Shift - Side 2 This sets up the default for Side 2 in Margin Shift on the Added Features screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 10, Symmetrical with Side 1. Setting Description 0 No Shift 1 Auto Center 2 Corner Shift (Top Right) 3 Corner Shift (Bottom Right) 4 Corner Shift (Top Left) 5 Corner Shift (Bottom Left) 6 Corner Shift (Top Center) 7 Corner Shift (Bottom Center) 8 Corner Shift (Left Center) 9 Corner Shift (Right Center) 10 Symmetrical with Side 1 Border Erase - Top & This sets up the default for the top and bottom Border Erase. Bottom Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 5mm (0.1 inches). Setting Description 0 None 1 ~ 50 Set the border erase amount in increments of 1mm 0 ~ 2.0 Set the border erase amount in increments of 0.1 inches Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 33
  • 172. Border Erase - Left & Right This sets up the default for the left and right Border Erase. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 5mm (0.1 inches). Setting Description 0 None 1 ~ 50 Set the border erase amount in increments of 1mm 0 ~ 2.0 Set the border erase amount in increments of 0.1 inches Center Erase This sets up the default for Center Erase. It is distributed along the center of the original image. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0 mm (0 inches). Setting Description 0 None 1 ~ 50 Set the center erase amount in increments of 1mm 0 ~ 2.0 Set the center erase amount in increments of 0.1 inches 4– 3 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 173. Original Type (Auto/Full This sets up the default for Original Type on the Image Quality Color) screen, when Auto or Full Color is selected as the color mode on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo (Halftone). Original Type (Black) This sets up the default for Original Type on the Image Quality screen, when Black is selected as the Output Color on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Text & Photo (Halftone). Setting Description 0 Text 1 Text & Photo (Halftone) 2 Text & Photo (Photograph) 3 Text & Photo (Color Copies) 4 Photo (Halftone) 5 Photo (Photograph) 6 Photo (Color Copies) 7 Color Originals (Map) 8 Color Originals (Highlighted Originals) 9 Color Originals (Inkjet Originals) NOTE: When Dual Color or Single Color is selected as the Output Color on the Basic Copying screen, the Original Type setting is ignored. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 35
  • 174. Auto Exposure This sets up the default for Auto Exposure, when Text&Photo, Text, or Color Originals is selected in Original Type on the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Auto Exposure On. Setting Description 0 Auto Exposure Off 1 Auto Exposure On Lighter/Darker This sets up the default for Lighter/Darker in Light/Dark/Contrast on the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 3, Normal. Setting Description 0 Light (+3) 1 Light (+2) 2 Light (+1) 3 Normal 4 Darker (-1) 5 Darker (-2) 6 Darker (-3) 4– 3 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 175. Contrast This sets up the default for Contrast in Light/Dark/Contrast on the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2, Normal. Setting Description 0 Higher 1 High 2 Normal 3 Low 4 Lower Sharpness This sets up the default for Sharpness in Sharpness/Saturation on the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2, Normal. Setting Description 0 Sharper 1 Sharp 2 Normal 3 Soft 4 Softer Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 37
  • 176. Color Saturation This sets up the default for Color Saturation in Sharpness/ Saturation on the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2, Normal. Setting Description 0 Higher 1 High 2 Normal 3 Low 4 Lower Color Shift This sets up the default for Color Shift on the Image Quality screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2, Normal. Setting Description 0 Coolest 1 Cool 2 Normal 3 Warm 4 Warmest 4– 3 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 177. Color Balance - Yellow, This sets up the default for each density level, Low Density, Magenta, Cyan, Black Medium Density, and High Density, for Yellow, Magenta, Cyan and Black in Color Balance on the Image Quality screen. The defaults are all 0. NOTE: The values set here will also be applied to Black and Single Color modes. Original Orientation This sets up the default for Original Orientation on the Scan Options screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Head to Top. Setting Description 0 Head to Top 1 Head to Left Image Rotation This sets up the default for Image Rotation on the Scan Options screen. On during Auto refers to Auto Paper selection for Paper supply or Auto % for Reduce/Enlarge. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, On during Auto. Setting Description 0 Always On 1 On during Auto 2 Off Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 39
  • 178. Rotation Direction Set the default for Rotation Direction when Always On or On during Auto is selected in Image Rotation on the Scan Options screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Portrait Original - Left Edge. Setting Description 0 Auto (can be selected only when the machine is equipped with Finisher) 1 Portrait Original - Left Edge 2 Portrait Original - Right Edge NOTE:When the machine is equipped with a Finisher, the default will be 0, Auto. 4– 4 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 179. Copy Control This is the setting for Copy Control. The following items can be set in Copy Control. Auto Paper Off Set which tray will be selected when Auto % or Independent X-Y Auto is selected in Reduce/Enlarge when Auto is selected in Paper Supply, on the Basic Copying screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Select Tray 1. Setting Description 1 Select Tray 1 2 Select Tray 2 3 Select Tray 3 4 Select Tray 4 Memory Full Procedure Set the processing method when the hard disk runs out of memory during a job. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Disable. Setting Description 0 Disable (Discard stored documents) 1 Enables stored data Maximum Stored Pages This determines the maximum number of stored pages when copying documents. It can be set from 1 to 999 pages. Enter the number of the pages using the numeric keypad on the Control Panel. The default is 999. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 41
  • 180. Original Size Defaults This sets up the original sizes that will be displayed when the Original Size is displayed from the Scan Options tab. An original size can be assigned to Original Size Buttons 1 ~ 11. Setting frequently used non-standard size in advance prevents you from having to input the size each time. When you set up non- standard sizes, the range for X direction is 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0 inches) and for Y direction is 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7 inches). Original Size Button 1 ~ 11 The sizes that can be selected for Original Size Buttons are as follows. Select a button and set the size. The defaults are as follows. The order is from Original Size Button 1 (Left Upper): A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, 11x17 in., 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF. Setting Description A/B Series Size A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, A6 LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, B6 LEF Inch Size 11x17 in., 11x15 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 5.5x8.5 in. LEF Others 5x7 in., 3.5x5 in., 8K, 16K SEF, 16K LEF Variable Setting ranges are: 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0 inches) for X direction, 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7 inches) for Y direction in increments of 1 mm (0.1 inches) 4– 4 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 181. Reduce/Enlarge Presets This sets up the magnifications that will be displayed in Preset%, in Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Copying screen. 18 different magnifications can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7. R/E Preset 1 ~ 7 Assign magnifications to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default for R/E Preset 1 is 25.0%. Setting Description 1 25.0% 2 35.3% 3 50.0% 4 57.7% 5 61.2% 6 64.7% 7 70.7% 8 81.6% 9 86.6% 10 115.4% 11 122.5% 12 129.4% 13 141.1% 14 163.2% 15 173.2% 16 200.0% 17 282.8% 18 400.0% 19 78.5% 20 94.0% 21 154.5% Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 43
  • 182. Custom Colors This sets up the user registered colors used in Single Color and Dual Colors on the Output Color screen. Custom Colors 1 ~ 6 Assign user registered colors, Yellow (0~100%), Magenta (0~100%), Cyan (0~100%), to Custom Color Buttons 1 ~ 6. The default is 0. NOTE: Adjust the registered color so that the sum of Yellow, Magenta and Cyan is 240% or less. Network Settings Network Settings consists of Protocol Setting, which determines the necessary condition for the communication. Ethernet Setting Sets the Ethernet Setting for the machine. Select one of the following settings. The default is 0, Auto (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX). • Auto (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX) • 100BaseTX • 10BaseT TCP/IP - Get IP Address Select the procedure for setting the IP address on the machine. Select one of the following settings. • DHCP - The IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from the DHCP server. • BOOTP - The IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address are automatically extracted from the BOOTP server. • Manual - Enables you to manually enter the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway address. NOTE: The Subnet Mask and Gateway address cannot be entered if the IP address is not set. 4– 4 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 183. TCP/IP - IP Address Sets the IP address for the machine. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 Set the IP address in increments of 1 TCP/IP - Subnet Mask Sets the Subnet Mask setting for the machine. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 Set the Subnet Mask in increments of 1 TCP/IP - Gateway Address Sets the Gateway address for the machine. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 Set the Gateway address in increments of 1 TCP/IP - IP Address for Sets the IP address for download for the machine. Download Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table Setting Description 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 Set the IP address in increments of 1 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 45
  • 184. Scan Mode Settings These settings are enabled for the scan features. For more information on scanner features, refer to the Scan chapter. Basic Scanning Presets You can change the magnification percentages assigned to the buttons displayed in R/E Presets on the Basic Scanning screen. Setting frequently used scan ratios prevents you from having to change the setting each time you scan. The following items can be configured in R/E Presets. Reduce/Enlarge 2nd ~ 4th Set the ratios displayed for the 2nd to 4th buttons from the top Buttons down, for each of the feature buttons. Select available ratios from those currently assigned to R/E Preset buttons. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The defaults are: 2 for the 2nd button from the top, 4 for the 3rd button, and 7 for the 4th button. Setting Description 1 Ratio set to R/E Preset 1 2 Ratio set to R/E Preset 2 3 Ratio set to R/E Preset 3 4 Ratio set to R/E Preset 4 5 Ratio set to R/E Preset 5 6 Ratio set to R/E Preset 6 7 Ratio set to R/E Preset 7 NOTE: This setting is not used when there is a DADF on the machine. 4– 4 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 185. Scan Defaults This sets the defaults for the scan features. The machine returns to the defaults set here when the power is turned on, the machine returns from the Power Saver mode, or the Clear All button is pressed. Setting frequently used features prevents you from having to change settings each time you scan. The following items can be configured in Scan Defaults. Output Color Set the default for Output Color on the Basic Scanning screen. Select from Auto, Full Color, Grayscale, and Black. The default is Auto. Scan Resolution Set the default for Scan Resolution on the Basic Scanning screen. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, 200 dpi. Setting Description 0 200 dpi 1 300 dpi 2 400 dpi 3 600 dpi Mixed Size Originals Set the default for Mixed Size Originals on the Scan Options screen in Scan mode. Set whether or not to use the Mixed Size Originals feature when the DADF is used for scanning. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Off. Setting Description 0 Off 1 On Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 47
  • 186. Border Erase - Top & Set the default for the top and bottom Border Erase amounts. Bottom Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2mm (0.1 inches). Setting Description 0 None 1 ~ 50 Set top & bottom Border Erase amount in increments of 1mm 0 ~ 2.0 Set top & bottom Border Erase amount in increments of 0.1 inches Border Erase - Left & Right Set the default for the left and right Border Erase amounts. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2mm (0.1 inches). Setting Description 0 None 1 ~ 50 Set left & right Border Erase amount in increments of 1mm 0 ~ 2.0 Set left & right Border Erase amount in increments of 0.1 inches Center Erase Set the default for Center Erase. The Center Erase will be distributed evenly along the center of the original image. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0 mm (0 inches). Setting Description 0 None 1 ~ 50 Set Center Erase amount in increments of 1mm 0 ~ 2.0 Set Center Erase amount in increments of 0.1 inches 4– 4 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 187. Original Orientation Set the orientation of the document when it is scanned. Determination of the top, bottom, left and right edges of the original changes according to this setting. If it is set to 0, Head to Top, the original image will always be saved rotated 90°. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Head to Top. Setting Description 0 Head to Top 1 Head to Left Lighter/Darker Set the default for Lighter/Darker in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format screen in Scan mode. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 3, Normal. Setting Description 0 Light (+3) 1 Light (+2) 2 Light (+1) 3 Normal 4 Darker (-1) 5 Darker (-2) 6 Darker (-3) Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 49
  • 188. Contrast This sets up the default for Contrast in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/file format screen in Scan mode. Set the contrast for the document to be scanned. The contrast setting is enabled if Output Color is not set to Black. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 2, Normal. Setting Description 0 Higher 1 High 2 Normal 3 Low 4 Lower Auto Exposure Set the default for Auto Exposure on the Image Quality/File Format screen in Scan mode. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, Off. Setting Description 0 Off 1 On 4– 5 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 189. Scan Size Defaults Set the sizes displayed on the Scan Size screen under the Scan Options tab. Any scan size can be assigned to Scan Size buttons 1 ~ 11, except for Auto Size Detect. Setting frequently used scan sizes will prevent you from having to enter scanning size each time you scan. When entering non- standard sizes, set the size between 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0 inches) for the X direction, and 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7 inches) for Y direction, in increments of 1mm (0.1 inches). Scan Size 1 ~ 11 The following table shows the sizes that can be set to scan size defaults. Select a button, and choose a size. Setting Description A/B Series Size A3, A4 SEF, A4 LEF, A5 SEF, A5 LEF, A6 SEF, A6 LEF, B4, B5 SEF, B5 LEF, B6 SEF, B6 LEF Inch Size 11x17 in., 11x15 in., 8.5x14 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 5.5x8.5 in. LEF Others 5x7 in., 3.5x5 in., 8K, 16K SEF, 16K LEF Variable Setting ranges are: 15 ~ 432 mm (0.6 ~ 17.0 inches) for X direction, 15 ~ 297 mm (0.6 ~ 11.7 inches) for Y direction in 1mm (0.1 inch) increments The defaults are as follows. 5.5x8.5 in. LEF, 5.5x8.5 in. SEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF, 8.5x11 in. SEF, 8.5x14 in., 11x17 in., A4 LEF, A4 SEF, A3, 3.5x5 in., 5x7 in. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 51
  • 190. Output Size Defaults Set the sizes displayed for Output Size when selecting Auto % in Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen in Scan mode. Any output size can be assigned to Output Size buttons 1 ~ 8. Setting frequently used sizes prevents you from having to set sizes each time you scan. Output Size 1~8 Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description Setting Description 4 A6 SEF 9 5.5x8.5 SEF 68 A6 LEF 73 5.5x8.5 LEF 7 B6 SEF 20 8.5x11 in. SEF 71 B6 LEF 84 8.5x11 in. LEF 10 A5 SEF 28 8.5x13 in. 74 A5 LEF 29 8.5x14 in. 13 B5 SEF 33 11x15 in. 77 B5 LEF 34 11x17 in. 21 A4 SEF 31 8K 85 A4 LEF 52 16K SEF 30 B4 116 16K LEF 35 A3 54 3.5x5 in. 6 5x7 in. 4– 5 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 191. Reduce/Enlarge Presets Set the Preset % ratios displayed in Reduce/Enlarge on the Scan Options screen in Scan mode. Any ratio can be assigned to R/E Preset 1 ~ 7, except for 100%. Setting frequently used magnification ratio saves you from having to change the setting each time. R/E Preset 1 ~ 7 Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. Setting Description Setting Description 1 25.0% 12 129.4% 2 35.3% 13 141.4% 3 50.0% 14 163.2% 4 57.7% 15 173.2% 5 61.2% 16 200.0% 6 64.7% 17 282.8% 7 70.7% 18 400.0% 8 81.6% 19 78.5% 9 86.6% 20 94.0% 10 115.4% 21 154.5% 11 122.5% Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 53
  • 192. Other Scan Settings This section describes how to set other scanner-related settings. The following items can be configured in Other Settings. Scan Service Set whether or not to enable scan features. The default is Enabled. Memory Full Procedure Set the processing method when the scanner runs out of memory during scanning. Set whether or not to enable documents stored so far. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 1, Enabled. Setting Description 0 Disabled (Discard stored documents) 1 Enables stored data Maximum Stored Pages Set the maximum number of stored pages for scanning. Set any number between 1 ~ 999. Enter the number of the pages using the Numeric Keypad. The default is 999. Lighter/Darker Level Set the default for the density assigned to Lighter ~ Darker in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality/File Format screen in Scan mode. Set the density between -100 ~ +100 in increments of 1. Lighter (+3) ~ Lighter (+1) must be set between -100 and -1, and Darker (+1) ~ Darker (+3) must be set between +1 ~ +100. Normal, 0, cannot be changed. Set so that the values increase from Lighter (+3) to Darker (+3). Select scanning density using the up and down arrow buttons on the left, and set the value using the up and down arrow buttons on the right. 4– 5 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 193. Contrast Level Set the default density assigned to Lower ~ Higher for Contrast in Lighter/Darker/Contrast on the Image Quality screen. Contrast Settings are not enabled when Output Color is set to Black. Set the density between -100 ~ +100 in increments of 1. Lower ~ Slightly Lower must be set between -100 and -1, and Slightly Higher ~ Higher must be set between +1 ~ +100. Standard, 0, cannot be changed. Set so that the values increase from Lower to Higher. Select Contrast using the up and down arrow buttons on the left, and set the values using the up and down arrow buttons on the right. The defaults from the top are, -50, -25, 0, 25, 50. Color Space Set the default for Color Space. Enter the setting on the Numeric Keypad using the numbers listed in the following table. The default is 0, sRGB. Setting Description 0 sRGB output 1 Output by device RGB. This limits the file format to TIFF (with ICC profile). Profiles are used to enable output at tones close to those of the machine. NOTE: You can find profile data on the Driver CD. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 55
  • 194. Auditron Administration Auditron Administration is an audit feature. This feature electronically records the number of copies or prints made for each user account and controls the access and use of the copier. Auditron Administration allows you to: • Create, change, and delete up to 1000 user accounts. • Control access to copy features. • Control access to scan features. • Limit copying to B/W, Color, or allow both. • Limit the number of copies made per user account. • Check the number of copies made per user account. • Print account information. • Reset account meters. 4– 5 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 195. Create/Check Accounts To setup Auditron you must create user accounts. Users will then be required to enter the password setup with their account to perform certain machine functions. You can create up to 1000 accounts. The following information is contained within each account. Password Set any password between 4 - 12 digits long. Account Name Set any account name up to 31 characters long, using letters and symbols. Color Access Set whether or not to restrict color copying or B/W copying. Account Limit Set the maximum number of copies that can be made with this account. The account limit can be set between 100 - 1999900, in 100 page increments. 1 Select Create/Check Accounts on the Auditron Administration screen. The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed. 2 Select an item that is not in use, and select Create/Delete. 3 Enter a 4-digit number as the Password using the Numeric Keypad on the Control Panel. The password cannot be set if an identical password has already been registered to another account. When you have finished entering the Password, select Save. The screen for that account number is automatically displayed. 4 Enter the desired password for that account. 5 Select Account Name. The screen for entering text is displayed. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 57
  • 196. 6 Enter the account name, and select Save. The screen returns to the Create/Delete screen. 7 Select Color Access. The Color Access screen is displayed. Select the desired option, and select Save. • Free Access - Allows both Color and B/W copies. • Black Only - Allows only B/W copies. 8 Select Change Account Limit. The Account Limit screen is displayed. Enter the maximum number of color copies using Numeric Keypad, and select Next. Enter the maximum number of B/W copies using Numeric Keypad, and select Save. The screen returns to the Create/Delete screen. 9 Select Close. Deleting/Resetting Data by Account Information for individual user accounts can be deleted and reset. 1 Select Create/Check Accounts on the Auditron Administration screen. The Create/Check Accounts screen is displayed. 2 Select the account whose data is to be deleted or reset, and select Create/Delete. The Create/Delete screen is displayed. 3 Select Change Account Limit to change the limits for Color or B/W copying. 4 Select Reset Total Pages Printed or Reset Account. • When Reset Total Pages Printed is selected, the number of copies made for the selected account is reset and returned to 0. A reset cannot be undone. • When Reset Account is selected, account data and the settings of registered account data are deleted. When this button is selected, a confirmation screen is displayed. If you select Yes, the account will be deleted. To cancel, select No. 4– 5 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 197. Enabling Auditron Mode You can enable Auditron Mode for copy, scan, or both. When Auditron Mode is enabled, the user must select the Access button and enter the appropriate user account password to start using the machine. 1 Select Auditron Mode on the Auditron Administration screen. The Auditron Mode screen is displayed. 2 Select On or Off for Copy and Scan, and select Save. The screen returns to the Auditron Administration screen. 3 Select Close until the System Settings screen is displayed. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 59
  • 198. System Administrator Data You can check the total number of pages printed for color and B/W. You can also reset this data. 1 Select System Administrator Data on the Auditron Administration screen. The System Administrator Data screen is displayed. 2 Check the total number of pages printed. To reset this data, select Reset. 3 Select Close. 4– 6 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 199. Delete/Reset All Account Data Five different types of data can be deleted from all accounts. All Accounts Deletes all accounts and all account information associated with each account. All Copy Access Settings Enables color copying for all accounts by setting the Color Access in all accounts to Free Access. All Account Limits Sets all Account Limits to the maximum number on the machine, 1999900. All Total Pages Printed Resets the Total Pages Printed for Color and B/W for each account to 0. Print Meter Data Resets the meters in System Administrator Data for the total number of pages printed. 1 Select Delete/Reset Account Data on the Auditron Administration screen. The Delete/Reset Account Data screen is displayed. 2 Select the button for the desired operation, and select Delete/ Reset. The Confirmation screen is displayed. 3 Select Yes in the Confirmation screen. The details you selected are cleared. Deleted data cannot be restored. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 4 – 61
  • 200. Printing Meter Reports When a password for entering System Settings mode is set, you can print Printer Meter Reports and Auditron Reports. Print Meter Report Check the total number of pages printed on this machine. The number of printed pages is counted individually for color and for B/W. Auditron Report Check the number of pages printed by individual user accounts. You can print a report for a certain account, or all the accounts set up on the machine. 1 Press the Access button. Enter the password and select Confirm. 2 Select User Mode. 3 Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel. The Machine Status screen is displayed. 4 Select the Billing Meter/Print Report tab. The Billing Meter/Print Report screen is displayed. 5 Select Print Report/List. The Print Report/List screen is displayed. 6 Select Auditron Administration. 7 Select the desired report: • Print Meter Report • Auditron Report If you select Auditron Report, select the desired account number or All Accounts. NOTE: 50 account numbers can be selected at a time or all accounts can be selected as the account number. 8 Press Start. The report is printed. 9 Select Close. 4– 6 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 201. 5. Specifications This chapter contains details on how to load the paper trays, and paper tray specifications. It also provides you with information on the DocuColor 3535 machine specifications and Finisher (optional accessory). Loading Paper This section contains basic information about loading paper and transparencies, and about using paper trays. It also includes some paper usage guidelines for the DocuColor Series. For more information about the materials you can use, refer to the Recommended Materials for the DocuColor Series. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5–1
  • 202. Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 Trays 1,2,3 and 4 hold the paper supply for the DocuColor printer/ copier. Trays 1 - 4 can feed Transparencies and paper weights 18 lb. to 110 lb. (64 to 220 gsm). The machine automatically detects the size and orientation of loaded paper. The paper type must be set in System Setting mode. Trays 1 - 4 can accommodate approximately 300 striped transparencies and approximately 450 stripeless transparencies. Both striped and stripeless transparencies can be used, but stripeless transparencies are recommended. It is not recommended that you output more than 20 transparencies at a time. If your job is larger than 20 pages, use the Transparency Separators feature. NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher (optional accessory). Transparencies cannot be used for 2 Sided output. NOTE: When making copies you can select transparencies from Tray 5 (Bypass). If you want to select transparencies from Trays 1- 4, your System Administrator must change the Paper Type setting in System Settings mode. To select transparencies for print jobs, you can select the correct paper type in the printer driver at the client. 3-Tray Module Trays 1 through 4 can accommodate transparencies and an assortment of and standard paper sizes, from 5.5x8.5 through 11x17 inch, and A5 through A3. Trays 1 and 2 have width and length adjustment guides that can be adjusted if the paper size in the tray needs to be changed. Tandem Tray Module Trays 1 and 2 can accommodate transparencies and an assortment of standard paper sizes, from 5.5x8.5 through 11x17 inch, and A5 through A3. Trays 1 and 2 have width and length adjustment guides that can be adjusted if the paper size in the tray needs to be changed. Trays 3 and 4 can accommodate 8.5x11 inch, A4, or B5 paper. Trays 3 and 4 can feed Transparencies and paper weights 18 lb. to 110 lb. (64 to 220 gsm). 5– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 203. Tray 5 (Bypass) Tray 5 (Bypass) is located on the left side of the printer/copier. Tray 5 (Bypass) can accommodate transparencies and other specified paper stocks, and various paper sizes up to 12x18 in. or SRA3. Tray 5 (Bypass) has the capacity to hold up to 95 sheets. Approximately 20 transparencies should be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass) at a time. Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass) Certain standard paper sizes can be automatically detected in Tray 5 (Bypass) by selecting Auto Size Detect on the Tray 5 programming screen. The following paper sizes can be used with the Auto Size Detect feature: • US/Canada - 5.5x8.5 in. LEF/SEF, 8x10 in. LEF, 8.5x11 in. LEF/SEF, 8.5x13 in. SEF, 8.5x14 in. SEF, 11x17 in. SEF. • Europe - A5 LEF/SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A3 SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, B4, Postcard (100 x 148mm). All other paper sizes must be specified using the selections under Standard Size, or by inputting the size under Non-standard size. For example, you must specify 12x18 inch when using that paper size. NOTE: A paper size mismatch message will be displayed if you try a job with Auto Size Detect selected and a paper size that is not included in the list above. Auto Tray Switching The Auto Tray Switching feature enables the printer/copier to automatically switch to another tray when a tray runs out of paper. The trays must be loaded with the same size paper in the same orientation (long edge feed or short edge feed). Auto Tray Switching must be enabled in System Settings mode, with the same paper type assigned to two or more trays. Auto Tray Switching may be enabled only for Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4. Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be enabled for Auto Tray Switching. The default for Auto Tray Switching is On with Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 enabled. To use Auto Tray Switching with the default settings, load the trays you want to use with the same size paper in the same orientation. Select the paper tray button for the tray with the lowest number on the Control Panel. For example, if you load Trays 1 and 2 with the same size paper and the same orientation, select the Tray 1 Paper Supply button on the Basic Copying tab of the Touch Screen. The printer/copier draws from Tray 1 until it is empty, then switches automatically to Tray 2. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5 –3
  • 204. Loading Stock Paper Load the paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 with the preferred printing side up. Load the paper into Tray 5 (Bypass) with the preferred printing side down. The capacity of the tray varies with the paper weight that is loaded in the tray. NOTE: For the best results, use only the recommended paper sizes, paper weights, or paper types. If you do not use recommended papers, you may experience copy quality problems, paper jams, or possible component failures. If you are loading pre-drilled paper load it into Tray 5 (Bypass) with the undrilled long edge as the leading edge (holes to the left) for 1 sided output, the undrilled long edge as the trailing edge (holes to the right) for 2 sided output. 5– 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 205. NOTE: Do not load paper above the fill line of the paper tray edge guides. NOTE: Fan the desired paper before loading it into the Tray. Straighten the paper stack each time the paper tray is opened. Close the paper tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack. This ensures that the paper is in the correct position when the paper tray is in the operating position. If paper feeding or copy curl problems occur, flip the paper over in the tray and make the copies again. If the performance improves, continue to load the paper in this manner. Testing has shown that paper handling and copy performance vary with room temperature, humidity, paper quality, image area on copies, etc. All of these variables interact and, in some cases, you must decide which paper loading method works best. NOTE: Coated papers are very susceptible to humidity. Multifeeds are much more likely with humidity greater than 40%. Environmental conditions may require that coated paper be fed one sheet at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass). Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5 –5
  • 206. Transparencies Transparencies can be fed from Trays 1- 5 (Bypass). Stripeless transparencies are recommended. Striped transparencies must be loaded in Trays 1 - 4 with the stripe face down, on the right side of the tray. For Tray 5 (Bypass) striped transparencies must be loaded with the stripe face up, on the left side of the tray. NOTE: Use only the transparencies recommended in the Recommended Materials for the DocuColor Series. After loading the transparencies you can program the copier printer to insert a blank separator page between transparencies by using the Transparency Separators feature. For more information about the Tranparency Separators feature, refer to the section entitled Transparency Separators, in this chapter. Follow these guidelines to prevent static build up when using transparencies: • Place no more than twenty 8.5x11 inch or A4 transparencies in Tray 5 (Bypass) at one time. • Place only one 11x17 in. or A3 transparency in Tray 5 (Bypass) at a time. • Remove the transparencies from the Center Output Tray before running additional sets. • It is not recommended that you output more than 20 transparencies at a time. If your job is larger than 20 pages, use the Transparency Separators feature. NOTE: Transparencies cannot be delivered to the Finisher Tray. For more specific information about materials that have been tested and approved for use in the DocuColor 3535, refer to the Recommended Materials for the DocuColor Series. Current information is also available at the Xerox web site. 5– 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 207. Envelopes Envelopes can be fed from Tray 5 (Bypass). You can use envelopes for print jobs. Copying on envelopes is not supported. Three types of envelopes are supported: • Monarch 7 3/4 “ (98.4 mm x 190.5 mm) • Commercial #10 (104.8 mm x 241.3 mm) • DL (110 mm x 220 mm) 1 Load a maximum of 10 envelopes into Tray 5 (Bypass) at a time. You may be able to fit a few more depending on the thickness of the envelope, but do not exceed the max fill line on the tray. • Envelopes must be loaded LEF, face down in Tray 5 (Bypass). • The flap should be closed, and enters the machine first. • The machine is not designed to handle high-capacity production envelope printing. • The envelope may wrinkle depending on its weight and stiffness. 2 In the Printer Driver, you must select Custom Paper Size to use envelopes. 3 Set the Media Type to Heavyweight 2. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5 –7
  • 208. Loading Paper into Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 1 To load a paper tray, pull the tray out. 2 Fan the paper and load the desired paper into the tray by aligning the edge of the paper against the left edge of the tray. The side to be copied should be facing up. Do not fill the paper tray above the fill line. 3 Adjust the paper guides if necessary, until they lightly touch the paper. 4 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop. 5– 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 209. Loading Stock into Tray 5 (Bypass) The number of sheets that can be loaded in Tray 5 (Bypass) varies with the weight of the stock. NOTE: Paper stocks which exhibit difficulties when fed from Trays 1,2,3 and 4 may be fed more reliably from Tray 5 (Bypass). Do not add paper during a copying job. Do not interleave transparencies with paper in Tray 5 (Bypass). NOTE: Make sure to select the appropriate paper type (i.e. transparencies, heavyweight paper). This will ensure that the images are fused properly in the printing/copying process. 1 Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it away and down from the printer/copier. 2 Check the position of the front edge paper guide for Tray 5 (Bypass). NOTE: The guide should only be set to the 12 inch position for papers wider than A3 (297 mm), such as 12x18 inches. 3 Fan the paper and load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing down. Insert the paper lightly along the paper guide on the front side of the machine until it comes to a stop. 4 Adjust the back edge paper guide until it lightly touches the paper. NOTE: Do not load mixed size paper into the tray. Do not load materials above the fill line located on the paper guide 5 Select the appropriate size and type for the paper you have loaded. 6 Remove all stock from Tray 5 (Bypass) after the job is complete. Dust and moisture can cause copy quality defects. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5 –9
  • 210. Loading 12 x 18 inch Paper Use Tray 5 (Bypass) for 12x18 inch (305 x 457 mm) paper. 1 Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it away and down from the printer/copier. 2 Adjust the front edge paper guide for Tray 5 (Bypass) to the 12x18 position. 3 Load up to 100 sheets of 12x18 inch (305 x 457 mm) 20 lb. paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Load paper with the side to be copied or printed on facing down. 4 Adjust the back edge guide until it lightly touches the paper. 5 Select 12x18 in. under Standard Size, and select the appropriate type for the paper you have loaded. 6 When the job is complete, return the paper guides for Tray 5 (Bypass) to their normal position. 5– 1 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 211. Loading SRA3 Paper into Tray 5 (Bypass) 1 Open Tray 5 (Bypass) by grasping the tray and gently pushing it away and down from the printer/copier. 2 Adjust the front edge paper guide to the closest position forward beyond the 12 inch position. 3 Load the SRA3 paper into Tray 5 (Bypass). Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down. 4 Adjust the back edge guide until it lightly touches the paper. NOTE: You can select SRA3 paper as one of the default paper sizes for Tray 5 (Bypass). Performance using this paper size may vary. The maximum image area is 302 x 476.6mm with a guaranteed area of 297 x 476.6mm. CAUTION: Do not place any objects or materials other than the appropriate stock on Tray 5 (Bypass). Printer/copier damage may occur. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5– 11
  • 212. Machine Specifications Speed by Media DocuColor 3535 Bond Paper (8.5x11 in./A4) 18 lb. - 24 lb. (64 gsm - 98 gsm): • Black and white: 35 ppm • Color: 35 ppm Bond Paper (11x17 in./A3) 18 lb. - 24 lb. (64 gsm - 98 gsm): • Black and white: 22 ppm • Color: 22 ppm Transparency (8.5x11 in./A4): • Black and white: 16 ppm • Color: 8 ppm Heavyweight 1 (8.5x11 in./A4) 28 lb. bond - 90 lb. index (99 - 169 gsm): • Black and white: 22 ppm • Color: 22 ppm Heavyweight 1 (11x17 in./A3) 28 lb. bond - 90 lb. index (99 - 169 gsm): • Black and white: 11 ppm • Color: 11 ppm Heavyweight 2 (8.5x11 in./A4) 65 lb. cover- 110 lb. index (170 - 220 gsm): • Black and white: 11 ppm • Color: 11 ppm Heavyweight 2 (11x17 in./A3) 65 lb. cover- 110 lb. index (170 - 220 gsm): • Black and white: 5 ppm • Color: 5 ppm 5– 1 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 213. Coated 1 (8.5x11 in./A4) 80 lb. text - 100 lb. text (120 gsm - 169 gsm): • Black and white: 22 ppm • Color: 22 ppm Coated 1 (11x17 in./A3) 80 lb. text - 100 lb. text (120 gsm - 169 gsm): • Black and white: 11 ppm • Color: 11 ppm Coated 2 (8.5x11 in./A4) 65 lb. cover - 80 lb. cover (170 gsm - 220 gsm): • Black and white: 11 ppm • Color: 11 ppm Coated 2 (11x17 in./A3) 65 lb. cover - 80 lb. cover (170 gsm - 220 gsm): • Black and white: 5 ppm • Color: 5 ppm Dimensions and Weight DocuColor 3535 The dimensions are: 26.0 x 30.7 x 45.1 inches (660 x 780 x 1145mm). Each size +/- 5mm. Finisher (optional The dimensions are: 300 x 590 x 945mm. Each size +/- 5mm. The accessory) weight is: 35kg. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5 – 13
  • 214. Finisher (Optional Accessory) The DocuColor printer/copier may be equipped with an optional Finisher. The Finisher contains the following components: Finisher Cover Button Provides access to the Finisher paper path. Finisher Tray Completed jobs are delivered to this tray. Finisher Front Door Provides access to the Stapler area. Staple Cartridge Load a new staple pack when needed. Finisher Stand Supports the Finisher and may be used for storage. Finisher Interface Delivers the copies to the Finisher. Center Tray Exit Cover Provides access to the paper path. WARNING: Never cheat the safety interlock switch. Injury or a document jam may occur. This switch shuts off the Finisher power when you open the front door or when you move the Finisher to the right to clear a paper jam. Using the Finisher The Finisher can staple from 2 to 50 sheets (50-sheet maximum applies to up to 24lb / 90 gsm paper.) You can staple both portrait and landscape documents with single or dual staples. Output to the Finisher Tray is delivered face down. The Finisher Tray can hold up to 1000 sheets. • Jobs containing more than 50 sheets will not be stapled. • Tray 5 (Bypass) cannot be selected as the paper source for a job going to the Finisher. 5– 1 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 215. Stapling Options Stapling options are selected from the UI or from your printer driver and depend on the paper selected. The table below shows the acceptable paper sizes and stapling options. Copying Paper Orientation Paper Size One Left Two Left Two Up One Right Two Right LEF B5, A4, 8.5x11 in. SEF A4, 8x10 in., 8.5x11 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x14 in. SEF B4, A3, 11x17 in. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 5 – 15
  • 216. Printing Paper Paper Size One Left Two Left Two Up One Right Two Right Orientation LEF B5, A4, 8.5x11 in. SEF A4, 8x10 in., 8.5x11 in., 8.5x13 in., 8.5x14 in. SEF B4, A3, 11x17 in. 5– 1 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 217. 6. Maintenance This chapter describes maintenance procedures that should be performed on your machine regularly. When replacing consumable items, such as Toner Cartridges, refer to the instructions in this chapter for information on how to replace them. When consumable items need to be replaced the following message will appear: “Consumables need to be replaced.” Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel to view the status of the consumables in your machine. There are several pages of consumables listed along with their status. If a consumable needs to be replaced it will be highlighted in white. If you are able to replace it the status will say “Replace Now.” If a service technician must replace it the status will say “Replace Now (Call for Service).” The consumables do not need to be replaced immediately when the status says “Replace Soon.” Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6–1
  • 218. Ordering Consumables Consumable supplies can be ordered using the part numbers listed in the following table. To order consumable supplies call the supply number below: United States: 1-800-822-2200 Part Number Description 006R01122 Black Toner Cartridge 006R01123 Cyan Toner Cartridge 006R01124 Magenta Toner Cartridge 006R01125 Yellow Toner Cartridge 013R00579 Drum Cartridge 008R12904 Fuser (110 Volt) 008R12905 Fuser (220 Volt) 008R12903 Waste Toner Container 008R12915 Staple Cartridge 6– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 219. Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass Keep the DADF and Document Glass clean to ensure clean copies and acceptable copy quality. Clean the DADF and Document Glass as needed. 1 Open the DADF document cover. 2 Wipe off any dirt from the underside of the DADF document cover (belt section) with a dry cloth moistened with water. Wipe the cover with a soft, dry cloth until it is clean and dry. 3 Wipe off any dirt from the document glass with a soft cloth moistened with water. Wipe in a lengthwise direction making sure to keep your fingers off the glass. Repeat until the Document Glass has no visible marks or streaks. 4 Close the DADF document cover. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 –3
  • 220. Cleaning the ROS Window The following procedure describes how to clean the ROS (Raster Output Scanner) window. NOTE: This procedure is normally performed after replacing the Waste Cartridge or when image-quality defects, such as white or color streaks appear during copying or printing. 1 Turn off the machine and open the Front Cover. CAUTION: Place a drop-cloth or other suitable protection on the floor or carpeting to catch any waste toner that may spill while performing the next step. 2 Lower the Waste Toner Cartridge Cover. 6– 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 221. 3 Remove the Waste Toner Cartridge. • Pull the Waste Toner Cartridge straight from the machine. 4 Remove the ROS Window Cleaning Tool from its storage area inside the Front Cover. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 –5
  • 222. 5 Clean the ROS Windows. Perform this twice for each cleaning slot. a. Gently insert the cleaning tool into the cleaning slot with the pad facing down. b. When the cleaning tool has gone in as far as possible, gently draw it out of the machine towards you. c. Repeat for each of the three (3) cleaning slots. 6 Return the cleaning tool to its original position on the rear of the Front Cover. 7 Reinstall the Waste Toner Cartridge and Waste Toner Cartridge Cover. 8 Close the Front Cover. 9 Turn on the machine. 6– 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 223. Changing Toner Cartridges When a message is displayed to replace a Toner Cartridge, follow the instructions provided here in addition to those on the labels surrounding the cartridges. NOTE: When a message appears indicating that a Toner Cartridge is low, the color that is low will be shown. If additional cartridges are low, a more generic message will be displayed and you will not know which cartridges require replacement. Press the Machine Status button on the Control Panel, then select the Consumables tab to view the status of all the consumables. 1 Open the Front Door of the printer/copier and locate the Toner Cartridges. From left to right the Toner Cartridge colors are Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. 2 Place a few sheets of paper on the floor under the Toner Cartridges to catch any toner that may spill. 3 Remove the empty cartridge by rotating it counterclockwise until the arrow on the cartridge is aligned with the arrow and unlock position on the printer/copier. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 –7
  • 224. 4 Pull the cartridge completely out of the printer/copier. Dispose of the cartridge according to local regulations. 5 Remove the new cartridge from the box. 6 Shake the cartridge from side to side. 7 With the arrow on the cartridge facing upward, slide the cartridge into the printer/copier. 8 Rotate the cartridge clockwise until the arrow on the cartridge is aligned with the arrow and lock position on the printer/copier. 6– 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 225. 9 Close the Front Door of the printer/copier. 10 Remove the sheets of paper on the floor under the Toner Cartridge, and dispose of them according to local regulations. CAUTION: Do not use warm or hot water, or cleaning solvents, to remove toner from your skin or clothing. This will set the toner and make it difficult to remove. If any toner gets on your skin or clothing, use a brush to remove the toner, blow it off, or wash it off with cold water and mild soap. CAUTION: If more than one Toner Cartridge needs to be replaced at the same time, be careful to place the new cartridges in their correct color locations. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 –9
  • 226. Changing Staple Cartridges If you have the optional Finisher on your machine, you will need to replace staple cartridges periodically. Open the Finisher Front Cover and replace the staple cartridges according to the instructions on the label located on the inside of the door. 6– 1 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 227. Changing the Fuser Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6– 11
  • 228. 6– 1 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 229. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 – 13
  • 230. Changing the Waste Toner Container 6– 1 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 231. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 – 15
  • 232. Changing Drum Cartridges 6– 1 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 233. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 6 – 17
  • 234. 6– 1 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 235. 7. Troubleshooting The DocuColor Series 3535 is designed to help you find and solve problems as they happen. The printer/copier can detect problems and display the corrective action on the screen. This section describes the printer/copier faults and how to perform the appropriate recovery procedure. Sometimes you may not succeed in your efforts to clear a fault. When this happens you should call Xerox. Before calling for assistance, perform the steps provided on the following pages. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 –1
  • 236. Paper Jam Clearance When paper jams in the machine, the machine stops and a tone sounds. A message display in the message area of the Touch Screen with the corrective actions to take. Occasionally, simultaneous multiple paper jams occur or multiple sheets of paper jam during an extended copy job. A paper message displays until all paper jams in the printer/copier have been cleared. The Touch Screen displays the appropriate message screen for the area of the printer/copier, which needs to be checked until all jams are cleared. WARNING: When clearing the paper path in the Fuser area (located in the Paper Path Module), remember that the surfaces are hot. To avoid injury, proceed with caution when clearing the path. Paper may jam in several areas inside the printer/copier. • Behind the Top Cover • Behind the Left Center Cover • Behind the Bottom Left Cover • In Trays 1 to 4 • At Tray 5 (Bypass) • In the Duplex Paper Path • In the DADF • In the Finisher (Optional Accessory) NOTE: Gradually remove the jammed paper so you do not rip it. If the jammed paper rips, be sure to remove all of the pieces. The action required to clear a paper jam varies with the location of the jam. Clearance procedures for each of these areas are provided in the actions that follow. When the jam is cleared successfully and all doors are closed, printing is automatically resumed from the state before the paper jam occurred. If the jam occurred during copying, press Start. Copying is resumed from the state before the jam occurred. 7– 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 237. Paper Jams at the Top Left Cover This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the top left cover of the machine. 1 Gently open the top left cover while lifting up the release lever. 2 If the edge of the jammed paper can be reached at the output tray, pull the jammed paper in the direction of the feed-out tray. WARNING: The fuser area is very hot. Be careful when clearing a jam in this area. 3 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 4 If you cannot remove paper jammed inside the fuser unit, lift up the lever and remove the jammed paper. NOTE: After you have removed the jammed paper, return the lever to its original position. 5 Press the center section of the top left cover to gently close the cover, and lift up Tray 5 (Bypass). Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 –3
  • 238. Paper Jams at the Left Center Cover This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the left center cover of the machine. 1 Gently open the left center cover while pulling the release lever. 2 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 3 Gently close the left center cover. Paper Jams at the Bottom Left Cover This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur at the bottom left cover of the machine. 1 Gently open the bottom left cover while pulling the release lever. 2 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 3 Gently close the bottom left cover. 7– 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 239. Paper Jams in Trays 1 to 4 This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur in Trays 1 to 4. 1 Open the Left Center Cover (for paper jams in Tray 1) or the Bottom Left Cover (for paper jams in Trays 2 to 4), and remove the jammed sheet by pulling on the lead edge, if present. If the lead edge is not present, perform steps 2 to 4. 2 Open the tray where the paper jam occurred. 3 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 4 Push the tray in gently until it comes to a stop. Paper Jams in Tray 5 (Bypass) This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur in Tray 5 (Bypass). 1 Inspect the paper feed entrance of Tray 5 (Bypass), and remove any jammed paper. NOTE: When two or more sheets of paper are loaded, remove all of the sheets from the tray. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 2 Fan the paper you removed making sure that all four corners are neatly aligned. 3 Insert the paper into the Tray with the printed side facing down until its lead edge lightly touches the paper feed entrance. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 –5
  • 240. Paper Jams in the Duplex Unit This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur on the duplex unit. 1 Open the duplex cover above Tray 5 (Bypass). 2 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 3 Close the duplex unit cover, and lift up Tray 5 (Bypass). Paper Jams in the Finisher This section describes how to clear paper jams that occur inside the Finisher when the Finisher (optional accessory) is installed. Paper Jams on the Finisher Top Cover 1 Press the button on the Finisher top cover. Open the Finisher top cover. 2 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 3 Close the Finisher top cover. 7– 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 241. Paper Jams on the Finisher Interface 1 Move the Finisher to the right. 2 Open the top cover on the Finisher. 3 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 4 Close the top cover on the Finisher. 5 Slide the Finisher back to the left. Paper Jams on the Center Tray Exit 1 Move the Finisher to the right. 2 Remove the jammed paper. NOTE: If paper is torn, check for any torn pieces of paper inside the machine. 3 If the jammed paper is hidden from view, open the exit cover and check inside. 4 Slide the Finisher back to the left. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 –7
  • 242. Document Jams If a document jams on the DADF, the machine stops, and an error message appears on the display. Clear the document jam according to the instructions displayed, then reload the document. Document Jams on the Left Cover (Top) This section describes how to clear document jams on the left cover (top) of the DADF. 1 Pull up the handle at the center of the left cover on the DADF, and open the cover until it comes to a stop. The inside cover also rises up interlocked with the other cover. NOTE: Unlatch the document scanner cover completely to stabilize it. Gently open the covers. 2 Remove the jammed paper. 3 Close the left cover of the DADF until you hear it click into place. 4 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and load the document again following the instructions displayed. NOTE: After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again including delivered document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped and scanning will resume from the previous document sheet. NOTE: Torn, wrinkled, or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies. 7– 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 243. Jams on Original Input Area and Document Glass A message is displayed if a document jam occurs in the Original Input Area of the DADF, or on the Document Glass. Follow the instructions displayed to clear the problem. 1 If there is a document jammed in the Original Input Area, remove it gently. 2 Gently lift up the DADF. 3 Remove the jammed paper. 4 Gently return the DADF to the original position. 5 Make sure that the document is not torn, wrinkled, or folded, and load the document again following the instructions displayed. NOTE: After removing the jammed document, load the entire document again including delivered document sheets. Already scanned document sheets will automatically be skipped, and scanning will resume from the previous document sheet. NOTE: Torn, wrinkled, or folded documents may cause document jams and damage. To scan such documents, directly place the document on the document glass to make copies. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 –9
  • 244. Stapler Faults This section describes how to clear stapler faults. Follow the procedures on the following pages when copies are not stapled or when staples are bent. NOTE: To staple copies, the Finisher (optional accessory) must be installed. 1 Make sure that the machine has stopped, then open the front cover in the Finisher. 2 Hold the staple cartridge by its lever, and pull the staple cartridge out to the right toward you. 3 Lift up the staple cartridge to remove it. 4 After removing the staple cartridge, check the inside of the Finisher for any remaining staples. 5 Pull up the lever on the front of the staple cartridge. 6 Remove the jammed staples together with the staple sheet. NOTE: When removing jammed staples, also remove the staple sheet. Do not remove unused staples from the staple cartridge. WARNING: Be careful when removing jammed staples to avoid hurting your fingers. 7 Close the lever on the front of the staple cartridge until you hear it click into place. 8 Return the staple cartridge to its original position until you hear it click into place. 9 Close the Finisher front cover. NOTE: A message will be displayed and the machine will not operate if the Finisher front cover is not closed completely. 7– 1 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 245. Resolving Hardware Problems Toner Cartridge Problem Suggested Solution – Operator mistakenly – Reinstall the toner cartridge using the following procedure: removed the wrong NOTE:The following procedure may result in dry ink spillage on toner cartridge and the floor. To protect the floor, put a disposable covering or drop wishes to reinsert it. cloth beneath and in front of the printer/copier. – Reinstall the used and partially full toner cartridge by – Operator cannot pushing in the cartridge until it is fully seated against the reinstate a partially full rear stop. toner cartridge after it has been removed. NOTE:Inform the Xerox service representative at the next service call about the above action since he or she may need to clean up the dry ink on internal printer/copier components. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7– 11
  • 246. Resolving Programming Problems Problem Suggested Solution The Control Panel – Press Clear All on the Control panel Touch Screen does not – Touch a selectable button on the Touch Screen with one respond to a touch finger. A slight pressure is required to cause the printer/copier command to react. – If the problem persists, open the Front Door of the printer/ copier. Close the Front Door and make a selection on the Touch Screen. If the Touch Screen does not respond to any touch commands, switch off the power. Wait 15 seconds, then switch on the power. Reprogram the printer/copier for the copy features that are desired. You cannot program a – Jobs cannot be programmed or copies made while some job while a screen is screens, such as administration screens, jam clearance open screens, or consumable status information screens, are open. – Follow the directions on the information screen. Then program the desired job. Printer/copier features Certain features cannot be selected because of the previous are not selectable selections. Generally, features or buttons you can select appear selectable to indicate you can use them with the previous selection. You cannot complete Attempt to complete all the programming more quickly. The time- the programming. The out values have been exceeded during the programming. The printer/copier times out values can be changed. too quickly and resets For more information about adjusting the machine timeouts, refer to the default settings. to the section entitled Setting the Common Settings, in the User Guide (Machine Administrator). 7– 1 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 247. Resolving Processor Problems Problem Suggested Solution Transparencies Load transparencies by following the instructions in the section Loading Stock, in the User Guide (Copier). 11 x 17 (A3) Remove each copy of 11x17 inch (A3) transparencies from the transparencies jam Output Tray before subsequent copies exit the printer/copier when exiting the printer/copier to the output tray Transparencies stick Select the Transparency Separators feature to eliminate the problem. together after copying For more information about this feature refer to the section entitled Transparency Separators, in the User Guide (Copier). Multiple sheets feed – Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Trays from the Trays 1 and 2 hold approximately 520 sheets each of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Tray 3 850 sheets 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper, Tray 4: 1150 sheets 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper – Remove the paper from the Tray and fan the sheets to separate the joined sheets. – Predrilled sheets may stick together at the holes. Remove the paper from the Tray and fan the sheets to separate the joined sheets Multiple sheets feed – Paper and transparencies may stick together if environmental from Tray 5 (Bypass) conditions are too dry and cause excessive static. Increase the humidity level in the printer/copier room to minimize static. – Do not overload Tray 5 (Bypass). – Gently fan transparencies to separate the sheets before you load them into Tray 5 (Bypass). If multiple sheet feeding continues, feed the transparencies one at a time from Tray 5 (Bypass). Sheets will not feed – Ensure that the height of the stack does not exceed the MAX fill from the Tray 5 line. (Bypass) – Check that the paper guide is not too tight. The paper guide should be adjusted to be just snug against the paper stack. Paper jams when – Ensure that the edge guides of the paper trays fit snugly against exiting the Trays the paper stack. – Do not fill the paper trays above the MAX fill line indicator. Tray 1 and 2 hold approximately 520 sheets of 24 lb. (90gsm) paper. Tray 3 holds approximately 850 sheets of 24 lb. (90gsm) paper and tray 4 holds approximately 1150 sheets of 24lb (90 gsm) paper. Close the Tray slowly to avoid shifting the paper stack. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 – 13
  • 248. Problem Suggested Solution Output jams when – Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the paper tray. exiting the printer/ When the Finisher Transport is present the Center Output Tray copier to the Center can hold up to 200 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Empty the Output Tray (when the Tray when output approaches this limit, to ensure continuous Finisher is installed) production. – Ensure the first sheet is not blocking the paper exit, particularly for 11x17 inch output. Output jams when – Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the Tray. exiting the printer/ – The Center Output Tray has a capacity of 400 sheets of 24lb copier to the Center (90gsm) paper. Remove the output when it approached this limit Output Tray (when the to ensure continuous production. Ensure the first sheet is not Finisher is not blocking the paper exit, particularly for 11x17 inch output. installed) 11 x 17 inch output Ensure the first sheet of 11x17 inch output exits completely. blocks exit Copies originating from The paper guide on Tray 5 (Bypass) may not be set correctly or may Tray 5 (Bypass) are be too tight against the paper stack. Ensure that the paper guide skewed. Jams may be snugly touches the paper stack. occurring Printer/copier does not For the Auto Paper selection to function correctly, the size of the make copies when original document must be the same size as the paper supply that is Auto Paper is selected. loaded in at least one of the trays. If not, select the paper tray size that best meets your needs. Or if you wish to continue to use the Auto Paper feature, load one of the trays with the same size paper as the original document. Loss of information or – If you must use folded or creased paper, use a lightweight paper, image deletions on 24 lb. (90 gsm). Also, avoid imaging the copy paper in the are of copies made on paper the fold or the crease. that has been folded or – Handle the copy paper carefully. Slight folds or creases may creased. result in output deletions. 7– 1 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 249. Problem Suggested Solution Excessive paper curl – Paper curl may be a result of: – The mass of toner coverage on the copy - the greater the toner mass, the greater the paper curl. – The paper weight. – The humidity conditions at the printer/copier. – You can sometimes minimize curl problems by flipping the paper over in the tray and making the copies again. If excessive curl is still present, use a heavier paper. – Ensure the paper matches the type defined for the Paper Tray. – Attempt to minimize the amount of toner on the copy paper by selecting the Photo feature as the Original Type and /or the lighter and/or less contrast image quality options. – When the Finisher is present the Center Output Tray can hold up to 200 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Empty the output tray when output approaches this limit to ensure continuous production. – The Center Output Tray has a capacity of 400 sheets of 24 lb. (90 gsm) paper. Remove the output when it approaches this limit to ensure continuous production. – Copying high density background areas or documents with alternating high and low density areas results in more curl. Attempt to reduce the amount of curl by adjusting the copy quality controls to reduce the amount of toner on the copies. – Place the printer/copier and paper in a room with air conditioning and low humidity to minimize the moisture in the environment. – Attempt to copy on thicker paper or on paper stock that is less sensitive to moisture. Wrinkled Copies or Prints – The following factors increase the likelihood of this problem: – Lighter weight papers (i.e. 24 lb./90 gsm or lighter) – Larger papers (i.e. 11 x 17 inch / A3) – Short Grain 11 x 17 inch / A3 papers – Old (not freshly opened) paper – Humid environment – 2 Sided / Duplex copying or printing – To eliminate / minimize this problem: – Use fresh paper from a newly opened ream – Use Long Grain 11 x 17 inch / A3 paper – Use a heavier weight paper – If the problem persists, contact your Xerox Customer Support Center. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 – 15
  • 250. Resolving Output Problems using Basic Copying, Added Features, and Image Quality Tabs For more information on the features on these tabs, refer to the section entitled Copier Features, in the Copy chapter. Problem Suggested Solution Moiré patterns on the This problem occurs when original documents have halftone images. copies Perform the suggested solutions in the following order: – Use the Sharpness feature to select Softer options until the moiré patterns are not visible. – If using Photo mode, switch to Text & Photo mode. – Select Halftone as the Original Type. – Rotate the original on the Document Glass by 180 degrees. – Reduce or enlarge the output by 5%. The entire document is – Enter the Original Size. not being copied – Reduce the image. – Ensure that the document placement matches the Original Orientation setting. Scattered, very light – Select Background Suppression in the Preset Color Balance show-through images feature on the Image Quality tab. occur when copying a – To eliminate the unwanted show-through images, place the thin document that is on (translucent) document on the Document Glass. Cover the thin paper document with a black (or very dark) sheet of paper that is the same size as the document you are copying. – Place the 2-sided original document on the document Glass with a blank sheet of paper on top of it. A black border appears Select Auto Center in the Margin Shift feature or Border Erase on at the edge of the copy the Added Features tab. when a reduction option is selected A black border appears – Select Auto Center in the Margin Shift feature or Border Erase on the copy of a small on the Added Features tab. document Or – Program the Original Size on the Scan Options tab for the dark bordered document that you wish to copy. Colors are incorrect or – Perform an Auto Gradation Adjustment. have shifted over time. For more information on Auto Gradation Adjustment, refer to the User Guide (Machine Administrator). 7– 1 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 251. Problem Suggested Solution Deletions on the copy – Edge deletion on all sides of the copy is normal, and is greatest edges. on the lead edge of the copy. Set the Border Erase feature, Variable Erase option, to 4mm to minimize the deletion. Select the size for the original document on the Scan Options tab and an appropriate setting from the Reduce/Enlarge option from the Basic Copying tab. – Moisture may be present in the paper. Load a fresh supply of paper into the trays. – Some deletions may be caused by small pieces of paper remaining in the printer/copier components after a paper jam has been cleared. When clearing a paper jam, be sure to look for and remove any paper fragments. Copies made from Most emulsions used to develop photographs have color. Sometimes photographs show this color shows on the border of the photograph. To prevent the color or background on color from being copied as part of the image or as background, use output edges one of the following suggested solutions: – Select Background Suppression in the Image Quality Presets feature on the Image Quality tab. – Use the Border Erase feature on the Added Features tab to deliberately erase the unwanted color or background from the edge. The copies made using Select the Original Size feature and program the exact size of the 100% Reduce/Enlarge dark bordered document that you wish to copy. feature do not include the entire image along the edge of the document. Output is too light Use the Lighter/Darker feature to select a darker level. Select the Text or Maps option in the Original Type feature. Output is too dark Use the Lighter/Darker feature to select a lighter level. Select the Photo option in the Original Type feature Output has too much – Select less Contrast (toward Lower) on the Light/Dark/Contrast contrast feature on the Image Quality tab. – Select less Color Saturation (toward Lower) on the Sharpness/ Saturation feature on the Image Quality tab. Output has low – Select more Contrast (toward Higher) on the Light/Dark/Contrast contrast feature on the Image Quality tab. – Select more Color Saturation (toward Higher) on the Sharpness/ Saturation feature on the Image Quality tab. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 – 17
  • 252. Problem Suggested Solution Background on copies – Examine the input document for the source of the problem. – Ensure that the document is held flat on the Document Glass and that the document cover is closed. – From the Image Quality tab, adjust the Lighter/Darker control to lighter. – When making Black copies, select Black as the output color. Reduce the color Balance-Low Density values so that the background does not appear on the copies. – When copying colors, set the Output Color to Auto Color and select Auto Exposure so that the background does not appear on the copies. – Determine the type of document you are copying. From the Original Type feature, indicate whether the original is Photo & Text, Text, Photo or other color originals (Maps) for best copy quality. NOTE:You can select the Photo option for documents other than photographs if the document contains areas of different density, from light to dark, and all levels of density need to be copied. The copies are blurred – Increase the Sharpness. when copying thick – Select the Text or Other Color Originals (Maps) option in the documents, three- Original Type feature dimensional objects, or books – Ensure that the document is held flat on the Document Glass and that the Document cover (DADF) is closed as much as possible. DO NOT force the cover closed. Copies have dark – The bands may be caused by curled edges on the document or bands on the lead edge by misregistration of the document on the Document Glass. and a corner when – Ensure that the document is registered correctly. 100% Reduce/Enlarge is selected. – Ensure that the Border Erase is at No Erase (2mm). Increasing the amount of the Border Erase should remove more of the dark bands. Increasing the amount of Border Erase, however, may eventually cause image loss. Copies have dark – The bands may be caused by curled edges on the document or bands on the lead edge by misregistration of the document by the Duplex Automatic and a corner when Document Feeder (DADF). 100% Reduce/Enlarge – Ensure that the document is registered correctly. is selected and the DADF is used. – Ensure that the Border Erase is at No Erase (2mm). Increasing the amount of the Border Erase should remove more of the dark bands. Increasing the amount of Border Erase, however, may eventually cause image loss. 7– 1 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 253. Problem Suggested Solution Corner Shift appears in If the document is positioned on the Document Glass in the short the wrong area on the edge direction, and the paper used for copying is in the long edge copy feed direction, the copy will appear to be positioning the corner shift selection in the wrong corner. Corner shift selections are referenced from the Document Glass location. NOTE:Corner Shift is also intended only for documents that are smaller than the copy paper selected. Copies have black – No shift is selected. Select Auto Center to eliminate the black borders. Large black borders. borders appear on the – Also, select the Auto Center feature to eliminate the black when copies with documents using the Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). smaller than the copy paper size. Copies made from a – The DocuColor Series printer/copier detects low densities of color newspaper, a map, or a and reproduces them. This is especially true with the Maps and photograph have Photo options. The background can be reproduced or eliminated background when by adjusting the Lighter/Darker feature toward lighter. Original Type is defined – Newspaper show-through can be reduced or eliminated by as Map or Photo. backing the document with a black sheet of paper. – Use the Auto Exposure option in the Image Quality tab. The image density of This defect is noticeable only when the input document has large the copy seems lighter solid areas. To reduce or eliminate this defect, select the Photo toward the trail edge option in the Original Type feature of the Image Quality tab. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 – 19
  • 254. Calling for Service There is information and support available at www.Xerox.com. There you can find answers to many of your questions, solutions to problems, order toner and supplies, and request service support. For information on clearing fault codes, refer to the section entitled Fault Codes, in this chapter. There may be times when you will not be able to correct a problem. When this happens, you should call for service. The numbers for calling for service are as follows. • North America: 1-800-821-2797 • Europe: _____________________ Be prepared to provide a complete description of the problem to the service operator. This includes the following information: • Machine Serial Number - Press the Machine Status button, then select Machine Information to view the serial number. • Fault Codes The Fault Code will appear on the screen when a fault occurs. Defining the problem accurately may help to solve the problem over the phone and minimize downtime. If the problem cannot be resolved by telephone, a service representative will be dispatched to your machine promptly. 7– 2 0 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 255. Fault Codes This section describes the fault codes that are displayed on the UI screen and refer you to the DocuColor 3535 User Guide for information. If the fault code is not specified in the table, refer to the information with fault code “xxx-xxx” at the end of the table for instructions. Fault Code Cause/Remedy 003-747 • Cause - An illegal print feature combination was set. • Remedy - Check the print data. 003-761 • Cause - The paper size in the Tray selected by Auto Tray Switching is different from the paper in the Tray selected in Tray Selection. • Remedy - Change the paper size for the Tray, or change the paper type priority setting. 003-795 • Cause - The Reduce/Enlarge ratio exceeds the setting range when the scanned document is enlarged/reduced to the specified paper size. • Remedy - Enter the Reduce/Enlarge ratio, or change the paper size. 015-790 • Cause - The scanned document is a copy-prohibited document • Remedy - See the section entitled Illegal Copies in the front section of the DocuColor 3535 User Guide to check the types of documents that can be copied. 016-450 • Cause - The SMB host name has been set twice. • Remedy - Change the host name. 016-452 • Cause - The IP address has been set twice. • Remedy - Change the IP address. 016-453 • Cause - Failed to acquire the IP address from the DHCP server. • Remedy - Set the IP address manually. 016-454 • Cause - Could not acquire the IP address from DNS. • Remedy - Confirm the DNS settings and IP address acquisition method setting. 016-735 • Cause - An attempt was made to print a job template while it was being updated. • Remedy - Wait a while before instructing printing again. 016-737 • Cause - An error occurred during reading of data from the job template pool server. • Remedy - Check the access rights of the directory to which the job template is stored. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 – 21
  • 256. Fault Code Cause/Remedy 016-739 • Cause - Could not find the specified job template pool server. • Remedy - Check the path name to the job template pool server. 016-740 • Cause - Could not log into the job template pool server. • Remedy - Check the login user name, password, and other information. 016-741 • Cause - Could not connect to the job template pool server. • Remedy - Ask the network administrator to check the network environment or server environment. 016-742 • Cause - The job template could not be stored to memory due to insufficient hard disk space. • Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-743 • Cause - The settings on the job template pool server are incorrect. • Remedy - Check the settings of the job template pool server. 016-748 • Cause - Printing is not possible due to insufficient hard disk space. • Remedy - Reduce the number of pages of print data, for example, by dividing up the print data or printing one copy at a time when making multiple copies. 016-757 • Cause - The entered password is wrong. • Remedy - Enter the correct password. 016-758 • Cause - The account is not registered as an authorized copy user. • Remedy - Contact the System Administrator. 016-759 • Cause - The maximum number of copies has been reached. • Remedy - Contact the System Administrator. 016-778 • Cause - Conversion of the scanned image was discontinued due to insufficient hard disk space. • Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-779 • Cause - An error occurred during conversion processing of the scanned image. • Remedy - Instruct scanning again. 016-780 • Cause - An error occurred on the hard disk during conversion processing of the scanned image. • Remedy - A probable cause is hard disk malfunction. For information about replacing hard disks, contact your Xerox Customer Support Center. 016-781 • Cause - Could not connect to the server during file forwarding by Scan Services. • Remedy - Ask the network administrator to check the network environment or server environment. 7– 2 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 257. Fault Code Cause/Remedy 016-782 • Cause - Could not login to the server during file forwarding by Scan Services. • Remedy - Check the login user name, password, and other information. 016-783 • Cause - Could not find the specified server path during file forwarding by Scan Services. • Remedy - Check the path name of the server currently set to the job template. 016-784 • Cause - A write to server error occurred during file forwarding by Scan Services. • Remedy - Confirm that there is sufficient space in the directory on the server, and that access rights are present. 016-785 • Cause - The file could not be sent due to insufficient space on the server’s hard disk by Scan Services. • Remedy - Delete unwanted data from the server’s hard disk to increase hard disk space. 016-787 • Cause - The server IP address set to the job template is illegal. • Remedy - Specify the correct job template. 016-788 • Cause - Failed to retrieve the file from the Web browser. • Remedy - Refresh the browser page, or restart the browser, or turn the machine off then on again. Try retrieving the file again. 020-530 • Cause - No correct operations were performed in a certain period of time. • Remedy - Perform an operation within a certain period of time. xxx-xxx • Cause - An error occurred. (Fault Code) For all other • Remedy - Turn the machine Off, wait for the display on the control panel to go Fault Codes out, then turn the machine back On again. If the same message is displayed, not listed in record the message in (***-***). Next, turn the machine Off, wait for the display the above on the Control Panel to go out, then contact your Xerox Customer Support table. Center. Abnormal • Cause - An error occurred causing the operation to end abnormally. End (***-***) • Remedy - Program the same operation again. Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier 7 – 23
  • 258. 7– 2 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 259. Index Numerics 2 Sided 1–21, 1–32 2 Sided Originals 3–8, 3–11 A Added Features Tab 1–31 2 Sided 1–32 Border Erase 1–41 IN D EX Margin Shift 1–38 Output 1–35 Audio Tones 1–8 Auditron Administration 4–56 Create/Check Accounts 4–57 Delete/Reset All Account Data 4–61 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4–58 Enabling Auditron 4–59 Printing Meter Reports 4–62 System Administrator Data 4–60 Auto Exposure 1–46, 3–23 Auto Gradation Adjustment 4–24 Auto Tray Switching 5–3 B Basic Copying Tab 1–18 2 Sided 1–21 Output Color 1–19 Paper Supply 1–28 Reduce/Enlarge 1–24 Basic Scanning Tab 3–4 2 Sided Originals 3–8 Job Template 3–5 Output Color 3–6 Scanning Resolution 3–7 Billing Meters 1–90 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier Index–1 1
  • 260. INDEX Book Duplex 1–74 Booklet Creation 1–81 Border Erase 1–41, 3–19 Bound Originals 1–70, 3–17 Build Job 1–79 C Calling for Service 7–20 Certifications in Europe xii Changing Settings in System Settings Mode 4–6 Changing Staple Cartridges 6–10 Changing the Drum Cartridges 6–16 Changing the Fuser 6–11 Changing the Waste Toner Container 6–14 Changing Toner Cartridges 6–7 Checking Consumables 1–90 Checking Paper Trays 1–89 Cleaning the DADF and Document Glass 6–3 Cleaning the ROS Window 6–4 Color Balance 1–50 Color Shift 1–49 Common Settings 4–7 Audio Tones 4–10 Auto Gradation Adjustment 4–24 Image Quality Adjustment 4–21 Machine Clock/Timers 4–8 Other Machine Settings 4–26 Paper Tray Attributes 4–13 Printing Priority 4–20 Screen Defaults 4–12 Configuring the Client for Scanning 3–26 Control Panel 1–4 Conventions xviii Symbols xviii Copier Features 1–18 Added Features Tab 1–31 Basic Copying Tab 1–18 Image Quality Tab 1–43 Job Assembly Tab 1–76 Output Format Tab 1–52 Scan Options Tab 1–66 Copy 1–1 Copy Mode Settings 4–26 Basic Copying Presets 4–27 Copy Control 4–41 In d ex – 2 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 261. INDEX Copy Defaults 4–28 Custom Colors 4–44 Original Size Defaults 4–42 Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–43 Covers 1–59 Create/Check Accounts 4–57 Creating Job Templates 3–4 D DADF 1–8, 1–82 Component Names and Functions 1–82 Document Specifications 1–83 Documents Not Recommended 1–84 Loading the Documents 1–84 Delete/Reset All Account Data 4–61 Deleting/Resetting Data by Account 4–58 I ND EX Document Glass 1–8 Document Jams 7–8 Left Cover (Top) 7–8 Original Input Area and Document Glass 7–9 E Electrical Safety vii Disconnect Device viii Enabling Auditron 4–59 Entering the System Settings Mode 4–5 Envelopes 5–7 Environmental Notices for Canada xvi Environmental Notices for the USA xvi Error History Report 1–90 Exiting the System Settings Mode 4–6 F Fault Codes 7–21 File Format 3–24 Finisher 5–14 Stapling Options 5–15 Using the Finisher 5–14 G Getting to Know Your Copier 1–1 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier Index–3
  • 262. INDEX H How to Pause or Cancel a Scanning Job 3–25 How to Scan 3–2 I Image Quality Presets 1–51 Image Quality Tab 1–43 Auto Exposure 1–46 Color Balance 1–50 Color Shift 1–49 Image Quality Presets 1–51 Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1–47 Original Type 1–44 Sharpness/Saturation 1–48 Image Quality/File Format Tab 3–21 Auto Exposure 3–23 File Format 3–24 Lighter/Darker/Contrast 3–22 Image Rotation 1–72 In Canada xi It’s Illegal in Canada xv It’s Illegal in the USA xiii J Job Assembly Tab 1–76 Booklet Creation 1–81 Build Job 1–79 Stored Jobs 1–77 Job Status 1–86 Changing the Print Priority 1–87 Checking Completed Jobs 1–88 Checking Current Jobs 1–86 Job Template 3–5 L Laser Safety viii Lighter/Darker/Contrast 1–47, 3–22 Loading Paper 5–1 12 x 18 inch 5–10 Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3 Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 5–2, 5–8 Loading Stock 5–4 Envelopes 5–7 In d ex – 4 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 263. INDEX Paper 5–4 Transparencies 5–6 Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–9 M Machine Administrator 4–1 Machine Information 1–91 Machine Specifications 5–12 Dimensions and Weight 5–13 Speed by Media 5–12 Machine Status 1–89 Billing Meters and Printing Reports 1–90 Checking Consumables 1–90 Checking Paper Trays 1–89 Error History Report 1–90 Machine Information 1–91 I ND EX Maintenance 6–1 Maintenance Safety ix Making Copies from the Document Glass 1–13 Making Copies Using Features 1–14 Making Copies Using the DADF 1–12 Managing Scanned Documents 3–26 Margin Shift 1–38 Auto Center 1–39 Variable Shift 1–40 Mirror Image/Negative Image 1–65 Mixed Size Originals 1–69, 3–13 Multiple Up 1–53 N Network Settings 4–44 Notices xi Certifications in Europe xii Environmental Notices for Canada xvi Environmental Notices for the USA xvi It’s Illegal in Canada xv It’s Illegal in the USA xiii Radio Frequency Emissions xi O Operational Safety ix Ordering Consumables 6–2 Original Orientation 1–73 Original Size 1–67 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier Index–5
  • 264. INDEX Original Type 1–44 Output 1–35 Stapling 1–37 Output Color 1–19, 3–6 Output Format Tab 1–52 Covers 1–59 Mirror Image/Negative Image 1–65 Multiple Up 1–53 Poster 1–63 Repeat Image 1–61 Transparency Separators 1–56 Output Trays 1–10 Ozone Safety x P Paper Jam Clearance 7–2 Bottom Left Cover 7–4 Center Tray Exit 7–7 Duplex Unit 7–6 Finisher Interface 7–7 Finisher Top Cover 7–6 Left Center Cover 7–4 Top Left Cover 7–3 Tray 5 (Bypass) 7–5 Trays 1 to 4 7–5 Paper Supply 1–28 Tray 5 (Bypass) 1–29 Paper Trays 1–9 3-Tray Module 1–9 Tandem Tray Module 1–9 Tray 5 (Bypass) 1–10 Poster 1–63 Power Saver Mode 1–11 Power Switch 1–8 Print 2–1 Printing Meter Reports 4–62 Printing Reports 1–90 Product Recycling and Disposal xvii Q Quick Start Guide to Copying 1–12 R Radio Frequency Emissions xi In d ex – 6 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 265. INDEX FCC in the USA xi In Canada xi Reduce/Enlarge 1–24, 3–14 Auto% 3–16 Independent X-Y% 1–27 Presets % 1–25, 3–14 Variable% 1–26, 3–15 Repeat Image 1–61 Resolving Hardware Problems 7–11 Resolving Output Quality Problems 7–16 Resolving Processor Problems 7–13 Resolving Programming Problems 7–12 S Safety Extra Low Voltage Approval xii Safety Notices vii I ND EX Electrical Safety vii Laser Safety viii Maintenance Safety ix Operational Safety ix Ozone Safety x Scan 3–1 Scan Mode Settings 4–46 Basic Scanning Presets 4–46 Other Settings 4–54 Output Size Defaults 4–52 Reduce/Enlarge Presets 4–53 Scan Defaults 4–47 Scan Size Defaults 4–51 Scan Options Tab 1–66, 3–10 2 Sided Originals 3–11 Book Duplex 1–74 Border Erase 3–19 Bound Originals 1–70, 3–17 Image Rotation 1–72 Mixed Size Originals 1–69, 3–13 Original Orientation 1–73 Original Size 1–67 Reduce/Enlarge 3–14 Scan Size 3–12 Scan Size 3–12 Scanning Features 3–4 Basic Scanning Tab 3–4 Image Quality/File Format Tab 3–21 Scan Options Tab 3–10 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier Index–7
  • 266. INDEX Scanning in Batches 3–25 Scanning Resolution 3–7 Setting and Changing the Administrator Password 4–3 Sharpness/Saturation 1–48 Specifications 5–1 Stapler Faults 7–10 Stored Jobs 1–77 Deleting a Job 1–78 Retrieving a Job 1–78 Symbols xviii System Administrator Data 4–60 System Settings 4–2 T Touch Screen 1–7 Transparencies 5–6 Transparency Separators 1–56 Blank Separators 1–57 Separators + N Sets 1–58 Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3 Auto Size Detect for Tray 5 (Bypass) 5–3 Loading SRA3 Paper 5–11 Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 5–2 3-Tray Module 5–2 Tandem Tray Module 5–2 Troubleshooting 7–1 In d ex – 8 Xerox DocuColor 3535 Printer/Copier
  • 268. 701P39761 March 2003 Xerox Corporation Global Knowledge and Language Services 780 Salt Road Webster, New York 14580